Issuu on Google+

ISSUE 1 2011 A u s t r a l i a ’s c o n n e c t i o n b e t w e e n p u b l i c a n d p r i v a t e s e c t o r s


$269 Residential Conference Package May - June 2011*

8 Whiteman Street, Southbank VIC, Australia, 3006 Phone: +61 3 9292 6968 Email: conferences@crownmelbourne.com.au *Terms and conditions apply. Package includes overnight accommodation in a Standard room at Crown Promenade Hotel. Visit www.crowneventsandconferences.com.au for details.


the all new crown During the past year, Crown has ContinueD to grow from strength to strength with the suCCessful opening of Crown metropol - whiCh is home to isiKa Day spa, new event spaCe offerings, the opening of neil perry’s two new restaurants – the waiting room anD spiCe temple, anD Donavan CooKe’s muCh antiCipateD seafooD restaurant – the atlantiC.

New restauraNts The WaiTing Room and Spice Temple Crown is proud to be home to Neil Perry’s two latest ventures, The Waiting Room and Spice Temple. The Waiting Room, or simply known as T.W.R, has already been referred to as the ‘jewel in the Crown’. Located in the glamorous Crown Towers lobby, the bar is proving to be a popular meeting place for diners, hotel guests, and available for events in its private rooms. The cocktail list is nothing short of innovative and ground-breaking with names such as ‘Burnt Toast’ and ‘Corn and Oil’.

New eveNts veNue- 28 Crown Metropol is pleased to announce that the hotel’s exclusive bar and guest lounge, 28, is now available to host intimate events. This stylish and contemporary space boasts an outdoor terrace and stunning panoramic views of the Melbourne skyline. Seated events such as lunches and dinners can accommodate up to 60 guests while cocktail parties can cater for up to 200 guests. Liam Nealon, 28’s dedicated chef can tailor a bespoke menu created specifically to meet an event organiser’s requirements. Crown Metropol also features four stylish meeting rooms, three of which cater for up to 40 guests and one for up to 50 guests. Two of the meeting rooms can be combined to host a total of 90 guests. The space also features a pre-function area and is ideal for meetings, presentations and small cocktail parties. For more information or to enquire about booking an event at 28, please contact aidanb@crownmelbourne.com.au or visit www.crownmetropol.com.au. For more information about the meeting rooms, please visit www.crownmetropol.com.au, or phone +61 3 9292 6211.

Spice Temple is the latest hot destination to try modern Chinese cuisine. The two level restaurant features a private dining room, bar and restaurant and is available for events. With a sexy interior and spicy-filled menu, Spice Temple is Melbourne’s new must-try restaurant. The aTlanTic

CrowN towers The most exclusive experience in Crown Towers can be found in its palatial villas. Recently upgraded, the result is a fresher, cleaner palette of colours, offering the epitome of world-class accommodation. Located on the uppermost floors, each has the character of a penthouse residence. The villas are attended by a service-oriented team of butlers, on call 24-hours, and are accessible by three private express lifts. Each room and suite has been individually designed to create a residential experience for frequent guests and those who appreciate tailored luxury.

Internationally acclaimed chef Donavan Cooke delivers visitors with a seafood experience to remember. Contemporary and minimalist, this modern seafood brassiere and oyster bar will replicate the sensation of an authentic seafood market. Diners will be overwhelmed by the visual feast of fresh fish of every variety on display and their taste buds will marvel at the unparalleled quality of fresh seafood. With a 300-seat capacity, The Atlantic offers a myriad of seating options plus several private and exclusive dining areas. Outside, there is a dedicated al fresco dining area on the banks of the Yarra, taking in Melbourne’s city skyline. Once you have enjoyed an amazing meal, head downstairs to The Den. As the name suggests, this is the place to retreat for a pre or post dinner drink. For more information please visit www.crownmelbourne.com.au, or phone +61 3 9292 8888.


Foreword 1

ALGA President Genia McCaffery Strategy Development

2

Is your program governance maximising your investment? Park lands – Maintenance and Irrigation

8 17

Adelaide park lands - Adelaide city council Construction Equipment Work Safety and Risk Management

19

OHS harmonisation – from the Act to the codes – Norton Rose law firm by Aaron Anderson

27

Progressing model work health and safety legislation across Australia – Safe Work Australia

34

Imagine a world without standards

35

How to find money for OHS - Australian Exhibitions and Conferences

40

Queensland Safety Show Preview - Australian Exhibitions and Conferences

46

What you need to know about the new height safety rules - Australian Exhibitions and Conferences

49

Getting the Fire Safety message through to government - Australian Exhibitions and Conferences Environmental friendly buildings

50

From voluntary to vital – green building and the government sector

55

Building sustainable communities - a multi-disciplinary approach – SLR Global Environmental Solutions

58

Going green from the inside out – NABERS

62

A commitment to sustainability – NABERS

68

National Australian Built Environment Rating system - NABERS

71

Giving commercial properties a green boost – Local Government Super

78

Research to Reduce the cost of Sustainable Solar Energy – Australian Solar Institute

82

The Climate of Change – Carbon Tax and the economy – Jarrod Fitch

83

Australian Green Infrastructure Council

92

Adelaide – leading the way in sustainability – Adelaide City Council

Editor Kathryn Edwards Email: editor@aprs.com.au Editorial assistant Jarrod Fitch Lead Graphic Designer Michael Griffiths

Graphic designers Bianca Fidge Kimberley Smith Kasha Abbott Louie Smale Marketing Johnathon Dunstan Publisher Garth Wright

iv


Security 100

Cybersecurity: constant challenge, constant vigilance – Australian Information Security Association

107

Safety in the City – Australian Security Industry Association Fleet Management – IPWEA – AFMA

122

When a simple journey turns into a roller coaster ride – Australia Fleet Managers Association

130

Strong Response to IPWEA’s Fleet Management Certificate - IPWEA Car Parking Solutions

134

Car Parking Association of Australia

142

Car Parking accreditation scheme – City of Melbourne and Victorian Police Traffic Management

148

Roads to recovery – Roads Australia Conference Venues and Solutions

154

Getting the most from your conference – Informa Australia

164

The changing face of conference Management – Professional Conference Organisers Association Telecommunications

174

Government contact centres lead the charge – Australian Telecommunications Association Waste Management

182

The future of waste and resource management - Waste Management Association of Australia Records and Information Management

191

In today’s business environment – Records and Information Management Professionals Australasia

CEO Gary Peach General Manager Graham Miles Printer Newstyle Printing Co. Pty Ltd 41 Manchester Street Mile End, SA 5031 Phone: 08 8234 6155

APRS Head Office Level 6, 38 Currie Street, Adelaide, South Australia, 5000 G.P.O Box 1746, Adelaide SA 5001 Phone: 08 8113 9200 Fax: 08 8113 9201 Pre-Press: 08 8113 9206 Email: prepress@aprs.com.au

Disclaimer APRS is not committed to nor takes responsibility for the views expressed in articles or advertisements herein. The publishers could not possibly ensure that each advertisement published in this magazine complies with the Trade Practices Act and responsibility must therefore rest with the person, company or agency submitting the advertisement for publication.

Advertising Cedric Vasseur: 08 8113 9224

v


YOU ASKED, POLARIS RANGER ANSWERED.

Ranger EV Electric Vehicle

The Polaris Ranger Side by Side line-up offers classleading combinations of power, payload, traction and ride quality. Whether your requirements are 2, 3, 4 or 6 seats - the choice of diesel, electric or petrol power plants - 4 or 6 All-Wheel Drive, contact us today to discuss which Ranger models best suit your requirements. POLARIS RANGER

CORPORATE & GOVERNMENT ENQUIRIES // +61 409 411 510 // corporate@polarisindustries.com.au www.polarisindustries.com.au


Foreword

Local government, despite being the backbone of local communities and local economies and delivers infrastructure and services which everybody needs, is the only level of government not recognised in the Australian Constitution. We now have the additional uncertainty of the Commonwealth Government’s power to directly fund local government which makes constitutional reform critical, so that we can continue to provide vital services to our communities. The High Court’s decision in July last year in the case Pape v Commissioner of Taxation has brought into question the Commonwealth’s legal ability to fund local government directly, because it is not included in the Constitution. Such a result would have a devastating impact on our local communities, particularly those in rural and regional areas. Ensuring that the services and infrastructure needed by communities can be delivered by local government lies at the heart of our pursuit of constitutional reform. Including local government in the Australian Constitution will protect the local services that we take for granted and ensure that councils have the funding security to provide the level of services that local communities need and deserve. Local road funding is currently provided under the Roads to Recovery Program and community infrastructure funding under the Local Community Infrastructure Program. By any measure these two programs have been extremely successful examples of the partnership between the Australian Government and local government. The Australian Local Government Association has been involved in extensive consultation with local government, the broader community and state and federal politicians. Prime Minister Gillard has promised a dual referendum during the life of this parliament - the people will be asked to vote on two issues - the constitutional recognition of local government and recognition of Indigenous Australians as the nation’s first people.

particularly young Australians, have little understanding of the Constitution or the process required to change it. There is a need to educate the public about the Constitution - not only about what it contains, but that it should be a living document which needs amendment every now and then to remain appropriate to the Australia of the 21st Century. I am making constitutional reform a priority in my term as ALGA president. The clear objective of this reform will be a positive result in our referendum so that all of Australia’s local communities get the chance to achieve their full potential. Many councils around Australia are passing resolutions in favour or constitutional recognition and writing to their state and federal MPs to inform them about this crucial issue. Planning is well underway for this year’s NGA on 19-21 June 2011 with the theme Growing with our Communities - Place, Position & Partnership. The theme will enable local government to focus on the key priorities/core issues facing local government and their communities in the future. The sub-themes will encourage discussion on planning, governance, funding and finances, service models of delivery, climate change and settlement policy, within the broader context of partnerships across levels of government and agencies. It will also be an opportunity to increase the community’s understanding of the role of local government and its place in government, and will be an important component in increasing awareness and understanding of local government in the lead up to the referendum on constitutional recognition. Yours sincerely Mayor Genia McCaffery ALGA President

The Prime Minister’s announcement and indications of bipartisan support are enormous steps toward a referendum, but we do not underestimate the task ahead - a majority of voters in a majority of states and an overall majority of voters, need to vote yes for a referendum to succeed. Our research shows that many Australians,

1


Strategy development

Is your Program Governance

maximising your investment?

Good governance does not stop a program from failure but the lack of governance or inadequate governance can guarantee that a program will fail. Authors: Cecily Macdougall, Managing Director, Building4Business Pty Ltd and Corinne Cadilhac, Executive Director, Victorian State Government

Organisations with inadequate governance may experience program delays, missed deadlines, cost and time overruns, downtime, security lapses and even cancellations (PM World Today May 2008). Inadequate governance, either structure or competency, may inadvertently lead to the demise of a program if the members do not understand their role and the role of governance. The accountability for a failure to successfully deliver a program and its benefits, rests with the governing body and the sponsors. Dr Raymond Young, Macquarie University (Infonews NZ March 2010) reasoned that improved IT program governance practices would increase overall ROI for programs to between 135% and 240% and increase Australia’s national GDP by between 1.6% and 3.1%. Companies are currently having to think smarter and do more with less, therefore it is important that the appropriate governance be put in place to ensure quality outcomes. Good governance has a governing body that ensures that there is strong sponsorship, competent teams, stakeholder involvement and monitoring systems in place. This governing body ensures that the program maintains alignment to strategy and organisational direction and that the program delivers the required end results. This governing body broadens the political support for a program. It improves the quality of decision making and communication and encourages positive assistance

2

when things are not smooth sailing. This is vital for a program/project that crosses boundaries. For major change programs it is so vital, that if a program/project cannot acquire or maintain the appropriate sponsorship, then one should consider not proceeding or continuing. Good governance discerns the difference between program functions and line management functions. Good governance empowers the team to deliver within the required timelines and understands the difference between the roles of a program and consulting. Ensure Success – The Key Ingredients You’ll Need Governance is multifaceted and a well structured governance model provides: • Defined accountabilities • Clear roles and responsibilities • Clear reporting • Clear information flows • Clarity of stakeholders • Reflects the delivery model • Outlines meeting schedules • Clear scope • Transparent financial authorities • Ethical behaviours • Dispute and conflict resolution escalation channels


Many people believe governance is about red tape and blocking, however it is quite the opposite. If the governance structure in place is time consuming and is disempowering for a program, then it is likely that the governance structure is incorrect. An incorrect governance drives incorrect behaviours and motivations in the same way that an incorrect measurement system drives incorrect behaviours. Governance structures are context specific and need to be carefully considered for each program. Each member of the governing body has specific roles and responsibilities. We have used the following models as a basis for governance for years and regularly customise them to suit the context of the work. We have found that these structures combined with competent members, minimise program risk and enable the successful delivery of programs and programs. Some Example Governance Models

These initiatives are often complex and require a combination of independent projects to be managed in a coordinated manner. Change management should not be a separate role. If separate, the role can only influence, does not have any decision making authority and is typically overlooked and not included in relevant communications. It then has two clients, the program and the business and therefore may oscillate between the two worlds to either fall between both, become a forgotten entity, or to reduce its function to simply training. This will not achieve program outcomes. As such the Program Director needs to lead the change, the project managers manage the change and following transition and program and project closure, the change continues to be embedded by the line.

STRATEGIC CHANGE PROGRAM MANAGEMENT – Variation F

There are many governance models available to give a program or programs its best chance at success. For simplicity, we have provided a couple of examples below, Even when the generic model suits the programs needs, it is important to customise the governance to suit the context of the work.

Program Board

Program Director / Change Lead Stakeholder Advisory

This Program Management Model is used for independent programs that each provide outputs that only in combination will deliver the desired end results - an outcome for the organisation. Governance and organisation structures are context specific. Their construct needs to overlay the delivery model for smooth transition and change. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT – Model C

Reference Group(s) Program Office

Working Group(s)

- Administration - Finance - Communications

Stream Lead / Line Manager (BAU) Project Manager / Change Manager Project Teams

Project Teams

Project Teams

Project Teams

Stream Lead / Line Manager

Project Manager / Change Manager Project Teams

Project Teams

Project Teams

Project Teams

Project Manager / Change Manager Project Teams

Project Teams

Project Teams

Project Teams

Independent Projects

Program Board

Key Roles

Program Sponsor

End User

Day to Day Sponsor

Program Management Model example

Supplier

Executive Sponsor

Supplier

The essential responsibilities of each of the governing body roles are described in the attached table. It is essential that each role understands and accepts their obligations to the program and its team, as well as each others. Knowing what part they each play within the context of the overall team is the best chance we have that the group will succeed in the joint pursuit of the outcome. Importantly, in setting up the governance structure, if you miss any of these key roles in the structure, it can have a significant impact to the time, cost and quality of the programs delivery.

End User

Program Director Stakeholder Advisory

Reference Group(s)

Working Group(s)

Program Office - Administration - Finance

Project Manager

Project Manager

Program Board/Program Steering Committee Project Teams

Project Teams

Project Teams

Project Teams

Project Teams

Project Teams

Project Teams

Project Teams

Strategic Change Program Management example This change Program Management Model is used when the organisation requires the team to deliver a strategic change for the organisation.

The Program Board represents the interests of the business, the customers, the program and the investment decision. It is the decision making body that defines the direction and establishes the frameworks to achieve the desired outcomes. The Program Board has overall accountability for the program for ensuring that it delivers the end results and realises the benefits. It is accountable for the

3


Strategy development

success of the program and is responsible for assurance that program remains on course to deliver quality program outcomes as detailed in the Business Case. The Program Board provides sponsorship that means continuing executive commitment to promoting and supporting the changes introduced by the program and championing the new capabilities and benefits delivered. The program/project needs to be steered in the context of the organisation portfolio. The representatives need to be executive level to ensure a portfolio view. The Program Board is responsible for ensuring that program outcomes are aligned with whole of enterprise and departmental objectives, and are linked to other relevant programs and activities. The Program Board is also an advisory body for the program and approves changes to the program which are outside the delegation of the Program Manager and is the escalation point for unresolved issues or conflict. Good governance requires regular meetings of all parties, not just on exception basis as often is the norm. Executive Sponsor & Day to Day Sponsor

4

Program Manager/ Program Director The Program Manager/Program Director is responsible for leading and managing the implementation of the program and realisation of immediate benefits. The Program Manager is responsible for the overall integrity and coherence of the program and develops the environment to support the projects within the program. The Program Manager role involves proactive interventions and decision-making to ensure the program stays on track. The Program Manager builds competent program teams to ensure delivery and ensures maximum efficiency in the allocation of resources and skills. Programs do not have a clear path towards a well defined goal and can rarely be managed using traditional approaches. The Program Manager is responsible for coordinating and monitoring the program in an uncertain environment, effective management of risks, issues, conflicts, priorities, communications interdependencies and personnel. The Program Manager monitors expenditure against benefits and brings program risks to the attention of the Program Board. The Program Manager also reports the status of the program, costs, issues, dependencies and program needs to the Program Board.

The Executive Sponsor owns the vision for the program and provides clear leadership, sponsorship and direction throughout the program’s life. The Sponsor maintains the alignment of the program to the organisation’s strategic direction. The Sponsor is accountable for the program’s outcome, ensuring benefits are realised, the governance arrangements is in place and stakeholder interfaces with are effective. The Sponsor champions the program at all levels and promotes the benefits to the community. The Sponsor is the Chair of the Governing body and represents the organisation in official acceptance of deliverables and ensures that there are the funds and resources required to set up and run the program.

The Program Manager manages stakeholder expectations and proactively communicates progress. The Program Manager needs to lead the change, whereas project managers manage the change. Following transition and program and project closure, the change continues to be embedded by the line. The program life cycle comprises three components; delivery, change and embedding of new capabilities. However, delivery and change need to be combined to achieve the outcomes.

Sponsors must not wear a line management hat in program governance. Programs operate outside the line as they are usually cross functional and have many interdependencies and dependencies. Sponsors must enable a program to be empowered to deliver and not be constrained by the typical operational demarcations. Sponsors need to work with the program team and the Program Board to ensure that changes to scope and approach of the program will not have implications on resources, delivery or realisation of benefits.

End User Representatives

If the Program Manager is not right for the role, the overall impacts are to risk, costs, time, quality, benefits, value and outcomes.

A change in sponsor(s) represents one of the key risks to a program’s successful delivery. This role should therefore not be taken lightly.

The End User representative(s) represent the interests of the end users. They provide views on scope priorities, business impacts and technical standards and inform the program on issues pertaining to the program outputs and impacts on service delivery or service improvement opportunities. There may be more than one end user representative at a number of managerial levels. They are required to contribute resources during the development of program outputs. They are instrumental in ensuring that the deliverables of the program are specified correctly and delivered fit for purpose.

If sponsorship is not at the right level, the right person or role, the program may not be able to cross organisational boundaries and organisational changes may not be aligned and outcomes not realised. Risks and conflicts may affect the organisation and efforts may not be seen positively. If the sponsors are not right, the overall impacts are to strategy, risk, costs, time and outcomes.

If the end user representatives are not selected carefully, the user environment may not end being aligned to the program, there may be user resistance and non engagement, communication to users may be lacking and feedback may not be included in deployment. In addition delivery may not be aligned to the utilisation of outputs to achieve the outcomes. The overall impacts are to time, costs, quality and outcomes.


Supplier Representatives The supplier representative(s) may represent the internal and external suppliers. It is not common or recommended for external suppliers to be part of the governing body themselves. They ensure supplier resources are available and that any supplier and operating standards are met and effective to deliver quality products. They are responsible for ensuring specialist resources and skills are available to develop or deliver to scope, cost, time and quality. If the supplier representatives are not selected carefully, delivery may not be transitioned to operations smoothly or to standard, or interdependencies may not be aligned and cause delays. The overall impacts are to time, costs, quality and outcomes. Stakeholder Advisory Group & Reference Group(s) The Stakeholder Advisory Group provides a forum for decision making and to achieve consensus among groups of identified stakeholders of the program. Most major programs involve multiple stakeholders, each with their own interests, role and responsibilities. Some interests are shared but others may be in conflict with others or competing for limited resources. The clear identification and delineation of roles and responsibility among key stakeholders and communication of this information will assist each key stakeholder to fulfil their obligations more effectively. The purpose of this group is to provide advice on stakeholder requirements for the program’s objectives and consensus of the end user’s needs. If the Stakeholder Group representatives are not selected carefully, they will not contribute to informed decision making which may lead to a lack of buyin, little synergy and context, and no advocacy to the end user. The overall impacts are to time, costs, quality, benefits, value and outcomes. The Reference Group is a collection of people who are subject matter experts to address a particular set of issues. They provide specialist discipline input and quality assurance during implementation and assurance of the program direction. If the Reference Group representatives are not selected carefully, the end product may be non compliant or not in accordance with regulations due to incorrect advice being provided. The overall impacts are to time, costs, quality, value and outcomes. Project Manager & Project Team Each project manager is responsible for managing the project on a day to day basis and coordinating the team that will deliver the planned deliverables for the program. The Project Manager will monitor issues, ensure governance and quality procedures are in place and that commitments are followed through to create the project’s outputs.

The Project Manager needs to meet weekly with their team and with the Program Manager, to provide a forum for the early detection, resolution of problems and adequate resources for delivery. The composition of the team may change as the program moves through its life cycle stages. The assessment and selection of people with the requisite skills required for each stage is critical to its overall success. The skills should be explicitly identified as a part of the planning process. The team is responsible for completing tasks and activities required for delivering outputs. The overall impacts of incompetent project teams are to issues, time, costs, quality, outputs and outcomes. Conclusion In conclusion, Governance structures are context specific and the structure and competencies need to be carefully considered for each program. Each member of the governing body has specific accountabilities, roles and responsibilities. We have conducted many program rescues and time after time, recovery begins with a reset of the governance structure and people before the program can succeed. There are many statistics available that consistently state that over 50% of all major change efforts prove to be disappointments or outright failures. This represents significant investment which could be put to greater use. The aim is for business to perform at its best, be sustainable and engender an environment that brings out the best in its employees.

Building4Business Pty Ltd specialises in the implementation of strategy through the delivery of strategic change programs and thought leadership surrounding this area. In doing so, we build effective programs. If you would like to speak to the authors, Cecily Macdougall or Corinne Cadilhac, please contact us at: Building4Business Pty Ltd www.building4business.com.au on 03 9822 9693 or mobile 0418 394 522 or email cecily.macdougall@building4business.com.au © Building4Business Pty Ltd 5


Strategy development

Cecily Macdougall, Managing Director, Building4Business Pty Ltd

Corinne Cadilhac, Executive Director, Victorian State Government

Cecily Macdougall has extensive experience in leading strategic change and strategic change programs. As an experienced practitioner Cecily has delivered multiple strategic change programs that have been used to implement strategy, organisational renewal, build ICT capability, drive performance, address complex business challenges and produce significant and sustainable results.

Corinne has extensive experience in leading strategic projects and programs and brings together a unique combination of strategic planning, practical engineering, business development, process and people management skills. From an engineering perspective, her experience includes the management of design teams for design and construction as well as project management in feasibility development, functional design and options development, master planning, Environmental Effects Statements, transport and land use integration plans and detail design. This work includes complementary experience in all aspects of transportation and infrastructure projects, such as contract management, construction supervision, construction liaison, community consultation, independent review advice and client relationships.

Cecily is an accomplished and innovative director with over 20 years in establishing effective strategy to achieve long term objectives. Cecily Macdougall is Managing Director for Building4Business Pty Ltd. Previously she has been CEO, Director, General Manager and Operations Manager, for multiple IT service companies and has held multiple Board positions. Cecily has held various senior consulting roles for Tier Inc, Gartner, Unisys Australia, Aspect, and Wang Australia across a wide range of industries in private sector as well as public sector. Cecily has built industry/business networks including Technology Partners Program, Australian Interactive Media Industry Association (AIMIA) and Hush Music Foundation. Cecily has developed an unusual range and depth of skill with competencies in the disciplines of business, finance, information technology and systems integration, portfolio/program/project management and human resources. Cecily is a key thought leader and has published articles in the Govlink, Queensland Mining Resources Bulletin for CEOs, and CPA In the Black. Cecily is a qualified CPA and is a member of CPA Australia, the Australian Institute of Management, the Australian Institute of Project Management and the Australian Human Resource Institute. Academically her achievements include a Master of Business Administration in three streams, Professional Accounting, International Business and Strategic Human Resource Management. Accreditations include Leadership and Organisational Renewal (Practitioner), Inclusive Value Measurement practitioner (Level 2), PRINCE2 project management practitioner, and Workplace Trainer/Facilitator (Category 1). Cecily Macdougall is presently managing change in a major transformation program in State Government for the implementation of a centralised Courts ICT system across multiple jurisdictions and 52 court locations.

6

Corinne has an Engineering Degree and a Masters in Business Administration. Corinne is currently a Director at Department of Transport. Previously she led the transportation design team at SKM and was the Business Development Manager for the Melbourne Office. Her experience in the public sector includes key roles with the Programs Management Office, Delivery Coordination Division, Public Transport Division, Integrated Transport Planning Division and the Strategic Planning Division. In a bid to support consistency of project management practices within the Department, Corinne authored the Departments Project Management Framework in 2001 and managed the development of its associated guidelines and templates. More recently, Corinne has developed an end to end (E2E) portfolio business process for the Department which extends the project management context to include program and portfolio management. The E2E business process integrates the work of transport within and external to itself, to enable the successful delivery of the transport portfolio’s strategic program responses from idea generation through to outcome realisation. Recently, Corinne assisted the Department in setting up the management of the Victorian Transport Plan refresh. Corinne is currently leading a business unit to provide ongoing support to the Departments Executive on the E2E Business Process. Corinne is also a member of the Audit Committee.


Park lands - Maintenance and Irrigation

Adelaide

Park lands

Adelaide is the only planned city in the entire world encircled by a sea of Park Lands planned and set aside nearly two hundred years ago for the express purpose of providing a recreational resource for the citizens of the city.

“They have real social value to the community who sees them as fundamental part of the character and ambience of Adelaide. They’re a great place to kick back and relax as well as enjoy the amazing variety of events on throughout the year.”

And that remarkably, they have survived – and are now recognised as a National Heritage Place.

A place of activity

There are many theories around why Colonel Light surrounded the city of Adelaide with Park Lands. The Park Lands have always played a role in providing respite and recreation for the residents of Adelaide and amazingly, most of them have been retained over the last 170 years. From quarries, to a slaughterhouse to Aussie Rules At the time of settlement, the Adelaide Plains were occupied by Kaurna people. After the establishment of Adelaide, the Park Lands gained particular significance for Aboriginal people as places to gather and camp on the fringes of the city. Their descendants continue to maintain connections with their traditional lands and 29 Parks have been given a Kaurna name. During the first decades after European settlement, the Park Lands contained stone quarries, clay and lime pits, a mill, extensive olive plantations and rubbish dumps, all of which altered its original character and landform. In 1840, a slaughterhouse was established in Bonython Park and it remained in operation until 1910. Adelaide’s first cemetery was built in the western Park Lands in 1837. There is evidence that the first game of Australian Rules football in South Australia was played in the northern Park Lands in April 1860 and first game of soccer in the Wita Wirra (Park 18). The Park Lands were also used for the pasturing of sheep, cattle and horses.

In the 1960s, following an overseas trip in which he saw parks much more heavily used, the then Town Clerk William Veale drove the enhancement of some areas including Bonython Park. It became a major picnic destination with a kiosk and unique play elements that drew large family gatherings on weekends. Many South Australians have fond memories of a giant slippery dip on one of the hills plus school and family outings in the park. The City Baths, built in 1861, originally stood on the western side of King William Street. They were relocated in 1969 to Padipadinyilla (Park 2) in North Adelaide and are now known as the Adelaide Aquatic Centre. Organised sport grew throughout the Park Lands as clubs and schools developed facilities in response to a sports-mad Australian culture. The past decade has seen an increasing swing to informal recreation. A growing list of community facilities includes the City Skate Park, Kurrangga BMX Tracks, tennis and basketball courts, and upgraded play spaces.

A green border for the city

The Park Lands Trail brings together the strong community demand for walking and cycling. In partnership with the State Government, Adelaide City Council has constructed five stages of the Trail to date, covering the entire southern Park Lands. The next stage will be laid in Bonython Park and will use the River Torrens Linear Park Trail to form a ‘southern’ loop.

The Park Lands act as a green border around the city, providing a rich social, environmental and recreational resource with opportunities for everyone - walking trails, cycle tracks, picnic areas, bird watching or secluded spots to watch the world go by.

“The Trail goes through some picturesque and often unseen areas of the Park Lands. My family and I have discovered some stunning picnic spots and some areas can easily make you forget you’re anywhere near a city,” Stephen said.

The Park Lands are visible from many parts of the city and North Adelaide and vary in character and design from area to area. Some parts are laid out as formal gardens, others have a rural character, there are informal parks for picnics and relaxing and others are used for sport.

Activity hubs in the Park Lands will provide a raft of recreation experiences within a single location. This is not only financially and environmentally more sustainable (less amenities servicing more users), but brings the community together creating a more social and safer setting for physical activity.

Numerous public functions are held in the Park Lands, ranging from the ever-popular Fringe festival, music festivals including WOMAD and Future Music Festival, international events like the International Horse Trails and the Clipsal 500, along with many community events. “The Park Lands are valued by many South Australians for the way they look and as a place for recreation and community activities,” Lord Mayor Stephen Yarwood said.

8

Throughout its history the Park Lands have seen much growth in recreation use. In the early 1900s, Mayor Glover saw the value in children’s play and established a number of playgrounds, hence why there are three ‘Glover Playgrounds’.

Educational and cultural institutions including the library, museum, art gallery, university, Festival Centre, botanic gardens and zoo sit in the Park Lands between North Terrace and the River Torrens. The Park Lands, being so convenient to the city, have lent themselves to government use too including railways, police and military barracks, a cemetery, jail, hospital, and utility depots.


Maintaining Adelaide’s green belt It takes 81 full-time Council staff to mow, cut and prune the Park Lands daily. From the Japanese Gardens to sports fields, from areas of natural diversity to formal gardens, the work is endless but rewarding to the dedicated horticulturists. The Glenelg to Adelaide pipeline (GAP) provides recycled water for irrigation and is used in some of the water features. “Now that water is available through the recycled water project, the grass has never looked so green and trees are recovering from 10 years of drought conditions and water restrictions,” said Tom McCready, Executive Manager Public Realm. Various volunteer groups contribute to the upkeep of the Park Lands by taking part in planting days and revegetation projects to increase biodiversity and provide habitat for local animals. “Clearly, the best way to protect the Park Lands is to create a strong community connection with them so people want to preserve and look after them,” Tom said. Council plays a vital role in protecting the special status, attributes and character of the Park Lands while also adapting them to the changing needs of the community, ensuring that they remain as a recreational open space for each and every generation to enjoy.

9


Introducing the Innovative Groundsmaster® 360 Quad-Steer™ Rotary Mower Maximising Productivity and Operator Comfort in Every Environment The all-new Toro Groundsmaster 360 maximises productivity by combining the agility of a zero-turn riding mower with the flexibility of an out-front rotary mower. Using Quad-Steer™ all wheel steering, plus the added control of a steering wheel, this exciting new mower offers unprecedented maneuverability and versatility. Three models are available to suit your needs: • 2-wheel drive • 4-wheel drive • 4-wheel drive with a permanent all season safety cab All models come with Quad-Steer all wheel steering, which minimises turf damage due to the unique steering geometry. Four-wheel drive models also come with the ability to switch to 2-wheel steering on-thefly for quick and easy transport when not mowing. With improved hillside traction and stability, the Groundsmaster 360 can go places inaccessible to most other large-area riding mowers. Featuring the proven commercial cutting decks found in the Groundsmaster 7200, the Groundsmaster 360 offers 72 inch wide cutting decks in either side discharge, rear discharge or Guardian™ Recycler™ configurations. Achieve the quality of cut demanded by professionals – and with a 26.8 kW Kubota® 1505 4-cylinder diesel engine powering the Groundsmaster 360, you’ll also achieve efficiency they covet. The 4-wheel drive models have an option to include Toro’s patented QAS™ (Quick Attach System) for speedy, seamless changing of seasonal attachments like snow thrower, rotary broom and angled blade. “At Toro, we understand that a more comfortable operator means a more productive workday,” said Scott Williams, marketing manager at Toro. “The Groundsmaster 360’s ergonomic design includes fingertip controls, easy access for maintenance, and items like a suspension seat with isolation mounts to provide the operator a smooth and comfortable ride.” Getting on and off the machine is easy. A sloped hood minimises sight line barriers, making it easy for the operator to focus on what is in front of the mower. In addition, the all season safety cab model is isolation mounted and includes heating, air conditioning, and a Grammer cloth seat with air suspension standard. Introducing the all-new Groundsmaster 360. Welcome to the next generation of mowing. To learn more about the revolutionary Toro Groundsmaster 360 mower, call Toro on 1800 356 372 or visit www.toro.com/360

10


Seriously advancing the way you cut grass.

The all-new Toro Groundsmaster 360 reinvents the way a mower performs. Powered by a 26.8 kW (36 hp) Kubota® 1505 4-cylinder diesel engine, this machine utilizes revolutionary Quad-Steer™ all wheel steering to maximize productivity. Climb hills without slipping. Make 180° turns without tearing turf. Hug the turns or side hills while driving in total comfort. Save time without sacrificing quality. Intuitive controls and unparalleled maneuverability turn work into play. But this is no toy. It’s a performer in every sense of the word. A higher quality of cut, speed and efficiency, lasting dependability. Surprisingly, the world’s most exhilarating mower is also the most efficient. The Groundsmaster 360 is the science and the art of mowing, a sensory experience you simply have to feel for yourself.

www.toro.com.au

for more information call Toro on 1800 356 372


Think Water goes from strength to strength 20% Growth Sees 50 Members in Australasia THINK WATER is a network of independently owned irrigation and general water service businesses that is growing rapidly across Australia, and has recently expanded into New Zealand. With ten new members joining the group in the past 12 months, Think Water has grown its network by a remarkable 20% in tough economic times. Think Water offers independent irrigation businesses the opportunity to retain ownership and control of their business while adding the international backing of a group. “It’s the best of both worlds”, says Bryan Ward, the general manager of Think Water. “Our members retain complete ownership and control of their business but enjoy international backing and better buying power by being part of

the Think Water group – and that allows them to provide a better service to their customers”, he said. All Think Water stores are owned and run by local water experts who have joined the group to gain access to world-class supply arrangements and industry leading training and marketing support. “The benefits Think Water offer in the areas of group buying power, marketing and promotional activities, training, knowledge sharing, HR and benchmarking have found widespread appeal with independent business owners because it allows them to concentrate their efforts on what they are experts in – designing, installing and servicing irrigation systems”, said Bryan Ward. Founded less than 4 years ago with 33 foundation members, Think Water now has 50 member businesses across Australia and New Zealand offering innovative water efficient irrigation and general water solutions to all market sectors; from agriculture and industrial sectors to domestic and local government. “Many enquiries from independent operators have come to us through referral from suppliers and existing members – which is really positive,” says Bryan Ward. Think Water was formed to capitilise on new opportunities in the water market. “We recognised early that water management is a massive growth space, and undergoing considerable change, and we’ve been able to establish systems to capitalise on those changes” says Bryan Ward. Contact Think Water: 1300 901 120 www.thinkwater.com.au

We know water. Drop on in.

Think Water stores are now open in more than 50 locations throughout Australia and New Zealand

• Specialists in design, installation and maintenance of irrigation and general water projects. • Stockists of all leading pump, irrigation and plumbing supplies.

www.thinkwater.com.au

12

• Servicing sectors including domestic, agricultural and government.


The new 2011 Polaris Ranger models

POLARIS RANGER EV – CLEAN, QUIET, GREEN Polaris, the world’s number one off-road vehicle manufacturer, is set to further dominate the Side by Side (SxS) utility vehicle market with the introduction of the 2011 diesel powered Ranger. Since 1998 the US manufacturer has significantly expanded its SxS lineup which now includes: • The industry’s first zero emission electric 4WD utility vehicle – the Ranger EV • A new 400cc & 500cc EFI two and four seat models • Ranger HD with self-leveling suspension, power steering and optional hydraulic bucket or grapple • A range of military specified petrol, diesel and electric Ranger utility and Sportsman all-terrain vehicles available in 4WD and 6WD. • An extensive array of PURE Polaris genuine accessories Like all full-size Polaris Rangers, the Diesel model offers an industryleading combination of towing, carrying, three-seat capacity and certified roll-over protection structures (ROPS). So why has Polaris released such a wide range of heavy duty vehicles? “Our research shows customers in heavy applications are demanding safer and more versatile vehicles, such as mining companies, the military and our core farming, corporate and government markets,” says Polaris Managing Director, Peter Alexander. The Polaris Ranger Diesel prototypes were extensively tested on Australian outback properties for months and passed all tests with flying colours. “This is another example of Polaris Australia and NZ being central to Polaris global product planning and vehicle development process. Whenever the guys in Minnesota are developing a new heavyduty workhorse, some of the first prototypes are sent down under for testing,” says Alexander. Polaris Rangers have always featured excellent performance, and Ranger Diesel is no exception with a world-beating top speed of 56km/h. With 90% of peak torque available at 1,600rpm, Ranger Diesel hauls all day with its 454kg full pallet-size tipping box and massive 907kg towing capacity. If there is one thing that distinguishes Polaris from the rest of the market, is its ride quality. Ranger Diesel features long travel suspension (24.4cm front, 22.9cm rear) and 30.5cm of ground clearance to keep the ride smooth for safer handling. The unique four-corner adjustable suspension system allows the operator to adjust for the specific work conditions ahead. Ranger Diesel also comes equipped with selectable On-Demand True All-Wheel Drive with Turf Mode which automatically engages all four wheels when you need more forward traction.

Accelerate the reduction of your organisation’s carbon emissions; gain the electric advantage with clean, quiet and greener operation of the Ranger EV. The new Ranger EV is a quieter machine for operating in both urban and remote environments alike. The Ranger EV never needs fuel, requires very little maintenance, works harder and rides smoother than any other vehicle in its class. Plus you can completely avoid petrol costs and the paperwork hassle of calculating the emissions of your vehicle. Ranger EV has the longest range in its class with an 11.7kW maximumpower battery pack and three-mode operating system. The High, Low and Max Range modes provide greater efficiency and overall performance because the operator is able to switch back and forth for maximum power or achieve up to a 75 km of range. Polaris off-road utility vehicles were the first with Independent Rear Suspension (IRS). The Ranger EV continues that heritage. It features IRS and the longest suspension travel, so you experience the same legendary smooth ride on this electric vehicle as you always have on the petrol-powered models. POLARIS RANGER EV HARDEST WORKING FEATURES • 30 hp electric motor • Range leader with High, Low, Max modes • 48 Volt Brushless AC high efficiency • Induction motor for low maintenance • 40.2 km/h top speed • 226.8 kg cargo capacity • 567 kg towing • 453.6 kg payload • On-Demand AWD with Turf Mode • ROPS Certified cab SMOOTHEST RIDING FEATURES • Independent Rear Suspension (IRS) • Class-leading suspension travel at 20.3 cm front travel and 22.9 cm rear travel • 25.4 cm of ground clearance • Seating for two For further enquires contact our Corporate and Government Department on 0409 411 510 or corporate@polarisindustries.com.au www.polarisindustries.com.au

13


New Holland Throughout the years New Holland has grown from a small humble operation in the town of New Holland, Pennsylvania to become one of the world’s most respected brands in agricultural machinery today. New Holland T5000 tractors combine proven engineering with the most up to date engines yet offered in this category of tractor, With 4 Horse power offerings, from 76 to 106 hp, the T5000 offers a balance between proven design and modern technology. Delivering versatility that is attractive to authorities who are increasingly looking to undertake multiple tasks with the same unit, whilst providing higher levels of comfort, economy, performance and productivity. T6000 series tractors, from 101 to 141 Engine HP, are available in three levels of specification.The new entry level T6000 LS model range from 101 HP to 141 HP provides a new industry benchmark, ideal for front end loader applications and general operations. When you are looking to reduce running costs, increase productivity and convenience and enhance operator comfort, the T6000 LS delivers the ideal ingredients. The T6000 PLUS tractor is the all purpose, all rounder, providing a feature packed model line-up with lower operating costs. With all the features found in the LS series, plus further enhancements such as cab suspension, upgraded instrumentation, TerralockTM and Automatic Four wheel drive engagement..

New Holland is a dynamic and innovative brand that continues to evolve is renowned for its innovative nature, and its demand for excellence. New Holland provides a full complement of products to suit a variety of applications, and the staff and dealer network to support each of these in the marketplace. New Holland doesn’t just build tractors for Agricultural applications. Its reputation is built on the success of our customers, and these include Government, Commercial and Groundscare professionals. New Holland manufacture tractors from small compact tractors, through to large HP Articulated models, Out front mowers, and Utility vehicles. Our BoomerTM range of Compact tractors, up to 60 HP, offer exceptional power, manoeuvrability and operating ease, making it the ultimate tool for landscapers, golf courses and municipalities. Easy to operate, ergonomically designed with the operator in mind; these tractors give you big tractor reliability wrapped in a compact manoeuvrable package. Series TT 55 and 75 HP ROPS tractor, in two and four wheel drive, are a one specification product range with simple, efficient drivelines and minimal electrics. This ensures that the Series TT is easy to maintain and achieves low running costs. New Holland TDD Plus Series tractors match great looks with class leading ergonomics, low noise, excellent comfort, brilliant service access and superb all-round visibility, along with simple operation and a specification to meet diverse customer needs. With HP’s ranging from 60 to 95 HP, available in both Cab and ROPS, and 2WD and 4WD. T4000 Utility Tractors, from 78 H.P. to 97 H.P. come in both ROPS and Cab versions They bring with them greater levels of comfort, economy, performance and productivity. All T4000 units feature an impressive specification list including 4 cylinder, turbocharged & intercooled engines, reduced noise and vibration levels, new design New Holland front axles with higher load carrying capacity, in a compact package.

14

The high performance T6000 ELITE model range features New Holland’s Common Rail fuel injection and Engine Power Management system and provides unmatched levels of performance for any application. When your require High power for PTO and towing applications without moving to a physically larger tractor, the T6000 Elite gives great performance without sacrificing excellent fuel economy The New Holland T7000 series with models from 167 to 224 HP range, have been updated and expanded and now offer Range and Power Command transmissions. These industry-leading tractors with excellent power-to-weight ratios and class leading features will make them an appealing tractor for many roles, including haulage tasks. They deliver high power without additional weight, keeping the gross weight down and allowing payloads to be maximised for higher productivity. In all New Holland tractors, operator comfort remains a key design priority. Controls are ergonomically positioned, colour coded and grouped to maximise productivity, giving operators familiar surroundings and continuity between the various models. Our G6000 Out front mowers are purpose built for demanding contract, highway and municipal applications. G6000 commercial mowers match tough build and low whole life operating costs with the very best comfort and safety features. With great visibility, brilliant traction and outstanding manoeuvrability, G6000 mowers are the first choice for professionals. Our RustlerTM Utility Vehicles combine rugged construction and gritty performance with an ultra-smooth ride and feel good amenities. With three 4WD models, available in two or four passenger versions, with choice of either petrol or diesel engine, there is a RustlerTM Utility vehicle ready for you. New Holland Government and Commercial customers can count on the widest offering of innovative products and services: a full line of equipment, complemented by tailored financial services from a specialist in the field. A highly professional global dealer network and New Holland’s commitment to excellence guarantees the ultimate experience for every customer. For more information on New Holland visit www.newholland.com


COUNT ON NEW HOLLAND WITH THE RANGE AND VERSATILITY TO SUIT YOUR APPLICATION New Holland has a range of tractors designed with the commercial and groundscare professional in mind. With compact tractors, through to large horsepower articulated models, out front mowers, and utility vehicles, whatever your needs New Holland has you covered. With a highly professional dealer network and New Holland’s commitment to excellence we guarantees the ultimate customer experience every time. For more information or to find your nearest New Holland dealer visit www.newholland.com

www.newholland.com

Own a bright future


Synthetic lawn The cost effective alternative Demand for synthetic lawn has increased dramatically over the course of the last few years. Many government agencies and home owners have sought solutions for an economical yet visually appealing alternative to natural lawn or traditional concrete paving. There have been a number of factors that have contributed to the increased need for quality synthetic lawn products. Certainly water restrictions and the ever escalating costs for water usage has meant councils, schools and home residents have needed to source alternatives to high maintenance natural lawn, and have wanted a better option than replacing their areas with a concrete jungle. Other contributing factors to this industry growth, has been the increase in allergies, reduced funds for maintenance budgets and time restrictions, most especially relevant issues for governments departments, and education facilities. Australian Lawn Wholesalers are leaders in the synthetic lawn business. Their product consistency, dedication to meeting individual project requirements and affordable solutions has fast tracked their reputation in the industry as the bench mark in standards. Their products our sourced from an international manufacturing company, that meets all of the Australian environmental standards (including ISO14001 accredited manufacturing plant). These products are also incredibly realistic and visually appealing, and most importantly of the highest manufacturing standard. Their “lush” product in particular is a popular choice due to its soft and durable grass blades, natural colourings and lack of shine. Australian Lawn Wholesalers can meet all the specific projects requirements, whether the need is for ongoing product supply or smaller individual area improvements. Traditionally being a wholesale company, Australian Lawn Wholesalers has provided other retail and landscaping companies with their “Envy” and “Lush” products. However they now offer full preparation and installation services provided by dedicated and experienced production and installation teams. This has now expanded their capabilities to project manage complete outdoor transformations for a wide range of customers, including Schools, Councils, Commercial and Residential markets. The friendly and dedicated administration team at Australian Lawn Wholesalers, are available to discuss individual lawn requirements or set aside a time for an experienced consultant to meet onsite. For further information, simply call (08) 70872000.

Australian Lawn Wholesalers P: F:

+61 8 7087 2000 +61 8 7087 2099

4/11 Ridley Street, Hindmarsh SA 5007 PO Box 546 Hindmarsh SA 5007 W: www.australianlawnwholesalers.com.au E: info@alwsa.com.au

16


JCB introduces the new generation of backhoes The backhoe loader remains one of the most pivotal plant items utilised within council operations and JCB have once again raised the bar with the development of the revolutionary ECO backhoe range. In 1949 Joseph Cyril Bamford had an idea. Why not add hydraulic arms, which can be fitted with attachments such as shovels, forks, dozer blades, to the front of a tractor thus creating a machine that was ideal for both the construction and agricultural industries. Several years later he added hydraulic rams directly to the rear of the tractor giving the machine nearly circular reach. From this the backhoe was born. Since then, the JCB remains the world’s best selling brand where two in every five backhoes sold anywhere in the world are made by JCB.

Glenn McLeod, National Backhoe Product Manager with distributor, JCB Construction Equipment Australia, said the ECO backhoes offered average fuel savings of around 15 per cent, largely achieved through the introduction of a new EcoDig system incorporating three hydraulic pumps. The three pumps provide the same hydraulic output, but at lower engine speeds. Operators can select from two working modes to optimise productivity and improve machine control. Another benefit of the three pump design is faster performance of the Extradig extending dipper stick, further boosting productivity. The new hydraulic system and lower engine speeds also contribute to a cut in exhaust emissions and a reduction in overall machine noise levels, both inside the cab and externally. Mr McLeod said the introduction of a new, highly efficient Tier 3 engine further aided the reduction in greenhouse gas emissions from the JCB backhoes. The new ECO backhoes come with the existing EcoRoad options of Smooth Ride System (SRS), which helps maximise load retention around sites, and TorqueLock, which reduces fuel consumption by up to 25pc while increasing speeds by up to 10pc. Economy and productivity, the new generation of JCB ECO backhoe has it covered.

In February 2011, JCB launched their latest backhoe in Australia. The new ECO range of JCB backhoe loaders offer significant gains in fuel efficiency and productivity, as well as improved versatility and comfort.

PARTNERING FOR THE FUTURE A trusted partner of Australian Councils for over 35 years. Contact us on 1300 JCB CEA for all your plant and equipment needs.

www.cea.net.au 17


Underground Services Powers Up Underground Services’ work on the high-profile Perth CBD Distribution Project demanded top notch community liaison and traffic management execution. To meet the rapidly growing demand for power in East Perth and the Perth CBD, 22 kV underground cables were installed in the area. The cables allow power from Western Power’s existing Milligan Street, Hay Street and Forrest Ave substations to be distributed throughout the Perth CBD and East Perth area.

The project’s location presented a number of challenges, being situated in a very highly trafficked area as well as surrounded by a large number of businesses and office towers. Underground Services’ level of community liaison and communication was a critical success factor for the project and the proper planning ensured this outcome was achieved successfully. “We’re used to working in highly built-up areas, but the heart of the City certainly presented a great challenge,” says Peter Wyatt, Underground Services’ project manager. “We put a big emphasis on community liaison and made sure that everything was as smooth as possible for all the surrounding businesses as well as people trying to get through the city. Locating the existing services was extremely challenging and we managed to complete our works without a single service hit, which is a fantastic result.”

The new underground cables provide safe and reliable power to the residents and businesses in the City of Perth and East Perth and allow for continued growth and development of the region. Underground Services’ involvement in this major project was to supply power through eight conduits from the Milligan Street Sub-Station across busy St Georges Terrace and on to BHP Billiton’s new building in the heart of Perth (City Square) on Mounts Bay Road. With their experienced team, Underground Services located the existing underground utilities and used an excavator to install the underground cabling.

Leaders in utility infrastructure installation and maintenance Our expertise and experience lies in the installation of communication and electrical cabling, as well as pipelines for water, gas, sewer and storm. Our strong project management capabilities ensure your project is delivered in the most timely, effective and environmentally sensitive manner, each time, every time.

1300 344 559

www.undergroundservices.com.au

18

PA RT O F T H E C FC G RO UP O F C O M PA NI ES


Work Safety and Risk Management

OHS harmonisation – from the Act to the codes

No matter who you are, it will be almost impossible to escape responsibility for workplace safety when the national model Work Health and Safety Act is adopted by Australian states at the end of this year. Norton Rose law firm partner Aaron Anderson will tell visitors to the Queensland Safety Show, which runs from June 21 to June 23, that the new laws will close the loopholes in accountability. Significant changes in all jurisdictions will include: • Moving from employment as basis for duties, obligations and rights • New positive duty of care for officers, with due diligence defined • Broadened consultation obligations – vertical and horizontal • Broadened union right of entry

“Officers will need appropriate processes for receiving and considering information regarding incidents, hazards and risks and responding in a timely way to that information. It also means verifying the implementation of those processes through regular audits and verifying legal compliance.” Consultation is critical The new Act obliges the PCBU to consult so far as reasonably practicable with all workers in the business of the PCBU not just direct employees. Also added will be a duty of every PCBU to consult, cooperate and co-ordinate activities with every other duty holder. “This should assist the parties to work more effectively together for health and safety protection, with nothing ‘falling between the cracks’ and may provide the biggest boost for OHS,” says Mr Anderson. “There are also significant penalties attached for failing to meet the new obligations”.

• Emphasis on graduated enforcement but higher penalties

Issue resolution processes and default procedures must also be in place to ensure engagement of workers and their representatives with PCBUs.

• Easier modification of notices

Why it’s urgent

• Greater protection against discrimination and coercion

• Changes to powers of questioning and reduced rights of individuals A significant change in some States will be that health and safety representatives will have powers to issue PINs and direct a work stoppage (not currently available in NSW, Queensland, Western Australia and Tasmania). OHS no longer the domain of employers One of the biggest changes under the new laws will be a shift in emphasis from the employer-employee relationship. “Rather than focusing on the duties of employers, the model Work Health and Safety Act refers to the Person Conducting a Business or Undertaking (PCBU), which is a very broad term and everyone contributing to work will have a duty of care. The concept is similar to what we have under our existing legislation in Queensland, however the duty will be subject to what is ‘reasonably practicable’, which is new,” says Mr Anderson. The definition of worker under the legislation is expanded significantly. Contractors, employees of contractors, sub-contractors, labour hire workers, apprentices, volunteers as well as employees are all caught by the definition.

“Model OHS laws are no longer just a possibility,” says Mr Anderson, “They are close to being passed, and contracts are being entered into now that will operate after the commencement of the new laws on 1 January next. Though experience shows that effective implementation of new laws like these takes 18 months to two years, the clock started ticking months ago and you have only a few months still available to prepare.” “Detailed requirements in regulations will be imposed from the day the uniform Act commences, so it’s wise to get the strategic, structural and consultation issues resolved first.” Draft regulations are out for public comment Safe Work Australia has released draft model regulations and the public comment period in relation to the draft model regulations ended on 4 April 2011. “The regulations will bring about a lot of changes in the detailed obligations in each State. Everyone should review these to start preparing, and contribute to the public comment process to help make sure they are right,” says Mr Anderson.

Clearer but positive obligations for senior officers Senior officers of companies and other organisations will have a more positive, proactive duty of care, beginning with an understanding of hazards and risks. “Due diligence means ensuring the company has appropriate resources and processes to work safely and that they are used,” Mr Anderson explains.

19


Work Safety and Risk Management

How to prepare Norton Rose recommends preparing for the new WHS Act in 10 steps: 1.

Undertake a legal risk analysis

2.

Undertake a gap analysis

3.

Review, revise and supplement policies and procedures (remember current consultation obligations)

4.

Implement – including training and ongoing review

5.

Review contracts – many will operate under the new laws

6.

Design and implement interface co-ordination processes and plans

7.

Develop effective representation and consultation processes

8.

Develop robust issue resolution processes

9.

Ensure effective processes for union right of entry

10. Review and revise all aspects of corporate governance in WHS to ensure effective management and ‘due diligence’ compliance

Aaron Anderson’s free seminars addressing the model WHS Act forms part of a line-up of very practical free manufacturing and workplace safety seminars at the Queensland Safety Show. Experts will explain how to attract funding, what to expect from new OHS laws, how to meet obligations manageably and within budget. Sponsored by myosh, the Queensland Safety Show, Materials Handling Show and co-located Queensland Manufacturing Show run from June 21 to 23, 2011, at the Brisbane Convention & Exhibition Centre. For more information, visit qldsafetyshow.com.au, email safetyvisitor@aec.net.au or phone Australian Exhibitions & Conferences Pty Ltd on 03 9654 7773.

20


The harmonisation of OHS With the largest, most anticipated overhaul to national OHS laws for over 30 years scheduled to take effect on 1 January 2012, organisations around the country are preparing themselves for the changes. Or are they? We take a look at the new, ‘harmonised’ laws, their likely impact on your organisation and what you can do to prepare. The ‘harmonisation’ of the nation’s disparate OHS laws has been on the federal workplace and productivity agenda since the Whitlam era. Achieving some kind of standardisation across state, federal and territory lines has long been considered necessary to assure workers of consistent levels of safety and protection wherever they choose to work. Equally, it has also been recognised as an essential for providing organisations – especially those that operate nationally – with one consistent set of OHS obligations and penalties that applies across all sites - irrespective of which state or territory they are in. A background to the changes: the current situation As the situation stands, this is far from the case. There are ten principal OHS statutes across Australia: six state, two territory and two relating to Australian Government employees – along with more than 400 associated OHS regulations and codes of practice. Against this backdrop, we are looking at an economy in which, according to a 2004 Productivity Report, there are some 39,000 multistate businesses accounting for nearly one third of employment across the country. The sheer burden of compliance with multiple legislative requirements for multi-state businesses can be enormous, with companies effectively having to ‘reinvent the wheel’ each time they set up operations in a new jurisdiction, with workers having to follow different policies and procedures when doing exactly the same job, depending on which state they are in.

November 2010. Its intention is that each state and territory will adopt identical laws in line with the Model Legislation by December 2011 and commence operating on 1 January 2012. Although the intention is to have ‘mirror laws’ in each jurisdiction, there will be some minor variations depending on the relevant drafting protocols and to ensure consistency with the other laws and processes in each jurisdiction. Transitional arrangements will also be consistent across the country, with some variations as each jurisdiction transitions from a different work health and safety system. Generally speaking, there are a number of key differences between the proposed laws and the current ones. There will be no national regulator: the Commonwealth and each state and territory will continue to regulate and administer the laws in their own jurisdiction. One of the more interesting changes is some of the strict obligations which currently state employers “must ensure” safety, will be replaced with a requirement to ensure safety only so far as is “reasonably practicable”. In a broadening of the scope, the duty of care for workplace safety will apply to any “person conducting a business”, meaning that safety obligations do not apply only in cases where there is an employment relationship. Specific obligations to ensure safety will continue to be imposed on those with “management or control” of a workplace, for example, owners of construction sites.

In addition, there are the dramatic anomalies that arise when the same set of circumstances leads to significantly different rights and obligations, depending on the jurisdiction in which they occur.

The new laws also provide for an increase in penalties for breach of health and safety duties that cause death or serious injury, as follows:

Obligations by employers to ensure the safety of workers, as far as it is ‘reasonably practicable’ differs, with some jurisdictions applying stricter regulations than others.

• a breach involving recklessness without reasonable excuse up to $3 million for a corporation; $600,000 for an individual, or five years imprisonment;

Variations also extend to the nature of offences and penalties that arise from OHS breaches, with a mix of criminal and civil offences between the states and territories and significant differences in the range of penalties imposed.

• a breach without recklessness up to $1.5 million for a corporation and $300,000 for an individual;

It’s a similar case when it comes to the issue of individual liability. While individual directors and managers can be found liable for legislative breaches in all jurisdictions, the test for liability differs. In NSW and Queensland, directors and persons involved in the management of a company are deemed to have committed the same offence as the relevant company – a ‘presumption of guilt’. In other jurisdictions, however, personal liability generally only arises where there is an element of individual fault or actual involvement in the safety breach. It’s little wonder that the vast majority of business and other organisations have been strong supporters of the adoption of consistent legislation regulating OHS and workers compensation. Towards harmony: the new laws The latest draft of the new Model Work Health and Safety Bill was agreed by the Commonwealth and state and territory governments in

• other breaches of health and safety duties may incur penalties of up to $500,000 for corporations or $100,000 for individuals. Unions will no longer be able to prosecute for OHS breaches, a contentious element given that the increase in penalties and the expansion of the duties of care is intended to increase protection for workers. The strict individual liability position, i.e., the ‘presumption of guilt’ that applies in NSW and some other states, will be abolished. Instead, “officers” of companies will be subject to a new, positive obligation to exercise due diligence to ensure the company complies with the laws. New levels of compliance for boards and executives This new due diligence obligation for “officers” of companies amounts to a new level of compliance for many organisations. Under the Act, an “officer” describes not only the directors of a company or body corporate, but also others in the organisation who influence

21


decisions and affect management. There is no longer a distinction between directors and non-executive directors and the obligations will apply to both. In effect, this means that wherever a company has a duty or obligation under the legislation, then its officers must exercise “due diligence” to ensure that it complies. “Due diligence” is defined as having to: •

keep up to date with work, health and safety matters;

understand the nature of the operations of the business or company, and the hazards and risks associated with those operations;

ensure that appropriate resources and processes to identify those hazards and eliminate or minimise them are in place and used;

ensure that there are systems for monitoring all incidents, hazards and risks, and responding to them in a timely and appropriate way;

ensure, broadly, that the company has, and implements, processes for complying with any duty or obligation under the new laws; and

verify that all the resources and processes referred to above are in place and effective.

In other words, the new laws require company directors and executives to ensure that they have best practice OHS management systems in place, and that there is appropriate reporting and review of OHS issues at board level.

22

While certification to an OHS management standard such as the Australian AS4801 or the international OHSAS 18001 will not amount to legislative or regulatory compliance, it is certain that having wellimplemented, externally verified systems in place is a critical first step in achieving legislative compliance. When organisations already have an OHS management system in place, assessing each area of operations against the new laws can be more rigorous and accurate, and the structures for implementing any new policies or procedures that are required already exist. For example, this might include a renewed analysis of those responsible for showing “due diligence” and then ensuring they receive the training and support they need to meet their obligations. Once the finer regulatory detail is decided, seminars and training events run by management system certification specialists such as SAI Global will be available to help their clients understand what the changes are and how they will affect their business. Professional help and training of this kind is likely to smooth any organisation’s path to compliance, and put measures in place to comply with any future changes. For more information on SAI Global Training and Improvement Solutions, including ways your organisation can implement and maintain an OHS Management System, please visit www.saiglobal.com/training or call 1300 727 444.


Property Asset Protection

3.

Includes Asbestos Roofs Recent dIscussions with visitors and Metro Industrial Roof Restoration staff at the recent Safety in Action Show in Melbourne, regarding the condition of asbestos roofs produced some interesting outcomes. Yes, building owners and tenants understood the potential hazards of working in and around the environment of aging asbestos roofs, but most were unaware that inaction on the safety aspect of asbestos oofing could also be leading to future property maintenance problems, resulting in increased capital costs. Aging, weathered, asbestos roofs provide an environment for lichens to colonise the surface of the roof. Lichens secrete an acid known as oxolic acid which is capable of destroying concrete, and easily breaks down the cement content of asbestos roof sheets. Once the surface layer is destroyed and the lichens move further into the roof sheet, cement is removed and asbestos fibres are exposed to the environment and become airborne. The roof sheet is weakened and in time holes and cracks appear, resulting in not only asbestos exposure but leaks and damage to the roof structure.

1.

From an asset protection view point, if the roof is encapsulated with a certified service coating, the degradation of the asbestos roof is halted immediately. This action will extend the service life of the roof and the structure, pushing out major capital expenditure way into the future. The photographs accompanying show the unstable surface of an asbestos roof. 1. The loose asbestos fibres on the tape. 2. Sample under a microscope revealing blue asbestos fibres 3. A roof under going the encapsulation process. For more information go to www.metroroofrestoration.com.au

metro industrial roof restoration are specialist providers of an economical, viable alternative, to the removal and replacement of fibro asbestos roofs. this is achieved through the use of c.s.i.r.o certified, spray applied, asbestos encapsulation and roof restoration coatings.

Address 12 B Purcell Street Elderslie NSW 2570 Postal Address P. O. Box 3101 Narellan NSW 2567 Ph 0418 299 039 Fax 02 4658 1419 Email sales@metroroofrestoration.com.au

www.metroroofrestoration.com.au ABN: 62082391688 LIC: 196384C / B.A. LIC: 205088AS2

24

2.


Full range of lockout/ tagout equipment Australia’s Original Manufacturer of Lockout Equipment, CIRLOCK, continues to expand its wide range of Lockout /Tagout Equipment for Energy Sources. Since the company’s development and first production of the Cirlock System of Lockouts for Circuit Breakers back in 1992, CIRLOCK has expanded its own range to include lockout devices for all types of energy sources. CIRLOCK remains a fully Australian owned and operated family company. CIRLOCK has got a variety of Universal Lockout Devices for Circuit Breakers in all sizes and brands, as well as for Fuse Holders in all sizes. Gate Valves and Ball Valves in all sizes can be locked out, as can Electrical Plugs and Hose Couplings, with uniquely designed equipment.

Danger Tags, Out Of Service, Commissioning and Information Tags are standard stock items. Made from Poly material to withstand grease and water, heavy duty laminated versions and Photo ID types are also ex stock. Customised tags can be made in small or large quantities. CIRLOCK’s own brand – CIRTAG® – includes a wide range of Safety Signs, Labels and Tags, as well as a full range of Pipe ID Markers – all made to Australian Standards. A full catalogue of CIRTAG® and CIRLOCK products is available. CIRLOCK’s lockout equipment is also available in convenient kit form in various sizes, by use of carry bags or wall mounted lockout stations. The company is able to offer its customers flexibility, short delivery times and custom made devices in large and small quantities, as well as ‘standard off the shelf’ lockout solutions. Most of CIRLOCK’s products are made in Australia, and are available through electrical and other wholesalers Australia wide, CIRLOCK’s on-line shop or direct from Cirlock. Visit the CIRLOCK website www.cirlock.com.au for more information on our product range, or contact us on 07-54452910.

CIRLOCK’s own brand of tough Safety Lockout Padlocks, are made with Xenoy material housing, stainless steel shackle and brass key way. These locks are available in seven different colours, Master Keyed, Keyed Alike or Keyed Different in any combination needed. The CIRLOCK locks have our Australian standard of 50mm long and 5mm thick shackle, and a Do Not Remove and Owners label included. Locks can be personalised with logo or names, either engraved or on labels. Photo ID can also be supplied.

LOCKOUT / TAGOUT EQUIPMENT MADE IN AUSTRALIA SINCE 1992 Part No: SDT-1

Part No: SDT-1

CIRLOCK

CIRLOCK

DANGER

DANGER

DO NOT OPERATE

DO NOT OPERATE REASON:

UNIT: DATE: Completion Planned DATE: THIS TAG MUST ONLY BE REMOVED BY THE PERSON NAMED ABOVE SEE OTHER SIDE

DANGER

NAME:

Unauthorised removal may cause harm and may make the remover liable for damage CIRLOCKand/or prosecution

SEE OTHER SIDE

OUT OF SERVICE DO NOT USE OR OPERATE PLACED BY Name: ......................................................... Department: ................................................ Date: ............................Time: ..................... Reason: ...................................................... .................................................................... .................................................................... .................................................................... .................................................................... .................................................................... .................................................................... Signature: ...................................................

COMMISIONING IN PROGESS

 Great Service  Fast delivery  High Quality Products  Complete Range

CIRLOCK

OUT OF SERVICE THIS

DANGER COMMISIONING Commissioning Co-Ordinator Name: ............................................................................... Date: ................... Unit: .................................. Nature of Task: ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ Initial/ ................................................................................ Sign off

_________________________________________ Person 1 _________________________________________ Person 2 _________________________________________ Person 3 _________________________________________ Person 4 _________________________________________ Person 5 _________________________________________

THIS TAG MAY ONLY BE REMOVED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SITE ISOLATION RULES

....................................................... MUST NOT BE USED OR OPERATED THIS TAG MUST NOT BE REMOVED UNLESS BY AN AUTHORISED PERSON

OUT OF SERVICE

for more information:

www.cirlock.com.au Ph 07 5445 2910

CIRLOCK

LOCKOUT-ID Simple and Easy labelling system

25


Can online OH&S training deliver quality results? a forecast for things to come Online training is changing the face of learning and the evidence that the demand for online adult education is quickly increasing. But does online training provide sufficient quality the rigour of comprehension and competency, and especially in terms of White Card OH&S training? The arguments for online, opposed to face-to-face, include: • Online ensures the consistency and quality of information and delivery,

As an important (and legal) requirement for personnel working on construction sites in Australia, the White Card (CPCCOH1001A) training is an important OH&S competency for minimising the risk of hazardous incidents – and not something we should take lightly. Here are some criteria to assess an online training provider against, in order to feel comfortable that they produce appropriate competency in their staff: 1. Company is a registered training organisation 2. Course provides actual training - not just a list of questions that they can look up further information on, if they don’t know the answer, i.e. the trainee has to retain knowledge from the course, and then apply it later when answering the competency assessment. 3. Assessment requires 100% correct answers in order to pass. 4. Assessment provides randomised questions if the trainee has to attempt the assessment more than once. 5. Company follows the legislated requirement for ID verification (Stat Dec. Etc.).

• allows for self-paced learning,

One of Australia’s leading online courses White Card Online satisfies all the above criteria and more. They offer discount corporate bulk purchases and a tracking system for corporate accounts, making it easy for companies to monitor and record the status of all their employees or contractors.

• and can produce better learning outcomes.

For more information visit www.wcol.com.au.

• reduces time and training costs significantly, • increases the frequency of training possible,

26

However, in the past, several online companies have “muddied the waters” by offering courses with assessments that were so easy to pass that the quality of knowledge and company the workers retained was highly questionable. Sadly, courses of this nature still exist.


Work Safety and Risk Management

Progressing model work health and safety legislation across Australia In 2009 the Workplace Relations Ministers’ Council (WRMC) endorsed the Model Work Health and Safety (WHS) Act, developed by Safe Work Australia. Safe Work Australia is the principal national organisation driving policy development in work health and safety with the aim of achieving the best possible approach to health and safety for all Australian workers. Safe Work Australia represents a partnership between the Commonwealth, state and territory governments, the Australian Council of Trade Unions, the Australian Chamber of Commerce and Industry and the Australian Industry Group.

commented on different aspects of the package and a total of 1339 submissions were received. Safe Work Australia will analyse the written submissions received through the public comment process and revise the draft model WHS Regulations and Codes of Practice based on this. A second stage public comment process will be underway in mid 2011 to progress further Codes of Practice currently in development. A final version of model Regulations and Codes of Practice will then be submitted to WRMC for consideration, with the recommendation of its adoption into law by all jurisdictions by December 2011.

Since 2009, Safe Work Australia have progressed the development of model work health and safety legislation for implementation across Australia in 2012.

Safe Work Australia will be developing a national compliance and enforcement policy to ensure a consistent approach in the way regulators administer and enforce the new laws. 

When the harmonised work health and safety laws are in place businesses and workers will be able to comply more easily with their work health and safety responsibilities because the requirements will largely be the same, regardless of the number of states and territories in which they operate.

It is time for organisations and individuals to get ready for the changes in work health and safety taking place across Australia. Through the harmonisation of model work health and safety laws it will be easier to create safer workplaces for all Australians and see a positive effect on performance and productivity.

Safe Work Australia released draft model WHS Regulations, priority model Codes of Practice, an Issues Paper and Consultation Regulation Impact Statement for public comment in December 2010 for a period of four months.

The estimated total economic cost of work-related injuries and illnesses to Australia’s economy is $57.5 billion. This represents just less than six per cent of Australia’s Gross Domestic Product.

A broad range of individuals and organisations from across Australia

For more information on the model work health and safety laws, please visit www.safeworkaustralia.gov.au.

27


A Systems Approach to Creating Mentally Healthy Workplaces Australia is about half as successful as many OECD countries in finding work for people with a mental illness. According to the Mental Health Council of Australia, the rate of employment is only 29% whereas the employment rate for all people with a disability is 53%. Rates for employment of people with a mental illness in OECD countries is 62% with Canada, France and Norway at 72% while in Switzerland 79% of people with a mental illness are in work.

• Strategies to improve mental toughness and sometimes

The cost to the Australian community of this failure is huge, not to mention to additional stress and worry for the individuals concerned, struggling not only with their mental illness but also trying to manage all the issues associated with unemployment such as poverty, depression and homelessness. Of the 810,000 Australians of working age who qualify for the Disability Support Pension (DSP), 28% have mental illness as the primary condition and for many others it is a co-existing disability. It is also increasing at double the rate of growth to the overall number of people on the DSP. It is estimated that around 19 million absentee days per year are attributable to mental illness across Australia at massive cost to the national economy.

We believe such programs are well intended and they represent a ‘toe in the water’ response to a more complex human resource management and organisational cultural issue. Such programs need to be part of an integrated and systemic approach to building mentally healthy workplaces.

These are compelling statistics to anyone concerned about workforce participation, workforce wellbeing and productivity. Equally compelling is the knowledge that we can prevent many mental illnesses, reduce the severity of many mental illness if we act early and that most people can and will recover given the appropriate care and support. Workplace Issues In research we have undertaken in a number of Australian workplaces and within some professional groups, we have found higher levels of psychological distress than that within the general Australian population. In one large sample of nearly 600 employees from one leading ASX listed company, the rates of “high” and “very high” psychological distress, as measured by a standardised instrument, were between 2 to 3 times the national levels. The most “at risk” group were males aged 30-39 years. This is at a time when they would be assuming greater workplace and personal responsibilities. Recent research released by the Australian National University also points to the damaging effect of a ‘bad job’. This found that a bad job – one with low autonomy, high repetition, and poor management – was more damaging to one’s mental wellbeing than no job at all. Where there was workplace bullying from peers or senior staff, then the negative effects are even greater.

However most of these programs are optional – that is, managers and staff can elect to attend – and rarely have we seen organisation-wide training of sufficient quality and quantity to make a change in personal, team or organisational behaviours.

A Systems Approach The risks to Australian businesses flowing from the poor access to mental health services across the Australian community and the continuing issues with stigma toward mental illness, require a more systemic and sustained response. Almost all businesses, large and small, private and public, have addressed risks arising from smoking, road trauma and hazardous chemicals. An increasing number are also addressing workplace bullying. Few have started to address mental health and wellbeing to not only minimize the negative impacts on employee retention. A systems approach will involve: 1.

building a clear picture of the risk – the mental wellbeing of the workforce, the environmental risks and protective factors, including cultural norms etc.

2.

developing a blueprint for change that includes current initiatives and structures and action to address gaps

3.

engaging the leadership and key stakeholders

4.

undertaking specific learning and development and integrated learning and development approaches

5.

policy assessment and revision

6.

measurement and evaluation

A systems approach means Australian businesses stepping up to take the lead in preventing mental illness and promoting mental health. There are already evidence-based Australian programs designed specifically for this purpose, such as the ActBelongCommit mental health program.

On the flip side, we also know that work can be therapeutic for people with a mental illness – that is, there is strong evidence to show that a positive workplace environment and a well designed job, assists in the recovery from a mental illness.

It is time for business leaders in Australia to recognise the risks of inaction and the need for a planned and effective response at the organisational level.

Resilience Training

John Mendoza – Director ConNetica, and Adj Asso Professor, Brain and Mind Research Institute, University of Sydney

In the past few years, dozens of resilience training programs have sprung up in response to the growing awareness of workplace stress, the advent of positive psychology, the intensification of work and critical incidents such as workplace suicides. Many of these are provided by reputable organisations. These programs generally include: • Measures of personal resilience • Understanding resilience

28

• Strategies to build resilient teams

Sebastian Rosenberg - Director ConNetica, and Senior Lecturer, Brain and Mind Research Institute, University of Sydney


3M™ Speedglas™ Launches Three New Welding Shields “Experience the Future of Welding Protection” 3M™ Speedglas™ has just launched three major welding shields: the 3M™ Speedglas™ 9100 Air (respiratory) welding shield, the 3M™ Speedglas™ 9100 FX (flip-up) welding shield, and the 3M™ Speedglas™ 9100 FX Air (flip-up/respiratory) welding shield. The flip-up versions feature a clear 17x10cm protective visor which is not only large but also curved, creating brand new shield geometry. That geometry and the visor’s curvature, allow for a remarkably wide, clear field of view in all directions: up, down, and 170° side-to-side. The clear visor is perfect for grinding or precision weld preparation under low light conditions – while all the time providing high impact and optional powered or supplied air respiratory protection.

The new shields are fully compatible with the premium Speedglas 9100 auto-darkening welding lenses, including the 9100XX, which is 85% larger than a standard sized Speedglas 9100 welding lens. In addition, all welding shields within the Speedglas 9100 range are compliant to Australian Standard AS/NZS 1337.1 for high impact. The Speedglas 9100 series welding lenses have unprecedented optical quality. Featuring variable dark shades 5,8,9-13, a grind mode and a tack mode, the Speedglas 9100 lenses can be used on virtually all arc welding processes, including low-amperage TIG - even on settings as low as 1 amp. When used with either the award winning 3M™ Adflo™ Powered AirPurifying Respirator (PAPR) or Fresh-air™ C Supplied Air Regulator (SAR), the new 3M Speedglas 9100 Air and 9100 FX Air Welding Shields provide high levels of respiratory protection from welding particulate matter, fumes and gases. Workers can have complete face, eye and respiratory protection, whether they are grinding, welding, or simply walking through a work zone. The 3M Speedglas 9100 FX Air shield has revolutionised the manner by which airflow is delivered to the welder resulting in improved protection and comfort. The three new models add a new level of innovation in comfort, vision, flexibility and performance to the Speedglas 9100 series welding shields. Experience the difference, call AWS for a hands-on demonstration 02 9439 0111 or visit us online at www.awsupplies.com.au 3M, Speedglas and Adflo are trademarks of 3M.

Experience the

NEW!

Futureof Welding

Protection

Introducing the new 3M™ Speedglas™ 9100 FX Air welding shield. A flip-up combination of a premium auto-darkening welding shield and a large protective visor, suitable for powered or supplied air respiratory protection. For a hands on demonstration call 02 9439 0111 or visit www.awsupplies.com.au 3M and Speedglas are trademarks of 3M.

2011 Speedglas 9100 FX Half Page sized.indd 1

30

10/03/2011 11:41:00 AM


The facts about industrial hearing loss As many as one-third of Australians over the age of 60 experience hearing loss – however, it is certainly not a condition confined to later life. In fact, age is not the greatest cause of hearing loss in Australia. The single greatest cause of permanent hearing loss in Australia is industrial deafness, caused through prolonged exposure to loud noise. And, not surprisingly, men are far more likely to suffer from this condition. Over the years, millions of Australians went to work in noisy factories, building sites and plants without being provided with adequate protection for their hearing.

For many people with industrial hearing loss, the result is they find it really difficult have conversations, and hear clearly, in noisy environments – often because the higher pitched consonants seem to be missing. It’s difficult for them to discern different words over and above the noise and this might also be accompanied by a continuous or intermittent ringing in the ears. How HEARINGLife can help. A thorough hearing assessment is the best way to determine whether exposure to industrial noise has resulted in industrial hearing loss. After providing you with a FREE hearing assessment, HEARINGLife’s accredited Audiologists and Audiometrists will be able to advise whether you may be eligible for advanced digital hearing aids and compensation for ‘industrial hearing loss’ under the provisions of the Accident Compensation Act (1985). For more information and to make an appointment for a FREE hearing assessment, call 1300 134 097

Prolonged exposure to noise in industries such as heavy manufacturing, metal work, drilling and quarrying, textiles, printing, wood cutting, transportation and agriculture can all lead to hearing being irreparably damaged. Even exposure to very high levels of intermittent noise over relatively short periods can cause damage. These high levels of noise appear to cause damage to the more sensitive cells in the cochlea within the ear, and this begins to affect the hearing of certain frequencies – particularly the higher frequency sounds.

Could you be suffering from industrial hearing loss? The single greatest cause of permanent hearing loss in Australia is industrial deafness, caused through prolonged exposure to loud noise. If industrial hearing loss is detected, you may be eligible for financial assistance. So, if you believe that exposure to loud noise at work has contributed to your hearing loss, you should make an appointment for a FREE hearing test.

your hearing, you’ll be able to hear the difference yourself by taking the latest digital aids home for a no obligation FREE home trial.

Come along, take a FREE hearing test and discuss your options with our experts, who will answer all your questions. And, rather than us simply telling you how modern solutions may benefit

HEARINGLife has an enormous amount of experience and expertise with assessments under the WorkCover scheme and providing the necessary information for claims.

Call HEARINGLife now on 1300 134 097 to arrange your FREE hearing test. Over 140 permanent and visiting clinics throughout Australia.

Call 1300 134 097 to be connected to your nearest location. www.hearinglife.com.au

31


Working it out The corporate arena is getting savvy when it comes to workplace health and wellbeing – and HBF is helping them get there Do these statistics ring true in your organisation? • 96% working-age people report at least one unhealthy behaviour – including smoking, too much alcohol and not enough exercise. • 4 times higher absentee rates from male workers with a chronic disease, like asthma or diabetes, than those without chronic disease • 76% of days away from work are associated with arthritis, asthma and depression (source: from The Australian Institute of Health & Welfare) Australian organisations are increasingly realising the benefits of helping their employees to a healthier life – including increased productivity, better retention, and improved morale. In WA, HBF has been working with state government departments and the private sector for over 15 years to help them improve their employees’ health and wellbeing through healthy living workshops and health insurance. Jenny Carter, HBF’s Manager of Health Promotions, has seen hundreds of these employees in health & wellbeing workshops.  Jenny leads a team of 20, including exercise physiologists, yoga and pilates instructors and massage therapists, who provide a range of services to companies such as healthy living workshops, health checks and advice on health improvements. Edith Cowan University is one of the organisations that has benefited. Occupational Safety, Health & Wellness Coordinator, Fiona Peters, helps more than 3,300 employees from Joondalup to Bunbury with their health and wellness. HBF’s corporate health team assists in delivering part of an overall “Live Life Longer” program for employees, targeting their physical, mental, nutritional and social wellbeing. Fiona says Edith Cowan University has long been aware of the importance of looking after staff. “Our Health & Wellness program has helped a wide range of staff improve their health and fitness, achieve goal weights, improve sleep patterns and boost team spirit.” Working in partnership with HBF has allowed Fiona to spread the health message far and wide, Jenny and her team have delivered workshops at all three campuses, which includes the regional South West campus in Bunbury. Fiona confirms: “HBF’s interactive workshops are thought-provoking and encourage people to improve their health behaviour by providing simple changes that anyone can implement quickly and easily.” Kendal Leggett is the National Manager, Health and Safety - Fitness for Work for QR National Freight and works in a traditionally maledominated environment, with 80% of its employees working in country depots. This brings its own challenges in promoting the healthy message. Kendal is responsible for helping train drivers, maintenance personnel and office workers across its eleven different location to get on board with the Health & Wellbeing program.

32

Recently partnering with HBF, ARG is using a variety of means to deliver their goal of improving the working experience at ARG, including providing interactive workshops. “After we had conducted the surveys and workshops, people started talking more about their health and looking at options that would work with them to improve their own and their families’ health,” says Kendal. “We have observed a positive and strong response right across the business. We have found the best change agents are our managers and supervisors being there, demonstrating leadership, which includes supporting and participating in activities.” If you’re in WA, find out more about how HBF’s comprehensive health and wellbeing package could help your employees become healthier and more productive by contacting Jenny on 08 9265 8670 or emailing jenny.carter@hbf.com.au


The benefits of happy, healthy employees

Many of Australia’s leading companies have discovered the benefits of providing their employees with a corporate health program. At HBF, we offer a flexible combination of discounted health insurance and on-site health and well-being programs. It’s the perfect way to look after your valuable employees – and attract new ones. Corporate Health Advantages • Discounts on health, home, car, contents and life insurance • Health and lifestyle programs in your workplace • Waived two month Hospital and Essentials waiting periods so you can claim right away on many treatments • 50% discount on financial planning through Blue Horizon • Personal service from your corporate representative

Call

1300 132 549

Visit a branch


Work Safety and Risk Management

‘Imagine a world

without Standards’

Opinion Editorial by Colin Blair CEO, Standards Australia

Standards Australia is the nation’s peak non-government Standards organisation. It is charged by the Commonwealth Government to meet Australia’s need for contemporary, internationally aligned Standards and related services. We work closely with all levels of government to ensure that throughout the Standards development process, government is engaged and working in cooperation with industry, consumers and other key stakeholders. We work to ensure that when Standards are developed, it is done through consensus and in cooperation with regulators and government agencies. Through this collaborative process Standards development enhances the nation’s economic efficiency, international competitiveness and contributes to community demand for a safe and sustainable environment. Our rigorous approach promotes a respected and unbiased Standards development process ensuring all competing interests are heard, their points of view considered and consensus reached. Standards Australia is the central point for government, industry and the community to find information about non-government Standards in Australia and around the world, and how to participate in their development. A range of Standard development pathways is offered to stakeholders looking to develop new or update existing Standards.

34

Standards provide a benefit to the broader community, which can only be achieved through stakeholder and government cooperation, consultation and ultimately consensus. We maintain a high level of involvement in international standardisation and continue to take a lead role in Standards development in the Asia-Pacific region. The world is becoming ever more inter-connected, whether it is through technology, commerce, trade or culture, which is where organisations such as Standards Australia come into effect. Government alone can’t administer the challenges that come with greater international exchange. Increasingly governments are working towards the harmonisation of regulation. This is happening at both a local and international level. Standards development can assist in the harmonisation process and support the efforts of government and regional bodies in developing an economy which is more efficient and a community which is safer. Standards Australia stands at the ready to work with government to ensure that our Standardisation and regulatory framework continues to be one of the most highly regarded worldwide.


Work Safety and Risk Management

How to find money for OHS The Principal Work Health and Safety Consultant for the Chamber of Commerce and Industry Queensland, Steve Griffiths, says OHS practitioners who “do their homework and speak the language of management” will be able to attract funding for occupational health and safety initiatives. The Chamber will present a free seminar at the Queensland Safety Show on June 22 that explains where to find grants and other funding for OHS, how to budget and be sure of a return on investment. It’s naïve to think employers are going to spend money on anything that is not justified, including OHS, and practitioners need to learn to present a powerful cost-benefit analysis to management. The good news is that the basic risk assessment tool so familiar to OHS practitioners provides a very sound foundation for a compelling business case for OHS investment. But only the foundation. A much more business-oriented five-step process is needed to build a capital expenditure proposal that will resonate with managers and employers. Step 1: Get hard data Begin with a thorough risk assessment that includes hard data to support your case. Larger businesses may already have their own injury data but if that’s not available, use statistics gathered by the regulators and Safe Work Australia. The Victorian WorkCover Authority and Workplace Health and Safety Queensland publish industry hotspot information that will help you identify the likely areas of concern for your business and back that up with data. Step 2: Analyse the costs and benefits Senior managers evaluate expenditure proposals in terms of costs and savings. OHS practitioners must learn to speak that language. There’s also a new legal imperative. From next year, the national work health and safety laws require employers to demonstrate they ensure health and safety as far as reasonably practicable, so a cost-benefit analysis is an important part of decision making. Use risk management principles that take frequency and severity into account to put a value on the risk of not undertaking the project. Look at it from every angle: work health and safety projects also often generate measurable savings in terms of productivity. Step 3: Prioritised recommendations No business can address every risk instantly. Use the risk matrix to create a recommended program that systematically addresses highpriority risks. Step 4: Communicate Don’t simply email your report to management. Occupational health and safety practitioners have a responsibility to educate employers about risk management. Talk the plan through and, if necessary, revise your report to match management expectations.

Step 5: Persevere or find another approach Many OHS initiatives that are rejected initially are ultimately adopted, so perseverance is important. On the other hand, there is often more than one way to address safety hazards and it is also worthwhile reviewing the risk assessment to consider alternative control measures. Employers also need to be aware of the industry standard for managing the hazard and they need to keep abreast of new control measures. Of course, a lot of safety initiatives require little or no capital expenditure. Many injuries result from unsafe behaviour that stems from the attitudes and actions of managers. Workers take their cue from what managers say and do, rather than what is in the policy handbook. Perhaps the most lasting investment any organisation can make is to ensure the behaviour of its managers is consistent with its values. The CCIQ presentation, Where to Find Money for OHS, joins a line-up of very practical free manufacturing and workplace safety seminars at the Queensland Safety Show. Experts will explain how to attract funding, what to expect from new OHS laws, how meet obligations manageably and build profitability. Sponsored by myosh, the Queensland Safety Show, Materials Handling Show and co-located Queensland Manufacturing Show run from June 21 to 23, 2011, at the Brisbane Convention & Exhibition Centre. For more information, visit qldsafetyshow.com.au, email safetyvisitor@aec.net.au or phone Australian Exhibitions & Conferences Pty Ltd on 03 9654 7773.

35


Asset Management Effectiveness What are the core components of an effective asset management plan and how does each of these contribute to the successful operation of your business? This article explores the above questions by taking into account the external and internal factors which impact on the utilisation of assets. Effective asset management provides a dynamic mechanism through which the organisation can attain its operational and strategic goals. Asset management

Building Condition Assessment

Asset Audits

Benchmarking

Asset Risk Management

Lifecycle costing

Lifecycle Planning

CAPEX Program Development Building Condition Assessment A building condition assessment measures the actual condition of a building and compares this information to the required condition. Building condition audits also determine what actions need to be undertaken to maintain a building to a required standard. The information collected from condition audits assists in establishing input for the asset management plan. Asset Audit Asset audits comprise of a physical survey to be undertaken of all plant and equipment in a building or portfolio. The audit records equipment details including, condition install date. An asset audit is an essential step in developing maintenance programs that ensure buildings comply with regulatory compliance and leads to development of a lifecycle cost plan and risk management plan. Asset Risk Assessment An asset risk assessment takes into consideration the goals and objectives of the organisation and the inherent risks associated with it’s assets. The risk assessment prioritises issues and identifies those which could have the biggest impact on the business. The risk-management plan also details strategies for mitigating business risks.

36

Lifecycle Costing & Planning Effectively, lifecycle planning reduces the long term cost of ownership of an asset and delivers better building performance. An effective plan takes into account asset replacement costs determined and compares different alternatives for capital expenditure. The output of a lifecycle plan is a phased program for upgrade and replacement of assets.

When implemented effectively, lifecycle planning can reduce the long term cost of ownership of an asset and deliver better building performance.

Capital Expenditure program development A Capital Expenditure program takes into account all costs associated with the replacement and upgrade of assets and phases those costs over a fixed period of time. The program takes into account the organisation’s goals and objectives, including any changes in use of assets, the impact of strategic initiatives and changes and external factors like regulations, or economic conditions. Effective asset management is a core requirement in making informed decision around achieving the most effective lifecycle and cost outcomes. Ultum is a multi disciplinary property services company that provides compliance and asset management to the property industry. Ultum is part of the Urban Maintenance Systems group. For further information on Asset or Compliance management auditing and strategies or general Facilities Maintenance Management services, Contact: Terry Melhuish Executive Manager, Ultum Mobile: 0419 118 894 Email: tmelhuish@ultum.com.au Phone: 03 9265 5811


INFRASTRUCTURE SERVICES

At Ultum, our mission is to reduce your operational costs, achieve compliance and give you peace of mind by deploying the best systems, processes and recruiting the best people. Ultum is a multi disciplinary property services company that provides compliance, risk management, asset management, facilities management, project management and training services to the property industry. Our service offering is specifically aimed at achieving cost effective compliance solutions, developing value adding capital programs and achieving environmental targets. We believe the integration of effective maintenance programs, consistent compliance systems and value driven services procurement will achieve the best operational outcomes. • Managing risk in Aged Care • Ensuring compliance • Meeting challenges for building owners • Building Condition Audits • Lifecycle Costing • NABORS ratings For further information please contact mail@ums.com.au or visit us on the web at www.ums.com.au

To find out more visit: www.ultum.com.au


Our Service Promise management systems. When you choose Blackwoods as your single source of workplace supplies, you can be assured of great range, great value and great service provided by our team. • Widest MRO Product Range • Competitive Price Spend Discount • Delivery In Full On Time Blackwoods is a vital part of Australia’s industrial and workplace landscape. The Blackwoods brand is, and has been, proudly associated with thousands of strategic projects with both large and small businesses nationwide, over many decades ... and every time the message and promise is the same: if you see the Blackwoods’ logo, you know ‘all your workplace needs’ are covered. We’ve been working hard and investing in our people, technology and resources to make it easier for you to do business with us. From the introduction of a rewards-based pricing system, world-class supply chain capability delivering superior delivery performance to the roll out of leading edge mobile technology, Blackwoods has stayed on top by changing with and anticipating the needs of the industries we serve.

• Technical Sales & Service Support On Site Services Blackwoods On Site Services is a range of tailored services designed to move with and ahead of industry, to exceed on site supply demands and to be an even more valued partner of a wide range of Government workplaces. The Blackwoods Shutdown Services offer mobile warehousing, stores management and even vendor managed inventory, right where you need it, right when you need it. That means giving you access 24/7, and complete confidence by providing trained personnel - people that have the product knowledge and are keen to help.

We understand your need for reliable delivery of all your workplace essentials, partnering with you to maximise cost efficiencies through our industry leading purchasing, eBusiness, delivery, logistics and inventory

Want to save time and money?!

Order All You Workplace Needs with Blackwoods • Save time by consolidating your orders • Save time by selecting from best brands or best value from our wide range of products • Save time ordering the most convenient way for you – online, phone, fax or in store • Save time on deliveries when and where you want them • Save money on admin costs by consolidating your invoicing • Save money on freight costs by consolidating your deliveries • Save money on purchases with our Spend Discount – the more you spend the more you save!

To find out more go to blackwoods.com.au or call 13 73 23 38


Are you ready for WHS Harmonisation? Most organisations rely on safety management systems to keep their staff safe and comply with legislative obligations, however more often than not these systems are unwieldy, overly complicated and hard to get staff to use. As a further challenge, safety systems now have to be brought into line with the new Work Health and Safety Act, due to come into force in January 2012.

QRMC’s full range of services:

In particular, the “duty of care” requirements for the person conducting a business or undertaking, along with the duties of care of everyone else connected to the workplace, need to be fully understood and reflected in your organisation’s procedures.

• Management Systems (development, audit, and redesign)

Now is a good time to review your organisation’s systems for their compliance with the new Work Health and Safety Act in order to be ready before January 2012.

• Training and Development

QRMC can not only assist you to do this, but also has the skills to integrate into the process a review of your business and OHS risks to ensure that you are fully prepared. QRMC’s services can provide assurance to your organisation and your customers that things are under control in the lead up to WHS harmonisation.

• Enterprise Risk Management Programs and Risk Assessments

• OHS services • Business Continuity Management

• Compliance audits • Corporate Governance advice • Quality Management • Environmental Management • Value Management

Applying a human perspective to Risk Management, OHS Management & Business Continuity Management

Risk Management

• Compliance Reviews • Systems Development • Auditing & Gap Analysis • Business Advice 07 3229 1744

info@qrmc.com.au

www.qrmc.com.au

39


Work Safety and Risk Management

Queensland

Safety Show brings practical safety to government in June

The Queensland Safety Show returns to the Brisbane Convention & Exhibition Centre from June 21 to 23 with a powerful combination of products, services and expert seminars dealing with the new work health and safety laws. During three busy days, organisers anticipate over 5,000 trade visitors and industry professionals will visit the co-located trade shows hosting over 200 exhibiting companies. All tiers of government are likely to be well represented at the show, with the sector accounting for 19 per cent of visitors to the previous Queensland Safety Show in 2009. The emphasis for this year’s event will be practical work health and safety. Visitor surveys conducted in 2009 show that 54 per cent of visitors come specifically to see new products and services and 48 per cent come to gather information. Show organisers say the comprehensive array of safety solutions that span from corporate health through to height safety and from security equipment to vehicle safety is particularly appealing. “In a few hours under one roof, visitors can find controls for almost any workplace risk and update themselves on the latest technology,” says organiser, Marie Kinsella of Australian Exhibitions & Conferences Pty Ltd. “The breadth of the Queensland Safety Show and the co-located Queensland Materials Handling show are especially important for government. No sector of the economy undertakes a greater range of tasks and must therefore manage an unparalleled array of risks. It’s a big job for government OHS professionals just to keep up with new safety products and a large dedicated work health and safety event like this makes it so much easier.” Complementing the products and services, the Queensland Safety Show will offer a line-up of very practical free manufacturing and workplace safety seminars. Experts including representatives of Safe Work Australia, the Norton Rose law firm, the Chamber of Commerce and Industry Queensland and Enterprise Connect will explain how to attract funding, what to expect from new OHS laws, how meet obligations manageably and within budget. Sponsored by myosh, the Queensland Safety Show, Materials Handling Show and co-located Queensland Manufacturing Show run from June 21 to 23, 2011, at the Brisbane Convention & Exhibition Centre. For more information, visit qldsafetyshow.com.au, email safetyvisitor@aec.net.au or phone Australian Exhibitions & Conferences Pty Ltd on 03 9654 7773.

40


Total Asbestos Services Total Asbestos Services, as an unlimited asbestos license holder and recognised Government pre-qualified contractor in South Australia, has been involved in the removal and management of asbestos and asbestos-related issues within schools and other Government facilities since 1998. Being fully compliant with DECS policies during the handling of asbestos, along with industry-trained staff, make using Total Asbestos Services for any asbestos issues that schools may come across, a comfortable and stress-free experience. To help protect staff, children and the public, air monitoring and post removal clearance inspection is conducted on all jobs by an independent air monitoring company, no matter how big or small the job is, with results of this being made available to the schools within a couple of hours after completion of the job. This helps ally any fears that staff or parents may have, as well as complying with Safework SA and DECS regulations. We are in a position to deal with after hours emergency call outs, usually as a result of vandalism with a full understanding of DECS policies in place to protect the public from asbestos exposure during these unfortunate times. The Director and license holder of Total Asbestos Services, Wendy Tredinnick, is all for promoting public awareness and education in the safe management and handling of asbestos. As a result of this, she is currently speaking at public forums to whoever is willing to listen. This also includes her recent offer to talk to young people in schools to provide information and education about the risks involved when dealing with asbestos. Her purpose being to curb the number of young people still being exposed and contracting fatal diseases like mesothelioma and asbestosis, quite often as a result of Mum and Dad’s home renovations. The number of young people dying from asbestos related diseases in their 20s is on the increase, and will continue to do so until the public starts taking the dealing with asbestos issues more seriously. For further information, please don’t hesitate to call our office on 8234 1282 where you can speak to one of our experienced staff. P 08 8234 1282 F 08 8234 7211 M 0411 724 833 15 William Street Mile End SA 5031 admin@totalasbestos.com.au

41


Escape compliance training jail Attention-getting compliance training gets greater results Just about every Australian knows the Cancer Council’s ‘slip, slop, slap’ slogan. Remarkably - for a campaign that’s asking for your compliance with sun-safe behaviour – it’s earned a place in the national language and has had a significant impact on public behaviour. If only all compliance training and elearning was as effective! The unfortunate truth is that as many as 70% of staff who start an online training program fail to complete it. Which means that barely a third of staff actually acquire the knowledge that the training aimed to deliver. Without this vital knowledge, staff members don’t know what you want them to do: leaving the organisation at risk of failing to achieve its goals – or worse, risking a compliance breach. Compliance training is not elearning Compliance training – for safety, workplace ethics and other corporate obligations – is not typical training.

Building on its 10 years of creating e-learning programs with Australian government and business organisations, Savv-e has created Savv-e Express, a fast, easy and effective development tool. Savv-e Express helps organisations develop high-quality, interactive and engaging elearning programs. With Savv-e Express, all the hard work is done – instructional design, interactive design, graphic design and navigation have all been pre-designed and built in by the experts. All you need to do is add your content.

The stakes are generally higher, and failure to implement mandated policies can result in serious consequences for the organisation.

Program development times are reduced from months to weeks or even days. More importantly, the training program can be structured to engage more of the trainee’s attention, boosting the remember-ability of the training program.

Compliance training is often legally mandated, and breaches can leave organisations open to heavy penalties. Even more damaging, and harder to recover from, is that breaches destroys staff and the wider public’s trust – and it can take years of concerted effort to rebuild their faith.

Andrew Stein, Director of PolicyPoint comments, “PolicyPoint & Savv-e Express together bring you the best of both worlds.”

While traditional learning management systems can be used to distribute and manage training programs, they don’t have the capacity to fine tune training to individual staff needs, or deliver effective, auditable compliance training. For this reason, Government organisations are increasingly turning to POLICYPOINT, an online platform that ensures policies are known. Within Australia’s government sector, QLD’s Townsville City Council, NSW’s Fairfield City Council and other government organisations have found the platform delivers results. The platform is also being used by enterprises across Australia and New Zealand as the engine for their elearning strategies, to help upskill staff and create a culture of ongoing learning. Working with the law of forgetting The law of forgetting – discovered more than a century ago – records that humans tend to halve their memory of newly learned knowledge in a matter of days or weeks, unless they consciously review the learned material. The stronger the memory, the longer period of time that a person is able to recall it. With this in mind, PolicyPoint works with clients to structure refresher courses that help keep important information uppermost in employees’ minds. An additional option now available from PolicyPoint is to also incorporate richer content that creates a stronger, more lasting impression. PolicyPoint is partnering with a leader in the e-learning field – Savv-e – to help Governments develop training programs that deliver their content in a rich, stimulating, interactive and engaging way.

42

Gourmet elearning at a take-away price

“There’s the ability to easily schedule training – making sure that no-one falls through the cracks, and training is tailored to each employee’s needs, and as often as is needed to keep the information fresh.” “Then, with Savv-e Express, you also get the ability to rapidly build training attention-getting programs that stay in people’s minds for longer. It’s flexible, cost-effective and produces great results – in all, a great combination.”

How Townsville City Council turned 3 into 1 When Queensland’s Townsville City Council merged with two adjacent Government organisations in 2008, the new Council found it had three distinct sets of rules, and three corporate cultures. To unify staff behind a single ‘way of doing things’, Council created a set of rules, and turned to POLICYPOINT to make sure staff read and fully understood the new rules. POLICYPOINT allowed Council to distribute, manage, track and record staff training that was tailored to each staff member’s role and location. Townsville City Council CEO, Ray Burton, says the online compliance education platform has had a significant impact on staff. In fact, more than 75% of respondents to a staff survey felt that they’d been effectively alerted about their obligations. “The success of the pilot means we can be confident that policies disseminated via the platform will be actually studied and understood. Which means that POLICYPOINT provides us a tool for giving staff the important information they need – as well as giving management a tool for embedding the high-performance culture we want for Townsville City,” says Ray Burton.


About POLICYPOINT

For more information contact: PolicyPoint 56 Berry St North Sydney P: 61 2 9455 0519 E: info@policypoint.com W: policypoint.com Savv-e James Fordham Level 7, 33 Chandos Street St Leonards P: 9901 4522 E: james@savv-e.com.au W: savv-e.com.au About Savv-e Savv-e is Australia’s leading elearning specialist company, providing everything you need to create, deliver, manage and track high quality elearning within your organisation. Since 2000, Australian and international leading organisations have made Savv-e their provider of choice for innovative, award-winning elearning tools, off-the-shelf elearning content, custom elearning development services and elearning management systems. When you work with Savv-e and/or purchase any of our products, you will have support from a locally-based company which leads the way in elearning innovation and quality. You’ll have access to our support, collaboration and additional services that will provide quick turnaround, flexibility and peace of mind. For more information, visit www.savv-e.com.au

POLICYPOINT is an online platform that takes the work out of assigning, managing, monitoring, reminding and repeating compliance training. It automates many of the processes involved and - through its system of reminders and alerts - makes sure that no staff members fall through the training cracks. POLICYPOINT also helps organisations assign a training library for each staff member – so they’re allocated the training they need for their role, work location or work type. It also contains a refresher schedule – so training or refresher courses can be automatically scheduled as often as is required to keep vital information fresh. A hosted platform, POLICYPOINT requires no additional infrastructure – and can be up and running in hours or days. Little administrative training is required, and users can access the content anywhere, via the Internet. It’s an approach that can deliver a very high ROI and rapid payback. For more information, see www.policypoint.com

Gourmet elearning at a take-away price Call us today and speak with our award-winning team about Australia’s exciting Flash-based

elearning creation tool, Savv-e Express. In a matter of minutes you’ll be creating your own sumptuous elearning that will captivate your learners and meet your budget constraints.

TM

elearning to go

61 2 9901 4522

www.savv-e.com.au

@

info@savv-e.com.au

43


Prescription Safety Glasses This article discusses how visual defects can affect personal safety and job performance and how this can be overcome to improve personal and workplace functionality and wellbeing.

Visual defects: The eye is a complex organ that needs proper care and protection and in some cases assistance, to enable it to perform to its full potential. As we get older it becomes necessary to use prescription glasses or contact lenses to overcome visual problems which are either physiological or age related. There are four major visual problems, which can be helped by the use of Optical Corrections: Hyperopia - “See well in the distance, not well up close”- resulting in injuries to hands and arms, reduced productivity when working at close distances or in poor lighting . Myopia - “See well up close, not well in the distance”- Motorised vehicle accidents are more likely to be incurred by this group resulting in injury to them and co-workers and damage to expensive equipment. Astigmatism - “Both distance and near vision”-are adversely affected and may produce below-average performance and productivity. Injuries by tripping & falling are common to this group. Presbyopia - “Unable to see well up close”- Usually age-related with near vision loss. Injuries and reduced performance is similar to those with Hyperopia. An employee will readily notice a visual defect with a rapid onset (e.g. as a result of an accident) and will generally seek treatment immediately. With the gradual onset of visual defects, an employee may not notice the slow deterioration in visual performance for some time. For this reason it is essential that Visual Performance Assessments be carried out at regular intervals of no more than two years. If visual defects are left undiagnosed and untreated they may lead to reduced work performance and the risk of injury. Poor vision • Poor vision causes accidents • Poor vision reduces productivity • Poor vision adds to worker fatigue • Poor vision is usually correctable with prescription spectacles

Common eye injuries in the workplace: Foreign Bodies in the Eye - A Foreign body on the external part of the eye was the most common type of compensated injury reported in a 2009 Eye-related Injuries in Australia study between 2000-2005. This type of eye injury resulted in a median total time lost at work to be between 1.4 to 1.7 weeks. The second most common type of compensated eye injury was open wounds with the median time lost ranging between 2.0 and 2.4 weeks over this same period. Blunt Trauma Injuries - In the same 2009 study, being hit by moving objects was found to be the most common mechanism of injury, with approximately 1.6–1.8 weeks lost off work. The second most common mechanism was hitting objects with a part of the body resulting in 1.6–2.0 weeks time off work. Chemical Eye Splashes and Burns - Splashes of chemical and other substances either directly or indirectly can cause permanent and irreparable damage to the eye. UV Exposure - Extended exposure to Ultra Violet light and radiation (artificial and natural) increases sensitivity to the sun which can result in short and long term affects. Extended Computer Use - Working in front of a computer screen for extended periods of time without regular refocusing to the distance, will potentially induce strain on the eyes. Poor Lighting Levels - Working in poorly illuminated areas will increase the effects of physical visual defects and induce strain on the eyes. The combination of visual defects and common eye injuries in the workplace contribute to decreased personal safety, work efficiency and performance. By introducing a Visual Performance Program employers can work towards promoting a safer workplace for everyone whilst managing the risk that current and potential visual challenges pose in the workplace. For more details please visit www.rxsg.com or call 02 4322 4597

SEE US AT

• Prescription Safety Glasses • Improve vision and reduce accidents • Increase productivity and accuracy • Reduce worker fatigue • Correct the majority of visual defects • Provide physical protection for the eyes

44

25 - 27 October 2011 Sydney Showground Sydney Olympic Park


Personal Protection

Enhance

Vision

Safety Mining

Engineering

Manufacturing

Power

Construction

Lic. SMKH21382

The largest range of certified products in the Asia- Pacific region. Available from over 600 independent optometrists across Australia and New Zealand PSG CERTIFIED products Meet the following Australian requirements AS/NZS1337.6 2007, AS/NZS1336, AS/NZS1337, AS2228.1

Visit our website for more information www.rxsg.com.au Phone: (02) 4322 4597 Fax: (02) 4322 4598 ABN:19130834221


Work Safety and Risk Management

What you need to know about the new

height safety rules New draft regulations and a model Code of Practice for How to Prevent Falls at Workplaces are on the table. Ahead of his June 22 seminar at the Queensland Safety Show, height safety specialist Carl Sachs of Workplace Access & Safety outlines what you can expect to change, the implications for workplaces and how to prepare for a new era in safe work at heights. Everybody wants to prevent fatal falls but getting height safety right is anything but straightforward. Until now, each state has had its own set of legislation for height safety. This has made working at heights difficult to manage, particularly for organizations and companies who need a consistent height safety solution for sites across Australia. Who is responsible? Currently, the law deems the “controller of the workplace” responsible for ensuring a workplace is safe. But debate has always raged about exactly who that person is. Defining the controller has been particularly problematic in tenant/landlord relationships when it comes to deciding who should pay for safe access equipment for working at heights. Instead, the new model Work Health and Safety Act introduces the concept of the Person Conducting a Business Undertaking (PCBU). The PCBU may be the landlord, tenant, director, site foreperson or manager of an enterprise or site. Rather than pinpoint a particular individual, the WHS Act emphasises people taking steps that are within their control to reduce risks in the workplace. This may be as a simple as telling contractors not to access an area altogether until safe access has been put in place and ensuring the task can be done safely. There will be an expectation that all people behave in a reasonable manner rather than trying to apportion responsibility. You don’t have to be 2 metres high anymore State-based legislation and the national code of practice for fall prevention applied once a person was working at a height of 2 metres or more. This limit is about to be replaced with an obligation to minimise the likelihood of a fall from any height. In real terms, the law will encompass falls from low level platforms and ladders, bringing the courts’ attention to activities that the existing legislation might have excluded. The hierarchy of control for working at heights The five-level hierarchy of control will be the major change for PCBUs in NSW, Queensland and South Australia. For many years, those states either used a three-level hierarchy, or simply tried to apply the classical hierarchy for other risks to height safety (elimination, substitution, engineering, administrative controls, PPE). The five-level hierarchy of controls has now been brought into line with that of the national code of practice and Victoria’s fall prevention regulations. The five-level system is good news for PCBUs because it takes human behaviour into account and cost-effectively deals with risk reduction. When correctly applied, it reduces the risk of falls and lowers the cost

46

of control measures by calling for higher order controls like walkways and guard rails. The more commonly used lower order controls such as administrative controls or procedures demand much more documentation and maintenance. Preventing suspension trauma through rescue The draft code doesn’t pull any punches when it comes to suspension trauma and toxic shock. It explains in detail the consequences of being suspended in a harness for period of time and alerts the reader to the likelihood of death by suspension. The requirements for rescue training, supervision, training and practising rescues is spelled out clearly. Self rescue is no longer an option and nobody should use a fall arrest system unless there is at least one other person on site to rescue them if they fall. The second trained person must be on standby to execute the rescue without relying on any assistance from the suspended person. Apart from the costs of training, supervision and rescue equipment, this significantly increases the labour cost of working in a harness. Regular inspections for ladders The model code details ladder use, acknowledging that this may be an option when all other options have been exhausted. A new requirement is that of regular inspection of ladders and maintenance. This may increase the cost of ladder use and is likely to steer users towards higher order controls like scaffold and elevated working platforms. What if someone falls from height? Fall from a rooftop and only a miracle will save you. The penalties for those held responsible for tragic falls are also about to get much steeper. The model regulations prescribe far more onerous penalties on organizations and duty holders. Categories have now been created which are based on the degree of culpability and degree of harm. Penalties have been significantly increased for category one, which levies penalties of $3 million on corporations, $600,000 for officers and $300,000 for workers. Workers and officers may also be liable for jail terms of up to five years. How to prepare for the model regulations Before you begin preparing for new regulations, start by ensuring height safety at your workplace complies with existing height safety laws. Methodically identify all fall hazards in the business or undertaking. Reconsider future controls in light of the draft hierarchy of controls for working at heights, particularly if you’re based in NSW, Queensland or South Australia. Allocate a risk rating, so that rectification work can be prioritized and dealt with systematically, and control activities rated high-risk


immediately. We’re in a period of transition. Your site will need to be fully compliant by the time these model regulations become law, so it’s best to get on with it now.

Carl Sachs’s safe work at heights seminar at the Queensland Safety Show is one of a series to be presented at the workplace safety trade show, which will run from June 21 to 23 at the Brisbane Convention & Exhibition Centre. These very practical free manufacturing and workplace safety seminars as experts explain how to attract funding, what to expect from new OHS laws, how meet obligations manageably and build profitability. The program of free, 50-minute sessions extends over the three days of the show. For more information, visit www.safetyevents.com.au, email safetyvisitor@aec.net.au or phone Australian Exhibitions & Conferences Pty Ltd on 03 9654 7773.

47


Is your life worth $24.95? Microsleeps can Kill

Low Cost Solution

You Microsleep at 100kmh

Wear a Driver Fatigue Alarm™

You go 100m in 4 Seconds…

Your head tilts forward Alarm Emits Loud Alert …

Your Eyes Tight Shut

…or Strong Vibration

You Hit a Truck, Tree or Family

You’ll Never Know What Happened!

Protect your family for less than a tank of fuel

Safer Drive for $2495

Driver Fatigue is one of the most insidious, silent killers on the Australian roads today. It can strike anyone, anywhere, anytime without warning – often in the form of a microsleep.

Fatigue Alarm is easily worn behind the ear. An electronic balance sensor alerts a driver with a loud beeping sound or a strong vibration when the head tilts forward.

on a very familiar road. Such accidents can happen after poor sleep or a long day’s work or play – even moments after a tired driver first takes the wheel.

The most important part of any journey is to arrive safely – but too often we take our safety for granted. Many drivers fall into the trap of assuming that they will arrive safely. Unfortunately the annual road toll has shown that many people die every year from DRIVER FATIGUE.

Private and government fleet managers now have an increasing bonus to provide safe working conditions across their vehicle fleets. Many focus on insurance and vehicle maintenance – but all this becomes irrelevant when a tired driver loses control of a vehicle.

Driver fatigue can happen to anyone, anytime and anywhere. Don’t let avoidable fatal accidents affect your organisation. Protect your life, those of your staff, and your loved ones with a Driver Fatigue Alarm.

Now, a new device offers a crucial warning to drivers when they are at most risk. The Driver Fatigue Alarm emits a loud alarm or strong vibration as a driver’s head tilts forward into a potentially life threatening micro-sleep. Instead of dozing off at 100kmh and travelling 100 metres in four seconds, drivers can hear or feel this alarm and pull over to stop, revive and survive. Drowsy drivers often have no idea – until it’s too late. The lightweight Driver

The Driver Fatigue Alarm has to work only once to deliver immense returns in terms of lives saved, injuries avoided – and costly damage to vehicles and company. Don’t risk a potentially deadly micro sleep in your fleet. Provide your drivers to wear this lightweight, comfortable and effective Driver Fatigue Alarm. Government and private company staff face great risks of micro-sleeps midway through long drives. Day and night shift workers can suffer micro-sleeps only moments from home

The Driver Fatigue Alarm™ should be the second most important thing in the car after the engine, because we can’t put a price on life! The Driver Fatigue Alarm™ is a preventative product, just like car insurance. Having one in the car can give us peace of mind.

Safer Driver for just

2495

$

Every responsible driver should wear one. Every car should have one in the glove box. If everyone wears a Driver Fatigue Alarm, our roads will be a lot safer.

Order online at www.driverfatiguealarm.com.au or Phone us on (02) 9633 9999


Work Safety and Risk Management

Getting the fire safety message through to government

Fire safety audits of government buildings have uncovered so many non-compliances that the Queensland Fire and Rescue Service will take a stand and run a seminar at the Queensland Safety Show from June 21 to 23 to get the attention of government workers. “We will be at the Queensland Safety Show to get the message through that fire safety is an essential part of running any government department,” says the Fire and Rescue Service’s John Harrison. “Workplace Health and Safety Queensland has a zero harm policy that also applies to our fire-fighters. If your hydrants aren’t working, for example, you’re putting them at extra risk.” “One of the fire safety installations that cause the service most concern is the fire door, which must be serviced by a licensed person every six months. People don’t realise they have to get them serviced or that they are fire doors. The tags come off, they are painted over, or locksmiths fit non-compliant locks.” On the other hand, fire safety installations with much longer service intervals can also catch building occupiers off-guard during an audit. Sprinkler systems have a 24-year maintenance cycle and while keeping records for such a period can be a challenge, the Queensland regulations have almost every eventuality covered. Records must be handed over when there is a change of occupancy and kept safe in the event of fire and an extra copy stored off-site.

Workers must receive a fire safety orientation (general evacuation instructions) within the first two days of working in a building and receive first response evacuation instructions involving use of fire extinguishers and reels within one month and then every two years. At the other end of the spectrum, a fire safety adviser must be assessed by a registered training organisation against eight competencies every three years for high occupancy buildings.

“Queensland has Australia’s most rigorous fire safety legislation. Other states aspire to match it and look to us as a model,” says John Harrison.

Fire Evacuation Plans and Diagrams

Forged from the horror of the Whisky au Go Go fire that killed 15 people in 1973, the State’s Building Fire Safety Regulation 2008, together with the Queensland Development Code, are demanding.

The Queensland Fire and Rescue Service audits buildings every one to five years, according to a risk assessment. The implications for non-compliance of government buildings can be severe. Multiple noncompliances generally result in a notice being served on a building, which is passed up through the Service’s Director-General to the Minister, who communicates with the Minister responsible for the building. The Service may also issue on-the-spot fines.

At the Fire and Rescue Service’s Queensland Safety Show seminar, John Harrison will explain three of the main principles underpinning the regulations: • the maintenance of fire safety installations; • fire evacuation instructions to the occupants of a building; and • fire evacuation plans and diagrams. Maintenance of Fire Safety Installations The Queensland Development Code sets out the maintenance requirements for all fire safety installations, such as sprinklers, alarms, extinguishers, exit signs and hose reels. In Queensland, Mandatory Part 6.1 of the Code overrides the requirements of Australian Standard 1851 – 2005 for passive fire safety installations. Fire Evacuation Instructions to Occupants of a Building The regulations, which have similar but more specific requirements than AS 3745, describe the training needs that apply to different fire safety roles, beginning with workers.

Evacuation signs/diagrams must be displayed at certain points along evacuation routes and must be included with the evacuation plan.

To aid compliance, the Queensland Fire and Rescue Service has created a two-page checklist supported by 15 pages of advisory notes, which can be downloaded from its web site at www.fire.qld.gov.au. The Queensland Fire and Rescue Service presentation is part of a lineup of very practical free workplace safety seminars at the Queensland Safety Show. Experts will explain how to attract funding, what to expect from new OHS laws, how to meet obligations manageably and within budget. Sponsored by myosh, the Queensland Safety Show, Materials Handling Show and co-located Queensland Manufacturing Show run from June 21 to 23, 2011, at the Brisbane Convention & Exhibition Centre. For more information, visit qldsafetyshow.com.au, email safetyvisitor@aec.net.au or phone Australian Exhibitions & Conferences Pty Ltd on 03 9654 7773.

49


Environmentally friendly buildings

From voluntary to vital

and the government sector Robin Mellon Executive Director – Advocacy and International Green Building Council of Australia “We shape our buildings; thereafter they shape us,” a quote attributed to Winston Churchill, encapsulates one of the most important aspects of our built environment. Our buildings affect our health, productivity, quality of life and the environment. According to the World Green Building Council, our built environment is responsible for 17 per cent of water usage, a quarter of the wood harvested, a third of global greenhouse gas emissions, up to 40 per cent of energy use and as much as half the world’s raw materials. The statistics are alarming - and the overall impacts of buildings are too large to ignore. As we prepare for a world where pollution has a price, we can expect the total lifetime energy costs of many of our buildings to exceed the costs of the buildings themselves. Green buildings, on the other hand, are built for energy and water efficiency, so they are cheaper to operate, use fewer resources and provide a healthier place for people to live and work. One study of green buildings in the United States, for instance, has determined that green buildings consume 26 per cent less energy than the average building and generate 33 per cent less greenhouse gas emissions. Green buildings also deliver higher returns on investment than their non-green counterparts. Research from the IPD Green Investment Index, developed in conjunction with the Property Council of Australia, indicates that Green Star-rated offices generate a 4.8 per cent better return on average in CBD areas, with a 2.7 per cent better return on average in non-CBD areas.

50

While the bottom line benefits of green buildings are clear, we also have solid evidence of the benefits of green building on everything from office productivity and reputational equity to retail sales and performances on school tests. The Green Building Council of Australia (GBCA), which operates the Green Star environmental rating system for buildings, believes that next three years will determine whether green building practices become ‘normal practice’, rather than just ‘best practice’. We are working with all levels of government on five priorities which we believe will help transition Australia’s green building practices from ‘voluntary’ to ‘vital’. These are: • Provide visionary government leadership • Retrofit and improve existing buildings • Green education and healthcare facilities • Move beyond buildings to communities and cities • Embed green skills across all industry training. As a starting point, the GBCA calls on federal, state and local governments to demonstrate their commitment and leadership by achieving environmental ratings for buildings they own, occupy or develop. We also want to see governments achieve Green Star ratings for all public buildings such as schools, hospitals, libraries and law courts. Green Star rating tools already exist for education and healthcare facilities, and a Green Star rating tool for public buildings is nearly complete.


51


Environmentally friendly buildings

Some state governments and local councils have been demonstrating leadership in this field for some time - from developing iconic buildings such as the City of Melbourne’s Council House 2 (CH2) through to mandatory local laws to ensure minimum energy efficiency standards.

building industry practitioners these courses provide me with insight into industry preferences” and enable her to “stay up-to-date on industry best practice in sustainable development which is taken into consideration when reviewing Council’s development controls.”

The GBCA has an online portal, the Green Guide to Government Policy, free to all members, which outlines green building programs and incentives at all levels of government around Australia. This is a useful resource for governments wanting to compare and contrast their policies with best practice examples around Australia.

Local government action

Calling for a co-ordinated approach A joined-up approach is needed to meet the challenges of managing growth in our urban areas, improving quality and liveability and transitioning to a low-carbon economy while maintaining the quality of life that Australians dearly prize. In February, the Australian Sustainable Built Environment Council (ASBEC) released a ‘call to action’ to highlight the urgent need for bold leadership and a streamlined, coordinated approach to urban management policy. ASBEC’s list of actions includes a federal minister, cabinet committee and department for cities and urban development. ASBEC is particularly concerned by the lack of co-ordination between the three levels of government in Australia, resulting in programs and policies across eight state and territory governments, and more than 500 local governments. What’s more, ASBEC has identified 45 federal government programs, strategies and initiatives which impact the built environment. A good example of ‘joined-up thinking’ is the GBCA’s Green Star – Communities project, which will set national voluntary benchmarks for the planning, design and delivery of best practice sustainable community development projects across Australia. The project is being led by the GBCA in conjunction with partner, VicUrban, and supported by a range of industry leaders, state and local governments and educational institutions. Importantly, every state government land organisation in Australia has agreed to participate in the tool development process. We would like to see similar collaboration occur across the breadth of the urban development agenda. Green collar growth As Australia transitions to a low carbon economy, we can expect a booming demand for ‘green collar workers’ across the property and construction industry. But our industry must have the skills to ensure we fully capitalise on this green collar growth. In the same way that OH&S has become an integrated part of industry training, green skills must be embedded into the curriculum to ensure we develop better, safer, greener buildings. The GBCA has rolled out a focused capacity-building Continuing Professional Development (CPD) program, which provides skills development and a pathway for further deepening of expertise, experience and connections within the green building industry. The CPD program encompasses everything from introductory courses through to highly-specialised technical training, to ensure those people making or influencing decisions across local governments can understand the latest implications of the rapid development of sustainable buildings. Like many people from government organisations, Bronwyn Englaro, Senior Sustainability Officer at Randwick City Council, is enhancing her green skills. Bronwyn says that “by participating alongside

52

The GBCA has also developed a local government task group to bring together the concerns of local governments and create solutions, such as bridging the planning and building gap, increasing local skills and accelerating more sustainable buildings and communities. Members include the city councils of Brisbane, Gosnells, Manningham, Onkaparinga, Parramatta, Randwick and Sydney. While many local governments have been promoting and implementing green building programs for a number of years, the GBCA’s Local Government Task Group (LGTG) is helping to further this trend by encouraging the uptake of voluntary rating tools, offering practical advice and assistance and educating councils on best practice measures implemented by similar organisations around the world. The LGTG is integrating local governments’ efforts with other sectors – from developers to householders – to demonstrate that significant smallscale action across our nation can be aggregated towards major change. The GBCA continues to work with other green building councils around the world, and with the World Green Building Council (WorldGBC) in particular, to keep track of the incentives, systems and processes used to accelerate the green building movement in other countries. The recent WorldGBC special report, Tackling Global Climate Change, Meeting Local Priorities, sets out the need to think global but act local and provides an overview of what proactive government and private sector initiatives can do to harness the potential of green buildings to deliver important social, economic and environmental benefits. We aim to see more state and local governments take on the role of ‘green change agents’ and lead the way in the adoption of sustainable building and eco-friendly business practices. Strong and contemporary leadership is needed to ensure we tackle climate change. Our challenge – and our opportunity - is to work together to realise the full economic and environmental potential of the building sector and overcome the skills deficits and institutional barriers that impede action. Case study: Global challenges, local solutions The City of Gosnells has recently achieved a 5 Star Green Star – Office Design v2 rating, signifying Australian Excellence, for the retrofit and extension of its Civic Centre building. In doing so, the local council has demonstrated that retrofits of old buildings can make environmental and economic sense. Paul McAllister, Project Manager, City of Gosnells, explains “We were concerned that the age and condition of the building would make a sustainable retrofit unviable financially. Once we investigated the options, we realised that for a 2.3 per cent increase in our outlay we could deliver a leading sustainable building without breaching our commitment of fiscal responsibility to our rate payers”. This has proved to be a smart financial decision, with a predicted five year payback period for the $600,000 extra spent to deliver the 5 Star Green Star rating. One of these environmental features includes a thermal energy storage tank which will store ‘cool’ energy in the


form of ice. It is charged overnight to avoid peak energy tariffs and then releases the ‘cool’ energy during the day, reducing reliance on traditional air conditioning. This will save the council money by reducing energy demand at peak periods. Overall, the building is expected to reduce energy usage by around 316,000 kilowatts hours of electricity each year – the equivalent of taking 43 cars off the road for a year. To minimise water use, the Civic Centre features water-efficient fittings and fixtures, as well as the use of captured rainwater to flush toilets within the building. These small measures are expected to cut the City of Gosnells water use by 35 per cent, saving 840KL of water from being flushed down the drain each year. The Civic Centre, which was originally built in 1972, has also been completely transformed from an environmental dinosaur with declining functionality into a sustainability showcase that helps the City of Gosnells meet its energy and water saving targets, retain staff and reduce costs. Case study: Green living – environmentally, economically and socially sustainable The Redfern Housing Redevelopment in Sydney was only the second public housing development in Australia to achieve a Green Star rating, and was awarded a 5 Star Green Star rating under the Multi Unit Residential PILOT in 2009. Representing ‘Australian Excellence’ in environmentally sustainable design, this project for Housing NSW sets a new standard for social housing developments, and demonstrates that environmentally, economically and socially sustainable outcomes are achievable. Green initiatives within the Redfern redevelopment, such as rainwater collection and greywater treatment, solar hot water systems, solar photovoltaic cells for lighting and passive ventilation, will deliver cost savings for both Housing NSW and the low-income tenants who live in the development. The project’s design aims to reduce energy consumption by 74 per cent when compared with standard residential buildings of similar size. What’s more, the energy efficiency measures are predicted to save around $26,000 across the entire development in energy consumption each year alone. The reuse of rainwater and use of treated greywater will ensure around 45 per cent of all water demand on the site is met by nonpotable water, and water-efficient fittings and fixtures are being installed throughout. The predicted saving of 4,700 cubic metres of water a year is equivalent to around two Olympic-sized swimming pools or 33,571 bathtubs. Based on current Sydney Water prices, the cost savings will be around $7,500 a year across the entire tenancy. Australia’s indigenous people have a long association with Redfern, moving to the suburb in the 1920s for employment opportunities and affordable housing. They formed a strong and vibrant community which is still in evidence today. Recognising the links between indigenous people and the suburb, a minimum of 20 construction workers on the project were required to be indigenous. This was a ‘first’ for a public housing project in Australia, and was rewarded with a Green Star Innovation point.

53


Environmentally friendly buildings

Empowering the local community was an integral part of the sustainable development, and Housing NSW provided employment opportunities to both Aboriginal and long-term unemployed people to enhance their business skills, increase their knowledge of ESD issues and improve the social and economic conditions for both the individuals and their community. Case study: Passive design, active learning Australia’s first Green Star - Education Design v1 primary school, Peregian Springs State School on the Sunshine Coast, is already reaping the benefit of its sustainability status, attracting the highest pre-enrolment of any school in Queensland. The school’s 4 Star Green Star rating recognises it as an example of ‘Best Practice’ in environmentally sustainable design, and heralds a new era of schools that provide better productivity outcomes for staff and students and better environmental outcomes for our planet. Principal Gwen Sands says that “it is a pleasure to work in a school which has been built to the highest environmental standards. Studying and working in this facility encourages both our staff and students to act in a more sustainable manner and will help improve learning outcomes for our students.”

8 Central Avenue - ATP

The design of Peregian Springs State School has ensured that its students have access to natural light, fresh air and views. With clever design and larger-than-average windows, 91 per cent of the usable floor area has a view outside, allowing for optimum ventilation and penetration of natural light. The school was also designed to reduce its dependence on the mains water supply through the installation of above- and below-ground water tanks. A 65,000 litre underground water tank stores harvested rainwater for use in flushing the toilet facilities throughout the school. This tank is complemented by two above-ground tanks, which are used for irrigation, and the installation of efficient plumbing fixtures throughout the premises. Furthermore, to ensure that the school doesn’t contribute to watercourse pollution of nearby wetlands, bio-retention basins have been installed to control the quantity and quality of stormwater runoff. Peregian Springs provides its students with a living lesson in sustainability. Displays fitted throughout the school provide up-to-theminute data on solar power generation, potable water consumption and stormwater treatment. This is a valuable learning resource for students, enabling them to observe first-hand the impact that activities within the school have on the environment. What’s more, it is a crucial source of information for the building’s managers, ensuring the school’s environmental performance matches its impressive design.

Environment and Energy 8 Central Avenue is a 4 Star Green Star - Design Rated v2 Building and has been built to target 4 Star Green Star - As-Built Rating v2 and achieve a 4.5-Star NABERS Office Energy rating. The building’s ESD features include • •

Efficient under floor air conditioning systems High performance façade with performance glazing and shading to reduce reliance on air conditioning • Occupant friendly interior design with reduced air pollutants from paints, carpets and composite wood products • Proximity to extensive public transport networks with trains and buses nearby • High efficiency fittings and lighting to reduce energy and water use • Ready for future recycled water supply for w/c flushing • Energy and water use metered throughout the building to allow fine tuning by building’s users during operation • Excellent provision of recycling facilities to make recycling of waste easier • Procedures were implemented throughout the construction phase to avoid generation of waste and to ensure an efficient recycle procedure of all waste material. 8 Central Avenue was one of the Watpac Constructions (NSW) sites audited by National Certification Systems International as part of the company gaining ISO 140012004 certification for their Environmental Management System.

Photographer: Steve Back

54


Environmentally friendly buildings

Building sustainable

communities – a multi-disciplinary approach

The significance of the contribution of the building sector to society’s overall carbon footprint has become clear. The need therefore to use energy, waste and water in a sustainable manner has emerged as being of major importance in meeting community expectations. The sustainability initiative in the built environment is supported by legislative drivers such as the Building Code of Australia’s Section J and financial drivers influenced by the emergence of a vibrant green fund investment industry. Sustainability has also brought to the fore the idea of whole of life cycle analysis (from development initiation to demolition), thereby raising the profile of the maintenance and operational characteristics of development projects, not just focusing on their up-front costs. Achieving sustainable building energy use and a healthy building environment requires engineered solutions which are both innovative and practical. The key to this process involves a multi-discipline approach involving a wide range of technical expertise. Involvement throughout all stages of a project is essential: from planning and technical feasibility assessments, environmental impact assessment, approvals, engineering, building system integration, construction management and commissioning. The ultimate aim is to design communities and the buildings in which we live and work which maximizes their sustainable value. Sustainable Energy Use – requires an integrated building energy strategy drawing upon building energy modelling and simulation, energy efficiency technologies and the prudent selection of site-specific renewable energy options (solar, wind, geothermal, biomass). The linkages to local and regional energy infrastructure (including available grant schemes) also need to be identified. Finally, commissioning and ongoing energy reporting provide the crucial feedback mechanism to achieve the desired levels of energy use, resource effeciency and occupant comfort. Site Optimisation – requires a holistic approach involving the efficient use of site-won natural materials, reduction in resource importation, construction waste reduction, earthworks balance, in-situ remediation and fill recycling, brownfield regeneration, careful consideration of geothermal and other renewable options available at the site. Waste Management – involves combining the skills of planners, master planners, urban designers, landscape architects, civil engineers, process engineering experts, ecologists and waste strategists to develop innovative and economic waste management strategies. These will include waste minimisation, recycling, re-use and the design of efficient waste collection and delivery systems. On a community-wise basis, sustainable waste use may involve the conversion of waste to

refuse-derived fuels for powering co- and tri-generation plant that then provides power, heating and cooling back to the community. Water Management – is achieved through an integrated approach involving potable water use control (e.g. through approved water fittings, low-water use urinals, etc.), managing water use for fire protection systems and evaporative and water cooling, water capture and water re-use, e.g. for landscape irrigation. Ecological and Biodiversity Management – covers habitat protection and creation, translocation, preservation of wildlife corridors, ecological restoration and the integration of bio-communities on a communitywide basis for all development projects. Healthy and Livable Buildings – the outcomes of managing the built environment – air quality, lighting, acoustics, ventilation, heat and moisture - have been well-documented. They include increased healthy lifestyles in residential communities and for building occupants in general, decreased sick leave and improved productivity. Material Selection and Life Cycle Analysis - life cycle analysis is now routinely used to select sustainable building materials and systems, i.e. to take into account the effect of the building product on the environment and not just the effect of the environment on the building product. Air Quality (and Natural Ventilation) - pollutant transport within and around buildings (including odours) needs to be controlled and natural ventilation and oxygen levels maximised. Lighting - illuminating the built environment by maximising natural light improves the health, well-being and productivity of building occupants. Acoustics - understanding the behaviour of building elements and junctions helps achieve an appropriate acoustical climate appropriate to the specific building usage. Heat and Moisture (Thermal Comfort) - identifying the transport of heat and moisture within a building leads to maximising the use of natural ventilation (for thermal comfort) and minimising material degradation and mould growth. The outcome … The key to turning the ideals of sustainability into practice throughout every aspect of our built environment is adopting an integrated approach which draws upon many specialised technical services to develop a holistic understanding of energy, waste and water as well as the elements which contribute to a healthy and biodiverse-rich environment.

55


Exciting challenges in delivering sustainable projects Every project has some unique aspect requiring innovative thinking to deliver a practical and cost-effective solution. Sustainability projects create even more demanding challenges given the many and diverse technical disciplines which need to be integrated to achieve a sustainable balance between financial, social and environmental outcomes.

“That’s where things got interesting”, says Dr Georgiou, “The technical aspects of each of the main renewable options were complex given the size and nature of the GLC. However, each of the technical solutions then needed to consider integration with the operations of the relevant local authorities.”

SLR Consulting, one of Australia’s leading specialist environmental consultancies, has encountered many such challenges over recent years. SLR’s Sustainability Director, Dr Peter Georgiou, describes some of the more interesting sustainability projects which led to innovative solutions in response to the unique circumstances of each project. “Our firm’s sustainability team has grown in diversity and the range of services offered thanks to ever closer links with the global SLR network of engineers and scientists. That’s given us unique insights into ways of solving unusual sustainability-related problems. Two recent projects which highlight this are the Busselton Shire Geographe Leisure Centre and Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority projects.” Busselton Shire’s Geographe Leisure Centre (GLC) is a popular destination that includes a range of swimming facilities (outdoor as well as indoor pools), spas and a steam room, activity spaces (e.g. for crèches), multi-purpose indoor courts, as well as dining facilities. SLR Consulting was engaged by Busselton Council to help reduce the energy footprint of the GLC facility. The initial investigation involved a detailed analysis of the demands from the different activity areas coupled with a range of future patronage growth scenarios. This helped define GLC’s ongoing energy needs. Specialist mechanical engineering expertise then led to specific cogeneration opportunities. Trigeneration was also considered. The really unique aspect of the project however involved the geothermal opportunities at the site. A straightforward geothermal extraction well was considered. However, GLC had also identified that Busselton Water had their own extraction bores nearby (for the Shire’s water supply) and in one case, a pipeline delivering bore water to the nearest storage facility passed right in front of the GLC. Furthermore, the water was at a temperature (greater than 30ºC) which made it attractive for heat exchange purposes, even after extraction and pumping to the nearby storage facility.

56

“The cogeneration options involved discussions with Western Power in relation to emergency power supply needs, grid connections, electricity and gas pricing, etc. The geothermal options involved discussions with Busselton Water in relation to the Shire’s water needs, time and duration of current and future pumping operations, connection details, etc.” “Both authorities were extremely helpful in providing input to assist with GLC’s project needs and developing a cost-effective solution which Busselton Council could move forward with. Their input and the integration aspects of each of the renewable options have been crucial to the final recommendations and in some cases drove the technical side of the project”. The project is now moving into the cost feasibility stage. SLR Consulting’s recent work for the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority (GBRMPA) offered up an equally fascinating set of challenges in relation to GBRMPA’s sustainability and carbon reduction initiatives. Dr Georgiou describes the challenges with the GBRMPA project, “The authority looks after one of the most diverse and remarkable ecosystems in the world which remains one of the healthiest coral reef ecosystems anywhere. GBRMPA is well aware of the challenges faced by the reef, including climate change ocean temperature and sea level rise, variability in water quality from catchment runoff and loss of coastal habitats from coastal development. An initial step taken by GBRMPA in moving towards a reduction of their carbon footprint was to undertake an emissions inventory of all of their activities. Rarely have we seen such a variety of operations and associated emissions.” “GBRMPA operates from numerous cities each with its own commercial office workplace. The authority also operates a large marine fleet and a range of island research and observation stations. Finally there is the amazing Coral Reef Exhibit, the world’s largest living reef aquarium. It is unique not only because of its sheer size (2.5 million litre capacity), but because it is open to the elements so that the many thousands of reef organisms that are housed there receive natural day and moonlight and experience rain and storm events just like natural reefs. It is hard to imagine a more diverse set of emission sources and hence the large number of multifaceted opportunities for reducing GBRMPA’s carbon footprint”.


SLR Consulting is one of the world’s leading specialist environmental consultancies and sustainability is at the heart of all the services we provide. Our integrated team of sustainability specialists provides pragmatic environmental and sustainability advice to a wide range of business, regulatory and governmental clients in the mining and minerals, energy, infrastructure, planning and development, waste and industrial sectors. We strive to add value to our clients’ built and natural resources while protecting their longterm interests.

Carbon Management Carbon footprinting, life cycle analysis, carbon sequestration, GHG Auditing Climate Change Climate change vulnerability risk assessments, mitigation measures and strategies Energy Efficiency Co/Tri-Generation design, industrial process modification using advanced simulation tools Renewable Energy Planning and technical services for wind, solar, geothermal, biomass Waste and Sustainability Innovative waste management solutions, including energy from waste technologies

Contacts: Dr Peter Georgiou Business Area Manager - Renewables pgeorgiou@slrconsulting.com Jerome Rivory National BD Manager jrivory@slrconsulting.com www.slrconsulting.com 1300 434 443

Syd n e y N e w c a st l e Wo l l o n go n g B r i s b a n e To w n sv i l l e Ro c k h a m p t o n M e l b o u r n e Pe r t h C a n b e r ra A u c k l a n d S i n ga p o re


Environmentally friendly buildings

Going green

from the inside out

58


NABERS takes a look inside A healthy and comfortable indoor environment is key to attracting and retaining tenants, while costs associated with poor indoor environment quality can be avoided by monitoring and improving indoor environment performance. NABERS Indoor Environment (IE) is the world’s first indoor environment performance rating tool. It provides building managers, owners and occupants with an understanding of the indoor environment quality of their office buildings, allowing problems to be addressed and improvements to be made. Colonial First State Global Asset Management (CFSGAM) played a key role in the development of the NABERS IE tool from a grassroots level. Its involvement with the new NABERS IE tool was a natural fit, as sustainability is already a key component of its asset management strategy. CFSGAM currently uses NABERS Energy and Water tools to monitor operational performance and set targets that ensure CFSGAM’s property portfolio has minimal operational impact on the environment. “The use of NABERS IE demonstrates that CFSGAM is serious about the indoor environment of its buildings and is committed to improving the workplace experience it provides for occupants. “NABERS IE is an effective tool to measure indoor environment performance. By getting involved in its development, CFSGAM has ensured that the tool is relevant to our needs,” said Rowan Griffin, CFSGAM Head of Sustainability, Property. Hitting targets with NABERS IE To identify indoor environment improvement opportunities, CFSGAM took part in the NABERS IE pilot program and assisted in the development of the tool. CFSGAM uses the NABERS tools to set performance targets for every building in its portfolio. Each property has its own individual operational performance strategy in place, which incorporates NABERS tools. Monthly snapshots are taken to ensure short, medium and long-term NABERS targets are on track, while a range of controls and technical reviews are used to identify opportunities for improvement. “The operational performance of our entire portfolio is an ongoing consideration, from both a sustainability and business perspective. To maximise this performance it’s critical to continue to drive improvements. “Indoor environment performance is an important component of operational performance and, based on our strategic use of the existing NABERS tools, incorporating the NABERS Indoor Environment tool into our day-to-day operations was a logical move,” said Mr Griffin. Three office buildings across two of CFSGAM’s funds ‑ the listed Commonwealth Property Office Fund (CPA) and the wholesale Direct Property Investment Fund (DPIF) – were part of the NABERS IE pilot program. The following buildings were the first to be rated with NABERS IE and achieved good ratings: 60 Castlereagh Street (CPA) 4 stars 101 George Street (CPA)

3.5 stars

367 Collins Street (DPIF)

3.5 stars

These three buildings are managed by CFSGAM, with Jones Lang LaSalle performing property and facilities management. The NABERS IE base building rating on each of the properties was conducted by QED Environmental Services, a long-term air quality provider to CFSGAM,

59


Environmentally friendly buildings

who were also involved in the development of the NABERS IE tool prior to its official release. Obtaining a NABERS IE rating is a simple, cost effective process and unlocks long term savings potential for building owners and managers. An assessor is engaged to take samples, collect the data, calculate the results and submit ratings to the Department of Environment, Climate Change and Water (DECCW) for accreditation. A list of NABERS-accredited assessors can be found on the NABERS website. All assessors must meet strict selection criteria and have undertaken a training session and assessment to obtain accreditation. NABERS ie: the foundation for improvement

“A proactive approach is essential. NABERS IE ratings reflect the efforts and measures we’ve taken over a 12-month period. We need to continually monitor systems and procedures and implement identified improvement opportunities to match or improve an existing rating,” said Mr Griffin. Obtaining and improving NABERS IE ratings can also assist with asset disposal, as having systems in place to reduce operational costs can be reflected in the increased value of the asset.

CFSGAM has embedded NABERS IE into its asset management strategy. It is in the process of benchmarking each of its properties, and the tool is being built into each asset’s Operational Performance Strategy.

CFSGAM envisages that NABERS IE could transform the property market to an extent that surpasses even the widespread introduction of NABERS Energy (formerly ABGR).

The benchmarking process involves a review of fit-out guidelines and green lease models across the entire portfolio. Again, NABERS IE will be embedded into these guidelines as the key measurement tool and benchmark to drive improvements.

“By highlighting how a building impacts its tenants, and the way in which tenants impact that building’s operation, NABERS IE can put sustainability and performance improvement on the agenda of a building’s owner, manager, tenant and occupant,” said Mr Griffin.

Together with QED Environmental Services, CFSGAM uses NABERS IE to monitor and improve existing air quality systems with a view to driving better performance across the portfolio. The group will continue to roll out NABERS IE ratings for its assets, with the aim of achieving ratings for the entire portfolio within the next three years, dependent on market variables and tenant demand.

Key to the development of an effective NABERS IE tool was the close collaboration DECCW undertook with the end users of the tools. Throughout the engagement process suggestions were welcomed and potential problems ironed out to ensure the usefulness of the NABERS IE tool.

NABERS IE is also being integrated into CFSGAM’s investment property management schedule. Recognising the importance tenants place on sustainable office accommodation, and that NABERS IE enables tenants to understand the quality of the office indoor environment for the first time, CFSGAM is using NABERS IE when analysing the lease expiry profile for each asset. This will ensure all assets are in optimum condition when available for lease. CFSGAM is also in the process of engaging a consultant to develop Indoor Environment Improvement Plans based on the data from the NABERS IE rating. “Obtaining the rating allows CFSGAM to easily identify areas that could be improved, helping to drive long term environmental improvements. “We recognise that indoor environment quality is an important element in a building’s overall environmental performance and key to the wellbeing

60

of its occupants, but it’s also crucial in terms of an asset’s ability to attract and retain tenants. NABERS IE enables CFSGAM to continue to offer leading sustainable office space to the market.

Conclusion A building’s indoor environment performance is an increasingly important consideration for many different reasons, including occupant health and wellbeing, attraction and retention of tenants, lease negotiation, asset value and operational costs. NABERS IE is an effective tool to measure and benchmark indoor environment factors. From large institutions with expansive portfolios to individual building owners, NABERS IE enables properties to be effectively compared with others in the marketplace, providing the benchmark to drive improvements in environmental performance. Complementing the Energy and Water tools for office buildings, NABERS IE represents an important expansion in scope of operational measurement tools in the industry’s drive to improve sustainability and unlock financial savings in the process.


APRS subscriptions: Subscribe now – free digital eBooks Subscribe Now – Free Digital eBooks Australian GovLink magazine is a bi-annual publication produced in A4 full colour high gloss. It contains over 120 pages of cutting edge editorial that highlights a wide range of government and private sector activities, initiatives, standards and projects. Australian GovLink is also produced as a digital eBook that can easily be passed on via email, newsletter, blog, or web link. To view the eBook please visit: www.aprs.com.au/govlink-ebook. ___________________________________________________________________ ISSUE 1 2011 A u s t r a l i a ’s c o n n e c t i o n b e t w e e n p u b l i c a n d p r i v a t e s e c t o r s

While you are on our website, why not also visit the “Voice for the Water Industry” news portal to find the latest Australian water management news:

www.aprs.com.au/water-news The Australian Water Management Review is an independent voice for the Australian water industry and a well-established member of the APRS resource publications. With regular editorial contributions from leading water industry associations, the Australian Water Management Review is an indispensible tool for any company looking to reach the industry’s key Australian Water Management Review 2011

decision makers or for individuals to keep abreast of the latest trends and projects within the Australian water industry. If you would like to subscribe to the free digital eBook of the Australian Water Management Review, please visit our website and click the Australian Water Management Review

2011

Subscribe Now button:

www.aprs.com.au/water-ebookok

Announcing new environment magazine The environment sector in Australia is growing at an unprecedented rate. Uniquely placed to take advantage of renewable energy, Australia is poised for billions of dollars in investment and the creation of tens of thousands of new green jobs. Australian Publishing Resource Service (APRS) is therefore pleased to announce The Australian Environmental Review 2011. To find out more information about this new magazine, please visit:

www.aprs.com.au/enviro-media-kit


Environmentally friendly buildings

to sustainability

As a statutory authority established to improve operational efficiencies in the use of government office accommodation, the State Property Authority (SPA) takes an integrated approach to planning, strategy and property management. The SPA supports government agencies in property management in order to improve economic, social and environmental outcomes for the people of NSW. The SPA’s commitment to achieving sustainability at every level of the organisation is reflected in the objectives of the State Property Authority Act 2006. The SPA’s use of the NABERS tools reflects this commitment to making government property more sustainable and improving environmental outcomes throughout building engineering and design processes. David Franco, the SPA’s Senior Engineering Services Manager, said that “NABERS provides a clear, practical tool for identifying where improvements are required across our portfolio of buildings.” Hence NABERS provides the SPA with resources that are invaluable in their quest toward sustainability. The organisation is embracing the knowledge NABERS provides throughout its portfolio in new and existing assets. The SPA operates a diverse portfolio of properties spanning a variety of building types.

David Henry, Building Manager for the Dubbo Government Office Building, with recently installed solar hot water unit.

Because the portfolio incorporates such divergent forms as heritage buildings, new developments, large CBD office towers and regional offices it can be difficult to compare the portfolio’s sustainability. The NABERS suite of tools is beneficial as it provides guidelines for best practice and comparative information to ensure sustainable outcomes are achieved. “NABERS allows diverse building types, operating in differing climatic zones, to be compared with each other,” said Mr Franco. “By taking these variations into account, it is possible to assess the sustainability of developments and monitor how we can develop buildings to meet NABERS guidelines.” “NABERS tools provide a simple language to communicate and compare the performance of the SPA’s buildings to external sources.”

David Henry, Building Manager for the Dubbo Government Office Building, with recently installed solar hot water unit.

62


Penrith Government Office Building, designed to achieve 4.5 stars, due for completion 2008

Two significant projects designed to achieve a 4.5 star NABERS rating when they are completed in 2008 are the Queanbeyan and Penrith Government Office buildings. Commitment Agreements for these buildings helped the design team to focus on the environmental outcomes to be measured by NABERS. “By operationally rating our properties we can identify where improvements are required throughout our portfolio,” said Mr Franco. Mr Franco said that the SPA had been using NABERS Energy, or ABGR as it was previously known, since 2003 as a system for rating its office buildings. “We have also recently adopted NABERS Water,” said Mr Franco. “By the end of the year all our properties will be NABERS Waterrated. Currently, we have two five star NABERS Water buildings in our portfolio.

David Franco

“NABERS tools provide a simple language to communicate and compare the performance of the SPA’s buildings to external sources.”

“NABERS Energy has provided guidance on where lighting upgrades and/or air conditioning efficiency improvements can be made. It helps us to prioritise capital investment decisions and identify the most effective environmental and financial strategies.” “NABERS tools provide a simple language to communicate and compare the performance of the SPA’s buildings to external sources.” The SPA’s implementation of NABERS provisions will enable its continuing position as a leader in sustainable buildings.

As well as acting as a tool for the development of efficient buildings, NABERS also provides the SPA with selection criteria when choosing office buildings to occupy. When it comes to developing new buildings, NABERS provides the SPA with clear performance targets. The increasing recognition of the importance of sustainability in building products means that sustainable features have come to be seen as a performance requirement in contracts. Accordingly,

Department of Environment and Climate Change

NABERS provisions are now fixtures in the SPA’s tender briefs.

Phone: 1300 361 967

As well as embedding NABERS performance targets in all projects, the Authority is encouraging landlords to include Green Lease Schedules into future leases wherever possible.

59-61 Goulburn Street Sydney PO Box A290 Sydney South NSW 1232 Email: nabers@environment.nsw.gov.au Web: www.nabers.com.au

63


Daikin supports retrofitting for energy efficiency About Daikin Daikin, renowned for quality and technological innovation, is a world leader in air conditioning solutions. Combining R&D in the fields of mechanics and electronics for 80 years, Daikin products are practical, efficient, quiet and economical. Daikin, a market leader in both Australia and New Zealand, continues to enjoy significant growth and expansion. Daikin, a world leader in innovative air-conditioning solutions, has thrown its weight behind Victoria’s exciting 1200 Buildings Initiative, starting with an associate sponsorship deal that reflects the company’s commitment to energy efficiency and showcases Daikin’s energy efficient heating and cooling systems. Daikin was one of the key sponsors for the event, “Retrofitting for Energy Efficiency,” held in Melbourne on October 27 and 28, 2010. More than a hundred delegates attended this high profile seminar, Including high-end developers, energy sustainability consultants, engineers and architects. The seminar supported the Victorian government’s initiative (1200 Buildings) to improve energy efficiency in commercial buildings. The program is expected to generate significant economic activity over 10 years and is committed to reducing their carbon foot print by almost 38%.* John Fraser-Mifsud, Commercial Channel Manager at Daikin, was excited to promote excellent sustainable HVAC solutions at the seminar. “Key initiatives undertaken like minimum NABERS targets and mandatory disclosure for buildings greater than 2000msq project a strong signal to the market that government is very serious about lifting the performance capability of Melbourne’s current building stock. This initiative allows building professionals and manufacturers to work closer together than ever before ensuring the best equipment is fitted to meet this very proactive initiative,” he said. Retrofitting existing buildings with new efficient lighting systems, better air-conditioning strategies and improvements to other building services offers investors a competitive edge, said Mr Fraser- Mifsud. “It’s corporate leadership… it attracts high premiums and better tenants.” Whereas the new-buildings market has slowed since the global financial crisis, the market for retrofitted/refurbished buildings – especially energy efficient ones – is growing. “With air-conditioning and other mechanical services consuming a large amount of energy in commercial buildings, architects, designers and end users alike are seeking energy efficient solutions from reputable air conditioning manufacturers.” Daikin’s comprehensive range of domestic and commercial air conditioners provides superior comfort and efficiency to any sized building or space. From a small apartment to a multi-storey building, Daikin has the air conditioning solution. “We were delighted to share our experiences at the seminar and, we will continue to efficiently expand our commercial business with products required to meet demand striving to continuously improve the built environment” - Fraser-Mifsud. Among the products Daikin discussed at the Melbourne seminar is its patented Variable Refrigerant Volume (VRV) system, which boasts

64

significant energy efficiency and heat recovery solutions. Fraser-Mifsud also reiterated the significance of their applied business unit that is intrinsically connected to the retrofit market. With a range of chiller machinery capable of exhibiting high-energy efficiency ratios, they will play a major role in retrofitting projects over the next few years. All Daikin products come with an extensive range of controls to monitor and manage building performance from simple execution for temperature control to complex high-level interface and energy management strategies. Daikin’s Head Office in Chipping Norton Sydney, combines some of their best technology and control systems to achieve and maintain Daikin’s 5star NABERS rating using air-cooled equipment. “We were delighted to share our experiences… and we will continue to efficiently expand our commercial business with products required to meet demand striving to continuously improve the built environment” said Fraser-Mifsud. *Melbourne City Council, Zero Net Emissions by 2020 Strategy Document, 2008. For more information, call Daikin on (02) 9725 8888 or visit www.daikin.com.au


Down to the last drop high speed and energy efficient In thousands of bathrooms all over the world this very scenario is happening: after washing their hands a person will spend close to 3040 seconds trying to get them dry by running under an outdated, slow and inefficient hand dryer, only to most likely wipe the excess water off on their pants anyway. Or they may not attempt the hand dryer at all and use as much paper towel as possible (because after all they didn’t buy it) only to add to the mountain overflowing in the rubbish bin. Or, as is the case more times than we’d like to believe, the hand dryer is sporting an “Out of Order” sign, there aren’t any paper towels to speak of, and a person walks out of a public bathroom with their hands covered in nasty bacteria without even knowing it. There has been a long running war between paper towels and traditional hand dryers with neither being a real winner. In one corner we have the paper towel; expensive, environmentally unfriendly (waste of natural resources e.g. paper, which cannot be recycled, chemicals used in production) and time/labour intensive with the constant refilling on dispensers and time spent disposing of rubbish. In the other corner we have traditional hand dryers; far too slow to dry hands due to small motor design with the ability to only remove a small amount of water from the hands, no air filters so dirt and bacteria sucked in by the dryer blows straight back onto your hands and into the surrounding environment, and they lack a water catchment for the moisture blown off your hands, thereby causing the excess water to become a health and safety issue.

The ‘high-speed hand dryers’ maintain a high level of energy efficiency, reducing CO2 emissions and the need for disposal of waste products. The environmental credentials are high as the use of paper towels is eliminated and the power consumption is a fraction to that of alternative traditional hand dryers. Hygiene is also high on the priority list as due to the design and construction of a high-speed hand dryer, all excess water is captured in a drain tank as the moisture blows down the hands from single or dual airflows. Some models also have a heating function for cooler environments which can be switched off if not required or during warmer periods. Most high-speed hand dryers are wall-mounted and open on both sides, allowing easy access without contact with the unit, and also ensuring a natural bodily posture whilst drying. Slow insertion and removal of the hands ensures moisture and bacteria are removed from the hands in as little as 10 seconds. The units are also energy efficient in that they will switch off as soon as the sensors inside the units detect that the hands have been removed. High-speed hand dryers have been in the market for a number of years, however with recent developments their popularity has gained a lot of momentum. It cannot be denied that their energy efficiency, hygiene and convenience outranks their traditional competitors and is more than welcome news for the billions of bathroom users around the world.

In 1993 a high technology company developed an efficient and innovative styled high speed hand dryer. Now in the 21st Century many other companies have followed suit. In comparison to older, traditional models these high speed version literally blow their outdated competitors out of the water. They boast a drying time of as little as 10 seconds, 90% plus savings compared to the use of paper towels, a touch free operation which greatly reduces the chance of user contamination and a low noise level (some brands boast models that operate with a volume of as little as 52dB).

65


Jet Towel by Mitsubishi Electric Energy efficient hand drying has never been easier! The highest standards of energy efficiency and hygiene have always been a defining characteristic of Mitsubishi Electric, and this clearly has extended to the Jet Towel high-speed hand dryer. Millions of hands around the globe have benefited from Mitsubishi Electric’s Jet Towel Hand Dryer technology since 1993. Now, seven generations later, the latest sleek designs, with warm and cool air options incorporate a reliable, low power motor to meet today’s demands for the lowest energy consumption. Washrooms clients worldwide enjoy the quiet operation, innovative design and cleanliness of the Jet Towel environment. The Jet Towel high-speed hand dryer from Mitsubishi Electric truly brings hand drying into the 21st Century. Gone are the days of clunky, inconvenient and outdated hand dryers or washroom rubbish bins overflowing with filthy paper towels, the Mitsubishi Electric Jet Towel has been providing excellent high-speed hand drying service in business offices, convention centres, shopping centres, industrial factories, food plants, amusement parks and airports worldwide. Wherever it is used, Mitsubishi Electric’s Jet Towel has a positive impact. The energy efficient operation and sustainable build benefits the global environment, greatly reducing CO2 emissions and waste products. Its environmental credentials are also high because Jet Towel avoids the use of paper towels and its power consumption is a fraction to that of alternative dryers. At sound levels of only 59dB and a mere 52dB when operating within the minimum speed level, Mitsubishi Electric’s Jet Towel is also one of the quietest hand dryers available. The Jet Towel high-speed hand dryer is designed for “zero contact” operation which, along with air flow control and the construction of the hand dryer, ensures that water is fully captured in the drain tank making it one of the world’s most hygienic hand dryers. Moisture is blown downwards on both sides of hands to the drain, and when the dried hands are retracted after mere seconds the airflow stops. This completely non-contact operation saves energy as the airflow does not continue after the user has departed and avoids any bacterial transfer. Optional instant warm heaters for immediate 35 °C airflow offer extra comfort in cooler environments such as warehouses or cool rooms, and have the option to be switched off during warmer periods. The Jet Towel high-speed hand dryer has a superbly reliable start-up and stop function, incorporating in its design upper and lower sensors. When the hands are fully inside, lower sensor detection starts the airflow. Withdrawing the hands automatically halts operation, in a touchfree design that is superbly hygienic. Rather than trying to evaporate the moisture on hands after washing, the Jet Towel high-speed hand dryer blasts water from hands with two high speed wafer thin airflows that atomises the water and collects it, drying the hands in only 10 seconds. This compares to the 20-30 seconds of a conventional dryer, and is far more energy efficient and hygienic too. The open side design enables hands to slip easily into the unit. The dryer is open on both sides, enabling easy access from the side without touching the unit. With hands in, slowly lifting them up and down 2-3 times maximises drying performance and prevents water droplets from blowing back up. The Jet Towel high-speed hand dryer is also very simple to use in a natural bodily posture. The front hand insertion angle

66

is a convenient 15 degrees, allowing the hands to be eased into the unit in a natural posture. At the heart of Jet Towel are its advanced brushless motor and Mitsubishi Electric high technology that are designed to provide a long life of dependable service. Power consumption of the unit is 650watts (with heater in off-mode), a fraction of that of a traditional dryer and barely half that of similar systems. Significantly the Jet Towel high-speed hand dryer is ultra quiet, enhancing the image of sophisticated elegance for the modern day bathroom. For more information please visit www.MitsubishiElectric.com.au.


» » » » » »

Reliable Technology

Now into its seventh generation of models, the latest Jet Towel combines sleek design with a reliable, low power motor to provide a highly efficient, cost effective hand-drying solution for the 21st century.

Energy Efficient

Jet Towel’s advanced design coupled with its low power consumption motor brings a short drying time, resulting in the lowest energy costs available.

Quiet Operation

The Jet Towel Hand Dryer has been designed to provide an exceptionally low noise level. The maximum noise level of the unit is limited to 59dB, and a mere 52dB when operating within the minimum speed level.

Improves Hygiene

Jet Towel offers a very hygienic solution for washroom facilities, with its non-contact drying and anti-microbial drain tank system.

Super Fast Drying

Water is simply blasted away with Jet Towel’s high speed airflow rather than evaporating, enabling hands to be dried in less than 10 seconds.

Reduction of Paper Waste

The requirement of paper towels within a washroom is eliminated.

www.MistubishiElectric.com.au


Environmentally friendly buildings

N A B E R S

The built environment is responsible for approximately 20 per cent of our carbon emissions. In Australia around 70 per cent of Government agencies operate from office buildings with the Commonwealth alone occupying 10 per cent of the nation’s commercial office market. Governments are therefore in a uniquely strong position to set an example when it comes to improving the environmental performance of the built form. Through the use of innovative tools and considered legislation, Governments in Australia are stepping up to the challenge. Most Commonwealth, State and Territory Governments have policies and targets for improved efficiency in the buildings they occupy, measured using the National Australian Built Environment Rating System (NABERS). NABERS – measuring the way forward NABERS is an initiative of all Australian state and territory governments, managed by the Department of Environment, Climate Change and Water NSW (DECCW). The tools measure the operational performance of buildings in comparison to the wider market using a simple rating system of 1 to 5 stars. NABERS encourages innovation and best practice to improve the energy, water, waste and indoor environment performance buildings and helps to identify where savings and improvements can be made. In the 10 years since NABERS was introduced, it has become a world leader in assessing the environmental performance of buildings, helping to place Australia’s building owners and tenants at the forefront of building energy efficiency. Why rate a Government building? For commercial or government building owners and tenants alike, being environmentally efficient can help their bottom line. A building that uses less water and power, costs less to run. A NABERS rating can also educate and assist owners in benchmarking improvements to the indoor environment of their buildings to generate higher productivity and enhanced wellbeing among employees. Additionally, a building that creates less waste sets a positive example for a business and its employees, as well as cutting pollution levels. While driving improved performance standards in the commercial sector through Commercial Building Disclosure (CBD), the Commonwealth Government is also using its influential position in the market as a major national tenant by setting a minimum 4.5 star NABERS Energy rating for buildings it occupies It also ensures that all its tenanted buildings include a Green Lease Schedule (GLS) in new or negotiated leases. The NSW Government also seeks 4.5 stars for both NABERS Energy and Water in its premises. A/Manager Built Environment – DECCW, Yma ten Hoedt, said that a NABERS rating tells you how efficiently your building is operating compared to other building in the market place.

68


“As a result building owners use a NABERS rating as a benchmark for measuring improvement and communicating their achievements,” she said.

on to tenants and a comprehensive waste minimisation and recycling system can generate significant savings. NABERS Waste is crucial to inform the development of a waste management system.

A 2009 study looking at low energy high-rise buildings by Sydney University‟s Warren Centre found a direct correlation between simply obtaining a NABERS rating and a significant reduction in operational expenditure. The study also found that most buildings have the capacity to easily make energy savings equivalent to half a star rating – or about a 10 per cent reduction in energy use - simply by streamlining and fine-tuning the existing systems in the building. Highlighted too, were the innovative strategies being used to extract capital for environmental improvements from reduced maintenance or operating expenses, rather than from capital budgets. The study found that in some cases a return on investment could be achieved within 12 months.

The NABERS rating tools – what are they and how do they work?

“In an environment where capital for new build projects is still scarce, the focus for Australia‟s property owners is on improving environmental performance of existing stock and looking for cost effective refurbishment options,” Ms ten Hoedt said. “Reducing operational costs are crucial to the Government building sector and the NABERS tools are essential to meeting this objective,” she said. Government strives to set an example to employees as well as the community. Occupying a building with a high NABERS Indoor Environment rating and using the workplace as a practical demonstration of Government‟s commitment to improving environmental performance. “Research indicates a strong link between a good indoor environment and improved productivity and reduced absenteeism, potentially leading to substantial financial benefits.” Savings potential The process of getting a rating, as well as the rating itself, highlights areas where financial savings can be made. The NABERS Energy rating process identifies opportunities to re-evaluate fit-out lighting that accounts for more than 60 per cent of the average tenant’s energy costs and represents the greatest opportunity for energy savings. Tenancies that make good use of natural light and efficient lighting design can also reduce energy bills. These measures will also reduce the heat load on the base building air-conditioning, resulting in further indirect cost savings. Approximately a quarter of water consumed by Australia’s commercial buildings is due to leaks and wastage. Water-based air conditioning systems can account for around a third of the building’s total water consumption. A NABERS Water rating can unlock significant opportunities to reduce water consumption and lower operational costs. A NABERS Waste rating identifies waste as a valuable resource and a cost-saving opportunity. Waste management costs are often passed

NABERS ratings tools can generally be applied to Base Building, Whole of building or Tenancy scenarios. Energy NABERS Energy assists owners and tenants to reduce energy use, energy costs and greenhouse emissions. Implementing energy efficiency practices can save 20 per cent to 40 per cent on their energy bills of many buildings. More than 51 per cent of the national office market has been rated with NABERS Energy (as at June 2010), so there is still significant scope for improvement. A Base building rating is based on the energy intensity and greenhouse gas emissions of the building, excluding all energy use from tenants. It assesses greenhouse gas emissions associated with energy consumed in supplying building central services to lettable office areas and common spaces, including: • Common-area lighting and power; • Lifts and escalators; • Air conditioning and ventilation, including: − Base building services to meet normal requirements − Centralised supplementary services for tenants − Supplementary services to ensure premises are safe, lit and comfortable for office work, where there is no special tenant requirement. • Exterior lighting; • Exterior signage provided by the building owner for the benefit of office tenants; • Generator fuel where it serves central services; and • Car park ventilation and lighting, where internal or external car parks within the legal boundaries of the site are provided for tenant use. A Tenancy rating is based on the amount of energy used per square metre of the tenancy associated with: • Lighting; • Power to equipment (computer servers, tenant-installed signage etc): • Tenant-controlled supplementary air conditioning; and • Generator fuel for tenant usage.

69


Environmentally friendly buildings

Whole of building: When tenant’s and landlord’s energy use cannot be separated, a whole of building rating is based on the intensity of the energy used and greenhouse gas emissions of the base building and tenancies. This includes all energy supplied to the building for the operation of the building and the occupants of the office space. Water NABERS Water is used by property owners and managers to track the impact of water upgrades for public environmental reporting and as a KPI in many building management contracts. As at June 2010, 35 per cent of the national office market had been rated with NABERS Water and the take-up of this tool continues to grow.

study shows that over 50 per cent of occupants in office cubicles think that noise levels interfere with their ability to get their job done. Make friends with NABERS Australian Governments have led the way internationally in the development of the NABERS tools, reducing the impact of the built environment and taking proactive measures to improve the performance of the sector. Ensuring Government buildings and tenancies are rated with NABERS tools is a critical component of improving efficiency, lowering costs and reduding emissions. If you haven’t already made friends with NABERS, what are you waiting for?

The NABERS Water rating: • Calculates the amount of water used by the building; • Adjusts raw data to take account of hours of use and climate; and • Divides the water use figure by the rated area, to give the water use per unit of rated space (kL per m2). NABERS Water can only be used to rate the Base or Whole Building, as most water consumption in a building is influenced by the building owner. Waste A NABERS Waste rating provides market recognition and a competitive advantage for buildings with low waste generation and high recycling rates. It encourages the minimisation of waste to landfill and allows building owners, managers or tenants to promote the waste and recycling performance of their building. A NABERS Waste rating measures the amount of „materials generated‟ (garbage, recyclables, re-use, etc) by a building and how much of that is diverted from landfill/disposal. Indoor Environment A NABERS Indoor Environment rating assesses the relationship between a building’s indoor environment quality and the health, comfort and wellbeing of its occupants by analysing: • Thermal comfort – temperature, relative humidity and air speed. Thermal comfort is directly linked to people’s productivity and is important for their comfort and wellbeing. There are well-accepted comfort ranges for temperature, air speed and relative humidity. • Air quality – ventilation effectiveness and indoor pollutants. Indoor air quality is a major concern to building managers, tenants, and employees because it can impact the health, comfort, wellbeing and productivity of building occupants. Research shows a strong relationship between good indoor air quality and people’s performance at work. • Acoustic comfort – ambient sound levels. Acoustic conditions directly affect occupant satisfaction and productivity. One research

70

For more information on NABERS, or to find an accredited assessor, visit www.nabers.com.au For further information: Jocasta Bronwasser Wise McBaron Communication (02) 9279 4770 OR Yma ten Hoedt A/Manager Built Environment DECCW 02 9995 5457


Environmentally friendly buildings

Giving commercial properties a green boost Responsibly investing in commercial properties can prove challenging in a world of cost-cutting while chasing asset growth. But Local Government Super has paved the way as pioneers in the field of environmentally responsible property upgrades.

“These improvements benefit the environment and also add value to the buildings, and this also helps improve our returns over the longer term.

There’s no doubt that creating a substantially sustainable community and environment is becoming increasingly more pressing than ever before. But it is not just creating sustainable products and resources that help the cause – Local Government Super (LGS) have found groundbreaking ways to breathe new, sustainable life into old buildings and increase the value of their asset pool at the same time.

The flagship project of LGS’ re-fitting program is 76 Berry Street, in the heart of North Sydney.

LGS boarded the sustainable express train well before it was a popular ride. As the managers and controllers of the unlisted Local Government Property Fund, which has 11 assets in the portfolio throughout NSW including six office buildings, four retail centres and one industrial estate, LGS is particularly focused on all factors of the sustainability and growth of their properties. LGS currently invest $524 million in its property portfolio. The portfolio makes up part of their wider $3.1 billion responsible investment strategy, including Australian and international shares, and the absolute return and private equity asset classes. A decade ago, the LGS board decided to go as responsibly green as possible with investments across all asset and equity funds. In 2007, that decision advanced further for the direct property investment fund when 100 per cent of the property portfolio moved to green power for base building energy. In the same year, LGS joined seven other major institutions and Monash University to establish an organisation that provides engagement and research services for institutional investors, called Regnan. Regnan enables investors to assess an organisation’s performance in environmental, social, and governance matters. For the more than 100,000 members of LGS, the knowledge that their almost $6 billion in superannuation savings are being thoroughly and thoughtfully invested, should bring peace of mind. Within the scope of the modern challenge was the ‘greening’ of six large office buildings in Sydney’s CBD, Macquarie Park, and North Sydney. The major plant and equipment of the buildings were close to the end of their life cycle and although their upgrade was imminent, the choice to make it a leading green upgrade meant LGS was reaching goals yet to be established by much of the property development industry. Bill Hartnett, LGS’s sustainability manager, said the projects were a nobrainer. “It’s a win-win situation,” he said.

“Sustainable and responsible investing is all about aiming to achieve strong, long-term returns for our members, while actively managing the impact of environmental, social, and governance risks.”

The typically 1980s external aesthetics of the building will not change, however, the beauty of the completed project will lay in reaching LGS’ goal of reducing greenhouse gas emissions from the building by up to 80 per cent and the sustainability to a level which is aimed to deliver the lowest emission NABERS Energy rated commercial office tower in Australia. This will bump the building up to a level less than half the emissions of the highest available rating, a five-star National Australian Built Environment Rating System (NABERS) rating, a rating that is increasingly becoming a fashionable term for those in the sustainability construction and upgrade industry and is now required under federal legislation to be publically disclosed. LGS property portfolio manager Brian Churchill said the opportunity is to take the asset to the next level and make it iconic, as far as existing buildings are concerned. LGS refurbished the building in 2005 and took it from a ‘B’ to an ‘A’ grade asset, but the winning ingredient in the next upgrade will be to the building’s plant. Churchill said North Sydney Council are ‘really excited’ about the project. “They’re looking for the office stock in North Sydney CBD to be upgraded,” he said. “We want to adopt a leadership role – it’s all about delivery of results rather than the cheapest price.” But it’s not just local government who are supporting LGS’ projects. The Federal Government’s Green Building Fund has made a significant dent in the cost of the project. Established in 2008, a program administered by AusIndustry, the Fund’s aim is to reduce the impact of Australia’s built environment on greenhouse gas emissions by reducing the energy consumed in the operation of commercial office buildings. Stream ‘A’ of the grant, was exactly what LGS super was looking for. A limited number of the grants were provided on a competitive basis to applicants who could demonstrate a significant level of greenhouse gas reductions through an upgrade project in an existing commercial office building. Fortunately for LGS the works across the office portfolio fitted the bill perfectly and was awarded over $5million including a $2.2 million grant

71


Environmentally friendly buildings

for 76 Berry Street as an exemplar project. Only one of two exemplar projects recognised by the program.

Churchill explained the choice. “We’re simply using advanced but proven technologies in these components – it’s just an engine,” he said.

Receiving the grant meant LGS could be more ambitious with greening targets for its property portfolio.

The engine-powered tri-generation system is powered by natural gas and provides non-polluting emissions while significantly reducing carbon dioxide and nitrogen oxides among other emissions.

Capital expenditure from future years was brought forward, which effectively accelerated the sustainability projects. Churchill said without the fund the project would have been divided into smaller chunks of two buildings at a time. LGS CEO Peter Lambert said receiving the exemplar grant was a terrific achievement. “It’s a 24-year-old building that will become the most efficient commercial building in the country, using leading Australian technologies,” he said. The upgrades will also provide a cleaner, more comfortable environment for our tenants, which in turn allows LGS to maximise the returns of our investments.” The director of Walker EcoStrategies, Roger Walker, who provided strategic direction for the LGS portfolio re-fitting, said the grant reduced the average cost of the project across the whole portfolio (excluding 76 Berry Street) to $61.00 per square metre, which was is significantly under industry expectations. The benefit of the grant was also in allowing LGS to de-risk advanced technologies necessary for the re-fit projects. In terms of how the grant helped 76 Berry Street, Walker said the ‘exemplar’ grant allowed for the investment in a tri-generation system which provides lower emissions and has an Australian designed advanced fuel management system which eliminates other harmful exhaust fumes including particulate matter and nitrogen oxides. LGS was one of only two applicants to be awarded an exemplar grant, recognising its sustainable portfolio program as a leader in the industry. It was described by the Grant committee as ‘world-class’. The upgrade is costing LGS $550 per square metre, of which one-third is being funded by the Green Building Fund. Churchill said LGS could have upgraded to beat five NABERS stars; however, “we wanted to do something iconic in the marketplace.” “We wanted to do something strategic, this building was the right candidate,” he said. Technologies like hydrogen fuel cells were examined as power options for the building, and the building plant spaces allowed for the installation of a tri-generation plant. Bennett Clayton engines, commonly used in farming and industrial operations, were selected in what was a first for a commercial building.

72

When complete, 76 Berry Street will have five 100 kilowatt engines operating which allows single engine operation when the building is at low load capacity. It will also feature absorption chillers that use the heat from the tri-generation system to produce chilled water for the building’s airconditioning system. Meanwhile, thermal storage tanks will allow hot water to be stored to be used at a later date; and EI light fittings made from recycled steel that give a 60-75 per cent reduction in lighting energy consumption, which also reduce the building’s heat load, will be used. Finally the upgrade is being designed to allow for the future extension to a quad generation system which would look to capture the engine exhaust emissions and reuse to capture the remaining co2. Another significant project, a commercial building at Macquarie Park in Sydney, displayed environmental leadership in renewable energy generation. One thousand square metres of solar photovoltaic panels were installed on the building midway through 2010, generating 10 per cent of the required base building energy. The solar panels have significantly reduced the grid energy required by the building and have both reduced emissions and provided a leading demonstration of renewable energy in office buildings. Lambert said that although ‘greening’ buildings wasn’t a particularly new concept, ‘greening’ commercial buildings was. “Property owners in the commercial sector have long been aware of the need to move towards sustainable strategies but to date, this has primarily been focused on new buildings,” he said. “Existing buildings are considered too expensive to upgrade, or are just put into the too-hard basket and ignored.” He said the Macquarie Park project, along with the 76 Berry Street project, have demonstrated there are cost effective ways to upgrade existing buildings by using Australian technologies as well as a solid tenancy engagement strategy. “This solar panel project provides, along with strong energy efficiency results, a visible demonstration to the property industry that energy reduction is a reasonable and reachable target for all businesses in Australia.”


Obviously, LGS hasn’t rushed into the decisions, though. The Australian market has been given clear evidence of how important green investment is through the Property Council of Australia’s Green Property Investment Index. The Index tracks investment performance of commercial buildings, like 76 Berry Street, that have been awarded an environmental performance rating from NABERS. The MD of the Index, Anthony De Francesco, said the results demonstrate a clear win for green investment. “Rated office buildings have a lower capitalisation rate than non-rated buildings, in the order of 40 basis points,” he said. The Index reports that assets with a NABERS rating of four or more stars deliver significantly higher returns than those with ratings of three point five stars or less.

Peter Lambert

Besides pleasingly profitable returns, a pat on the back doesn’t go astray for LGS, either. LGS’ investment in about $3.1 billion worth of responsible investment strategies has more than paid off. In December 2010 LGS was awarded the Sustainable Super Fund of the Year by the Australian Sustainability Awards. The win came at a time when the fund had also learnt the Responsible Investment Association of Australian, RIAA, had hailed them as the super fund with the highest amount of responsible investment assets for the sixth year in a row. It March 2011 LGS was named the Infinity Award winner for 2011 by independent super research company SuperRatings. An award which recognises the super fund that is leading the industry in the pursuit of genuine responsible investment principles and open communication of these processes to its members.

Bill Hartnet

Once again, Lambert was proud of LGS’ decisions. “Receiving further recognition for our philosophy is very encouraging, and it’s assuring for our members to know that we are leading the pack.”

Brian Churchill

73


Green building upgrades in occupied buildings: yes you can! Amidst all of the technical jargon and star ratings its easy to forget the most important aspect of a building retro-fit project; the people and businesses inside the building. Buildcorp has taken on this challenge in the $40m+ central plant and lobby upgrade of NAB House and succeeded. NAB House is co-owned by AMP Capital Investors and Brookfield Property Funds Management. In September 2008 Buildcorp was appointed as the preferred builder for the refurbishment of 14 of the 29 levels of the building plus an extensive ground floor lobby upgrade, basement amenities and base building services upgrade to achieve a 4.5 Star ABGR (now known as NABERS) rating and a 5 star Green Star design rating. The building consists of 40,200m2 of NLA over 29 commercial floors, with a GFA of 63,000m2. The NAB House upgrade project, which is currently in its final stages is valued at $40m+ and is one of the largest green building upgrades in the Sydney CBD. Targeting a 4.5 star NABERS rating, the building works included 19 floors of base building service upgrade, a major upgrade of the central plant and a full refurbishment of the building’s foyer. All of these works were undertaken whilst the building was occupied, requiring the Buildcorp team to stage the works safely around the building’s occupants and ensure critical building services were not affected during the works. Due to the occupied nature of the building during the works, a collaborative approach was taken with the client and building management to facilitate the planning of temporary works, out of hours works and staging so as not to disrupt the normal operations of the building. AMP Capital Wholesale Office Fund Manager Henry Elliott said AMP Capital is committed to evolving properties for a greener more sustainable future. “AMP Capital owns a number of superbly located and very high-quality office buildings where careful implementation of environmental upgrades ensures tenant needs are exceeded. So much can be done with existing buildings to make them sustainable,” Elliott said. “NAB House represents a new standard of sustainability for existing buildings in the Sydney CBD. The greener, sharper, smarter NAB House is a fully occupied and environmentally efficient A-Grade office tower that will remain relevant for our investors and our tenants for a generation.” The NAB House sustainable building upgrade includes: • New high-efficiency air conditioning chillers installed along with a new Building Control System and Digital Controlled Variable Air Volume control boxes, providing more responsive control, collectively generating significant energy savings. • One of the largest indoor vertical gardens in NSW, the Grow Wall is six metres, soil-less, has five different plant species and has a hydroponic watering system. • New T5 energy efficient lighting and controls installed providing savings for the tenant. • All blinds and window sills replaced with greener alternatives. • AAAA rated water savings initiatives installed in the bathrooms and in the new cyclist facilities, showers and locker rooms. • 150 new secure spaces for tenants’ bicycles.

74

• New car park lighting and controls and carbon monoxide monitoring sensing ventilation system. • Estimated energy savings of 22 per cent, being the equivalent of taking 534 cars off the road per annum. • Estimated water savings are in the order of 13 per cent, the equivalent of saving 112 household swimming pools of water per annum. Brookfield Chief Operating Officer Commercial Property Kurt Wilkinson said: “We have focussed on reducing the environmental impact of the building through sustainable measures that reduce energy, water consumption and waste.” Specialist areas of expertise The Buildcorp Group delivers high-quality construction solutions in New South Wales. Since 1990, the Group has grown to include four business units, each with its own area of specialisation, bringing great diversity. Buildcorp has niche expertise working in live environments, such as hospitals, schools, airports and retail centres, where business must continue ‘as usual’ during the construction process – clean, noise free and safe. Business units Buildcorp Contracting – large-scale construction solutions from $2 million, focussed on the industrial, commercial, health, education, community and retail sectors across NSW. Buildcorp Interiors – large-scale interior fit-out and refurbishment solutions from $1 million for the commercial, retail and hospitality sectors. Buildcorp Asset Solutions – specialist remedial building services and small-scale construction projects in NSW to $5 million in value. Euroline – high-quality architectural joinery, shop fit-out and small-scale interior fit-outs in NSW to $1.5 million in value. Across the Group, we focus on developing lateral solutions that sustain the changing needs of our partners, from project inception and planning through to on-time completion and hand-over. We pride ourselves on being a business of reputable character: committed to our values and dedicated to building, not only great projects, but long lasting relationships.

“Working in an occupied environment Buildcorp has mitigated substantial risk for AMP Capital Investors by developing a delivery strategy that considers both operational building requirements and staged implementation. Buildcorp has demonstrated excellent communication and flexibility from all their staff and management to deliver on time and budget whilst maintaining exceptional safety standards at all times” Tim Copper Property development manager - AMP capital investors


NAB HOUSE SYDNEY - 4.5 STAR NABERS UPGRADE IN AN OCCUPIED CITY BUILDING

the leader in green retrofit projects Above all of the technology and star ratings, our experience has taught us that the most important consideration on a building upgrade project is the planning that goes into minimising the impact on the building’s occupants. For over 20 years we have developed a reputation for thorough planning, technical expertise and quality construction project delivery. By applying our ISO/ AS certified management systems, we delivered the NAB House upgrade in Sydney’s CBD with buisiness continuing as usual all the while. Buildcorp. Building Australia’s best workplaces.

To learn how we can help make your retrofit as easy as possible call 02 9565 0000 or visit buildcorp.com.au


Bosch Hot Water Bosch sets a new benchmark in hot water and heating solutions Bosch is a market leader in providing high quality, high efficiency hot water products for Australian and New Zealand homes. The Bosch Hot Water range consists of reliable, and energy efficient domestic, commercial, and solar products to suit a variety of households. For generations, Bosch has been dedicated to providing quality products that protect the environment and conserve resources. As a result, Bosch was first to introduce condensing technology to the hot water market with the award winning 6.9 STAR gas hot water systemthe Bosch 26eco+. Unlike traditional hot water systems, a condensing appliance captures heat from the exhaust gas and uses it to preheat the incoming cold water, making the 26eco+ one of the most energy efficient gas hot water systems on the market today.

The Bosch Hydronic Heating Boilers work by utilising this same condensing technology in recovering the waste heat from the exhaust gases, making the Hydronic Heating Boiler range 90% energy efficient. For heating a house or flat, either radiator panels or underfloor heating can be used to heat the air in a natural way which leads to an increased level of comfort in your home. The new Bosch Hydronic Heating Boiler range also includes a 37 kW model which combines heating and domestic hot water supply in the one appliance. 

To further strengthen their commitment to highly efficient and environmentally sustainable products, Bosch have recently introduced the Hydronic Heating Boiler range, the Condens 5000 W, to the market, to provide a reliable and asthma friendly home heating solution.

Go with the best, and trust Bosch for your hot water and heating needs.

Bosch 26eco+

For more information, visit www.bosch.com.au/hotwater or 1300 30 70 37.

Bosch Hydronic Heating Boiler range (Condens 5000 W)

Trust Bosch for highly efficient hot water and heating solutions. First Bosch introduced highly efficient condensing technology to the Australian hot water market, with the award winning 26eco+ gas hot water system. Now we introduce a highly efficient hydronic heating solution for your home which also utilises this class leading condensing technology. Bosch 26eco+ Gas Hot Water System. The Bosch 26eco+ gas hot water system is a high-efficiency, fullycondensing appliance. Unlike traditional hot water systems, a condensing unit captures heat from the exhaust gas and uses it to preheat the incoming cold water. It’s no wonder the Bosch 26eco+ is one of the highest rated water heaters on the market with a 6.9 STAR energy efficiency rating. Bosch Hydronic Heating Boiler range. The new Bosch Hydronic Heating Boiler range provides a reliable, comfortable, and allergy free heating solution for your home. The range utilises condensing technology in recovering the waste heat from the exhaust gas, making the range over 90% efficient, resulting in reduced energy consumption and cost savings for your household. For more information on either of these highly efficient products, please call 1300 30 70 37 or visit www.bosch.com.au/hotwater

76


Dricon delivers in data centre The critical role that data centres play in today’s business world demands that they be maintained at optimum temperatures to remove much of the risk associated with the IT equipment housed within, overheating and subsequently malfunctioning.

Muller Industries is pleased to have been involved in the successful development of Fujitsu Australia’s new, state-of-the-art data centre in Homebush Bay which showcases energy efficient design through the use of co-efficiency and the latest heat rejection technology. The interior conditions of the data centre have been designed to meet the international standard of TA492. This requires the Fujitsu Australia facility to maintain a temperature of 23°C, plus or minus 0.5°C while maintaining 50% humidity. This is achieved through the combination of Muller Industries’ Dricon technology and Powerpax chillers which offers significant levels of efficiency while removing the health risks and chemical treatment which would otherwise be present through the use of cooling towers. “These are air-cooled units, they’re not water-cooled, so we’re moving away from having to maintain water extraction units, cooling towers, halving the concern around legionnaires,” said Michael Gunton, General Manager of Data Centre Services for Fujitsu Australia when interviewed about the project in the January 2009 issue of CCN (Climate Control News). “We’re at a level now where you can get the same efficiencies in power without all the hassles of dealing with the diseases and treatments and everything that goes with it.” According to Manfred Jarchow, Product Solutions Manager at Muller Industries, this project highlights the advantages of Muller Industries’ technology. “It’s pleasing to see that the market is finally accepting these innovative and sustainable technologies that reduce CO2 emissions,” Jarchow said. “The Powerpax/Dricon package is becoming a market leader.”

WHY WOULD YOU?

BEFORE

Using a cooling tower like this is yesterday’s thinking. They consume over 5000 litres of drinking water per day. They carry the risk of the deadly Legionnaires’ disease.

LET MULLER FIND THE BEST SOLUTION FOR YOU

WHY WOULDN’T YOU?

AFTER

Choosing a 3C Cooler is a decision for now, and for the future. They consume up to 80% less water. They eliminate the risk of Legionnaires’ disease.

03 8761 6155 mullerindustries.com.au

COMPANY MEMBER

77


Environmentally friendly buildings

Research

to reduce the cost of

sustainable solar energy

There’s something new and exciting lighting up the world of science, and it will probably affect how you view, and use, solar technologies both now and increasingly, in the future. Once assumed to be the domain of ‘eco warriors’, it is fair to say that the majority of Australians intuitively believe there should be a bright future for solar energy despite the fact in many applications it is still a costly alternative to conventional forms of electricity. The establishment of the Australian Solar Institute (ASI) in 2009 has resulted in the Australian Government committing record funding to solar research and development (R&D), in a bid to improve technologies and reduce costs for consumers. The ASI is funded through the Australian Government’s $5 billion Clean Energy Initiative, which also includes the $1.5 billion Solar Flagships program and the Australian Centre for Renewable Energy. While the ASI is still only in its infancy, it has laid the foundations for exciting developments in solar technologies. Charged with driving R&D that will have a major impact on the efficiency and cost-effectiveness of solar technologies, the ASI has three strategic focus areas: R&D investment, skills development and knowledge building and dissemination. The ASI invests directly in R&D to accelerate innovation in, and the commercial deployment of, solar photovoltaic (PV) and concentrating solar thermal (CST) technologies that have the potential to significantly reduce the levelised cost of solar energy relative to existing sources of energy. To date, the ASI has committed more than $66 million to fund 27 solar R&D projects with a total leveraged value of around $209 million. The ASI’s investments have attracted co-funding from both private and public sector organisations, including research institutions, industry and state governments. ASI funding recipients to date include the University of New South Wales, BT Imaging Pty Ltd, Sapphicon Semiconductor Pty Ltd, CSIRO, the Australian National University, the University of Newcastle, the University of Queensland, CSG Solar, Graphite Energy, University of Melbourne and University of Sydney. Each of these organisations has focused its ASI-funded research project on a particular aspect of solar PV or CST technology. The ASI’s investment is money well spent when one considers that the solar PV and CST industry is one of the world’s fastest growing, with total annual revenues of tens of billions of Australian dollars. Average year on year growth has exceeded 50 per cent over the past decade and is forecast to continue to exceed 30 per cent in the decades ahead. Industry growth is driven by strong community and government support for solar energy globally which in turn is underpinned by the promise of low carbon electricity and new sources of employment. Market growth is leading to a steady fall in the unit cost of solar electricity through savings from increased deployment, increased manufacturing scale and

78

increased technological efficiency. Investment in R&D is an important driver of these improvements. The institutions and companies that invest in solar technologies are operating in an increasingly competitive, transparent and international environment. R&D activity needs to offer investors a path that maintains or gains a leadership position in a recognised area or delivers an alternative to challenge the business-as-usual path, often through lateral or revolutionary innovation. Key to ASI’s remit is supporting and enabling researchers, through skills development, to discover the technologies necessary for innovation. In 2010, the ASI announced the recipients of its first annual PhD and Post-Doctorate scholarships program, which provides funding to skilled post-graduate students to complete their solar R&D projects at Australian Institutions. This program is focused on retaining and attracting accomplished researchers to deliver results in solar R&D locally and benefit the Australian solar community. International collaboration is an important part of skills development in solar research, and the ASI has established communications with a number of similar entities in other countries. For example, the ASI holds a Memorandum of Understanding with the Fraunhofer Institute and the Deutches Zentrum für Luft- und Raumfahrt (DLR), both in Germany, to support skills development and information sharing between the two countries. In addition, in late 2010, the Australian Prime Minister Julia Gillard and United States (US) Secretary of State Hillary Clinton announced the US-Australia Solar Research Collaboration initiative to drive collaboration between Australian and US participants through research scholarships, laboratory exchanges, information exchange on R&D as well as funding for joint research projects. To complement its R&D investment and skills development focus areas, the ASI also builds knowledge and encourages networking amongst Australian CST and PV communities by facilitating workshops, championing Australia’s leaderships strengths in solar research, and disseminating the results and learnings from research for the benefit of the Australian and global solar communities. The ASI’s support for local and international R&D will drive the solar industry in Australia to achieve its potential by addressing the two main barriers to uptake today: the lifetime cost of solar electricity versus alternatives; and the consequences of an intermittent primary resource (solar radiation). Solutions to these challenges lie in the evolution of solar technologies and the market structures in which the technology operates, which in the short-term at least will largely be influenced by government policies and a global commitment to reduce carbon emissions. The ASI recognises the opportunities to invest in clean energy through investment in R&D projects and consequently is eager to attract further investment and collaboration from local and international organisations to ensure sustained support for innovation in solar energy in Australia.


Against this background, the ASI is pleased with the highly competitive response to its calls for Expressions of Interest (EOIs) for grant funding. The number and quality of EOIs at each funding round has resulted in a highly competitive selection process through the ASI’s Research Advisory Committee (RAC), which is made up of a number of Australia’s pre-eminent solar researchers. The RAC screens solar R&D proposals based on criteria of excellence, ensuring that only the strongest proposals are recommended for ASI funding. Once each round’s short-listed funding applicants have been invited in writing by the ASI to submit a full proposal, they are subject to a further stringent and competitive selection process.

The great news for the Australian public is that it won’t be too long before we, along with the rest of the world, can start reaping the rewards of these exciting solar ventures! For further information: Australian Solar Institute www.australiansolarinstitute.com.au 10 Murray Dwyer Circuit, Mayfield West P.O. Box 330 Newcastle NSW 2300 Phone: +61 (2) 4960 6300 Email: info@australiansolarinstitute.com.au

79


Solar Energy Secret to the Ultimate in “greenness” What makes a “green” building? Essentially it involves ensuring that the ecological footprint of construction materials, construction methods and ongoing life of the building has minimal impact on the environment. The goal is zero impact, and even better, a building that enhances our environment. A very large part of the ecological footprint is the energy or carbon footprint. At Solar Power Australia (SPA) we recognise the importance of living sustainably with our natural world and maintaining it, and we see renewable energy as the key to achieving the goal of zero impact. The fact is that powering our buildings, infrastructure and our lifestyle generally with renewable energy is a smart choice. Not only is it best for maintaining our natural world but also combats rising costs for energy and fits well with future business models incorporating carbon pricing. Our appreciation of the positive effects of solar power stems from our direct involvement in the Australian solar business for over 10 years. During this time we have found that the demand for solar power has expanded from the traditional residential sector strongly into the commercial and industrial sectors. We pride ourselves at SPA in developing product ranges such as portable solar power, solar lighting packages, and an extensive line of pre-engineered systems, to advance the use of solar energy in our lives.

Meeting the energy needs of the occupants of a building and a building’s operational energy needs can be easily achieved through use of photovoltaic (PV) panels whether building integrated PV (BIPV), PV panels installed onto buildings external to the building envelope, or free standing PV systems separate from the building itself. Supplying the energy needs of a building, or producing in excess of the energy need using renewable energy is the way of the future. At SPA we work with our customers in implementing a design solution that is best for them. SPA is also the sole distributor of LG Electronics solar panels in Australia. LG Electronics is recognised worldwide for its first class products and attention to detail, and this includes advanced solar technologies. Our association with LG Electronics aligns with our guiding principles and our vision to move Australia to 2020 and beyond in renewable energy.

02 4954 3310

Providing renewable energy solutions for over 10 YEARS

Solar Power Australia have been providing renewable energy solutions for the public and private sectors for over a decade. Save money on rising electricity costs, show people your iniative for making environmentally sustainable choices and let our friendly staff handle the rest.

GRID-FEED SOLAR POWER

REMOTE AREA SOLAR POWER

COMMERCIAL SOLAR POWER

Unit 3, 301 Hillsborough Rd, Warners Bay NSW 2282 80

|

INDUSTRIAL SOLAR POWER

SOLAR LIGHTING

www.solarpoweraustralia.com.au


Clenergy - Endless Energy Solutions The Company Clenergy is an innovative company that designs, manufactures and distributes a range of renewable energy products for the Solar Photovoltaic market. Since its foundation, Clenergy has released a range of high-quality and innovative solar mounting systems for roof, ground and BIPV installations, as well as high-quality solar controllers and grid connected inverters.

flat-plate, grid-connected solar installation in Australia at its completion. Clenergy worked with Origin, the designer/constructor of the park, at the planning stage of the project and was asked to provide the best combination of fixed and solar-tracking mounting systems.

In an ever evolving market, Clenergy understands the needs of our residential, corporate and utility-scale customers and has the ability to work on all projects, no matter the size. Clenergy plays a leading role in both the Australian and global markets, and continues to gain popularity among systems integrators, installers and distributors. With a clear understanding of Australian and international standards, Clenergy’s key non-negotiable value continues to be quality. Clenergy International is certified with ISO 9001:2008 accreditation for quality management. Clenergy holds a number of quality certificates such as TÜV and our products are accredited to Australian Standards. PVezRack SolarRoof products are suitable for installation in every wind region for Australia, including cyclone prone areas. The SolarTerrace III product can also be installed in all wind regions, as the span between footings can be adjusted to provide the strength suitable for the wind load. Our rails are made of anodised aluminium and come with a tenyear warranty.

Clenergy SolarTerrace I in the Bendigo Solar Park

2) Large SolarTerrace installation in the United States (1MW) Because of the global presence of Clenergy we have sold solar mounting systems in Australia, Europe, the United States and the AsiaPacific. In the United States, Clenergy mounting systems have been used for a one-megawatt PV solar power station.

Clenergy racking systems are not only well engineered to be strong and functional; they are also designed with a focus on practicality to ensure minimal installation time. Our unique designs are patented. With the Z-Module, solar panel clamps can be latched directly into place on a rail, straightened and then tightened to fasten the solar panel. Clenergy manufactures a comprehensive range of prodcuts. The PVezRack SolarRoof series are designed for installing solar panels on residential roofing, and our SolarTerrace series has been developed for medium-to-large scale commercial PV power plants. Clenergy have a specially designed racking system for commercial flat roof installations – the SolarMatrix Pro. The PostMount range of PV racking systems can be used on uneven ground and the angle of the panels can be easily adjusted to match the season. Clenergy has a wide range of grid-tied inverters including the popular SPH15 (1.5kW), SPH20 (2kW), SPH30 (3kW), SPH40 (4kW) and SPH60 (6kW) inverters. These inverters are accredited to the Australian AS 4777: 2005 standard and are approved by the Clean Energy Council. They are all IP65 rated. Clenergy is also developing large scale inverters for solar power stations. These large inverters, with up to 50kW of output, are modular by design and can be combined for even larger installations. Reference Projects 1. Large scale Clenergy SolarTerrace installation in Australia – Bendigo Solar Park (300kW) Bendigo Solar Park is a 300kW solar farm combining fixed and solar-tracking mounting structures, using Clenergy SolarTerrace I and Clenergy SolarTracker 1X. Constructed on 30,000 square metres of land using Clenergy mounting systems, the Bendigo Solar Park was the largest ground-mounted

One-megawatt Clenergy SolarTerrace installation in California

Clenergy is a widely established brand well known for its quality. We offer quality products that meet local regulatory requirements. Our products are engineered to be strong and sturdy in construction, yet easy to install. Our range is comprehensive; so that we can help you find a solution for any scale of PV solar power project. Clenergy is a quality design and manufacturing company. We are continuously developing innovative products such as the new interface for Klip-Lok® roofs and the preassembled and foldable SolarTerrace III. We can help you design a solution to meet your solar project requirements. Our engineering expertise, logistical systems, stock management and customer service all mean that we can help you deliver your solar project on time, within budget and with high quality. A Clenergy solution will be easy to justify to project stakeholders as a safe and durable investment. Clenergy Australia 18/20 Duerdin Street Clayton, Victoria, 3168 Phone: 03 9017 6688 Fax: 03 9017 6668 Email: sales@clenergy.com.au Website: http://www.clenergy.com.au

81


Environmentally friendly buildings

climate change Carbon Tax and the economy

Although many have declared the carbon tax a danger to trade-exposed industries and Australian households, others are optimistic about its potential to invigorate and modernise the Australian economy, writes Jarrod Fitch. John Connor, CEO of The Climate Institute, said the Clean Energy Jobs study showed that fixed carbon price will lead to an increase in investment in renewable energy, in turn driving green jobs. “Australia stands at the doorway to a clean energy transition that can drive tens of billions of dollars of investment in the electricity sector creating a net increase of close to 34,000 new jobs in regional Australia,” Connor said in a statement.

“To present carbon pricing as a shot in the arm for regional Australia is also very misleading, when in fact regional areas will wear the brunt of higher overall energy costs with escalating electricity, gas and transportation costs becoming entrenched.” If the proposed carbon price legislation is to make it through both houses of parliament, the Federal Government will need the support of all three Independent Senators, as well as the Greens. Opposition Leader Tony Abbott said the tax is another Labour broken promise.

“Making business responsible for the pollution they cause is central to ensuring Australia joins other nations who are gaining first mover economic benefits from developing new clean energy industries.”

“This is an outrage. It is a complete betrayal of a pre-election commitment by the Prime Minister. The Parliament has no mandate whatsoever for this,” he said.

National Secretary of the Australian Manufacturing Workers’ Union, Dave Oliver, has also welcomed the carbon tax proposition.

Abbott has vowed to lambast the tax ‘every minute, of every day, of every week, of every month,’ and also claimed he will scrap the tax if elected.

“A price on carbon pollution is the right step and will provide certainty for workers in industries that can now plan for a low-pollution future,” he said in a statement. “That’s why Australia’s one million manufacturing workers will now look to the Federal Government for job and industry plans that equal the scale of the Button Industry plans of the 1980s.” Not convinced however, are critics like Greg Evans, Director of Economics and Industry Policy at the Australian Chamber of Commerce and Industry. “Long-term job creation in what is described as the ‘clean energy’ sector is an illusion and will mostly come about only during the

82

construction phase of grossly subsidised solar and wind generation projects,” he said in a statement.

“This is the same as we propose with the mining tax – we will oppose it in opposition and will rescind it in government,” he said. Prime Minister Julia Gillard defended her position, saying she advocated a carbon price to be the best mechanism to tackle climate change. “I’m not going to get hung up on word games about how you describe various pricing mechanisms,” she said. “And I’ve been very upfront with people with a fixed price. It’s effectively like a tax taking you to an emissions trading scheme.” The proposed carbon price is due to enter Federal Parliament in 2011.


Environmentally friendly buildings

2011 has already increased my respect for Mother Nature and highlighted the fragility of human beings when faced will the full brunt of natural forces. (One could say unnatural). I was in Toowoomba on January 10th and the magnitude of the extreme weather events that unfolded in Toowoomba and the Lockyer Valley still seem surreal and difficult to integrate in one’s mind. One continually asks “how can it be?” that a boiling seven metre high wall of water swept away people and brick homes, leaving some with only a bare concrete slab devoid of any fittings or tie bolts. A gentle meandering shallow creek where our family once picnicked in Murphy’s creek is now a ravine metres deep and thirty metres wide. Disbelief still exists even in the minds of witnesses who experienced the wall of water at Grantham, an area I regard as quite flat and on a large plain. The loss of the farmlands valuable top soil to the rooms and floors of Brisbane residences is yet another major impact. In addition, the Brisbane floods (With 70% of Queensland under flood), combined with the outcomes of cyclone Yasi in North Queensland and flooding in southern states and fires in Western Australia has placed insurance companies under enormous pressure. The events in Christchurch and Japan are also a shocking tragedy. The insurance industry graphs on weather related claim costs over the last decade are now starting to replicate an exponential curve. Without doubt, the frequency and intensity of extreme weather events is increasing and while there is still debate about anthropogenic climate change I personally have no doubts the excesses resulting from the activities of the human race are responsible for climate change and critical tipping points are already being passed. It is fitting the first AGIC sustainability assessment category to be authored and completed was the Climate Change Adaptation category; however it is important to understand that where sustainability is considered, Climate Change Adaptation is but one of many issues to be considered in the design, construction and operation of infrastructure. The authorship of the scheme is now well advanced, with authors recently passing the 60% review milestone and on their way to the final draft milestone in May to be followed by project trials. As a quality assurance check, each category author has a technical peer reviewer and a peer overview of all the authored material is performed by a Global Review Panel made up of very experienced infrastructure professionals. These reviews have occurred at the 15%, 30% and 60% authorship milestones and further reviews will take place at the final draft milestone and after the two project trial stages. The AGIC Board is most appreciative of the pro bono support provided by the peer reviewers. GHD was contracted to manage the authorship program and this has ensured milestones were met on a timely basis and issues raised by authors were addressed in a prompt manner.

83


Environmentally friendly buildings

The appointment of Rick Walters as AGIC’s Technical Manager in February was welcomed, and has greatly assisted the scheme’s development and the AGIC Board looks forward to the schemes release this year. There is now a widespread recognition in the industry that the delivery of infrastructure needs to be approached in a more sustainable and efficient manner. The other imperative is the huge challenge presented by the $700bn backlog in investment in existing infrastructure upgrades and new projects as identified by Engineers Australia in its recent report card. The recycling of materials from demolished infrastructure, and the increasing acceptance of recycled materials in road construction particularly is one example of the industry moving forward. The Australian Asphalt and Pavement Association in partnership with Austroads and VicRoads have around ten sections of road incorporating various combinations of warm mix asphalt and recycled materials under test on the heavily loaded Broadmeadows section of the Hume Highway near Melbourne’s ring road. The test has been running for twelve months and the industry will be waiting on the results with interest.

Innovation at all levels of infrastructure delivery from financing to operation will be critical in addressing this backlog and AGIC’s national sustainability framework designed to encourage innovation and the recently launched Smart Infrastructure Research Facility at Wollongong that is planning to develop a virtual Australia are two excellent initiatives to progress this important agenda. AGIC has released three new products to the industry and these are freely available on the website www.agic.net.au. These products are: 1. Climate Change Adaptation Guideline: The Climate Change Adaptation assessment category was the first category to be completed. The NSW Dept. of Environment Climate Change and Water (DECCW) generously sponsored authorship of the Climate Change Adaptation (CCA) category, which was the first element of AGIC’s rating tool to be developed. The category was trialed on two projects sourced through the NSW Department of Public works and these projects are described later. Parsons Brinckerhoff was the author of the CCA category, AECOM was the technical reviewer, and GHD project managed the authorship, reviews and pilot trials. “The process was open and collaborative and designed to leverage off the experience from these three leading firms,” Chairman of AGIC Professor David Hood noted. The authorship process comprised: • a global literature review • interviews with key climate change adaptation practitioners • review and application workshops • two pilot trials • Draft of the AGIC Guidelines for Climate Change Adaptation Consideration of trends and the potential risks posed by a changing climate have not in the past had the prominence that regulators, operators, owners, and infrastructure design and construction companies are now according them, and this category is designed to bridge this gap. Traditionally infrastructure is designed on the basis of models based on historical weather records, and an assumption that the future climate will be the same as in the past. In addition, it is still common to find that some stakeholders are not heeding the lessons (namely social, economic and environmental costs) from the impact of natural catastrophes on current operating infrastructure in their operations and maintenance plans, nor their long term strategic thinking.

84


Responding quickly to this changing attitude, AGIC and DECCW agreed to use this category to develop an accessible Guideline on how and when to consider climate change risk and adaptation (go to www.agic. net.au for a copy of the manual). The objectives for both the AGIC category and the interim Guideline include: • when climate change related risks should be considered and how • assessment of likely impacts • identify timely and appropriate resilience and adaptation measures • relative levels of assessment and implementation. The criteria developed through the collaborative authorship process for when and how to consider climate change risk and when and how to adapt, comprised:

2. AGIC Knowledge Hub (KHub) The purpose of the web based KHub is to act as a directory of information relating to innovation in sustainability in infrastructure. The KHub is structured to capture industry case studies that demonstrate innovative sustainability practices occurring in infrastructure design, construction and operation. It is not designed as a marketing resource for companies to simply promote their expertise; however the contributing organisation is acknowledged against the case study. Case studies are peer reviewed by a Technical Support Working Group (TSWG) to ensure authenticity before approving the submissions for loading on to the AGIC KHub. Stakeholders can submit their projects by visiting www.agic-khub.net.au and AGIC encourages any stakeholder that has delivered an innovative project or existing asset upgrade to submit details for review and addition to the KHub.

• Commitment • Capability • Climate Change projections • Climate Change risks assessed • Adaptation options assessed • Adaptation options designed or implemented. The criteria were then aligned with key infrastructure planning, design, delivery and operations phases. Benchmarks describing a range of performance expectations, from “do nothing” to “implementing best practise” were articulated, guiding the user as to what, and to what degree the processes and initiatives described should and could be implemented. The draft guideline was developed and then through facilitated workshops tested on a recently delivered dam, pump station and pipeline network located on NSW north coast (Shannon Dam), and a planned infrastructure upgrade (roads, drainage and services) to a major waste water treatment facility located west of the NSW Blue Mountains (Lithgow Sewerage Treatment Plant). The Project Manager, DECCW and Public Works personnel worked together prior to the workshops on identifying and sourcing the key personnel and project delivery material to ensure that the pilot trail was rigorous and fully tested the adaptation guideline. This facilitated pilot trial process ensured that the AGIC climate change adaptation guideline is both practical and beneficial to the industry. The lessons learned from the development of this CCA category have now been applied to the authorship of the remaining categories now close to completion.

3 Quick Check The third release was the AGIC “Quick Check” sustainability reference guide. Developed by Aecom Director Scott Losee for AGIC, this questionnaire based spreadsheet with 136 questions allows the sustainability credentials of a new project or existing asset upgrade to be tested within an hour for areas of strength and weakness in relation to sustainability. Quick Check is freely available on the AGIC website (www.agic.net.au) and provides the user with an understanding of the issues to be covered by the National Sustainability Rating scheme when released. Main Roads WA was one of the first organisations to train their staff in the use of Quick Check and it has now been used successfully to raise awareness of and assess sustainability issues on a number of new projects. AGIC looks forward to the release of the rating scheme and encourages all industry stakeholders to consider submitting their innovative case study to the KHub for review (www.agic-khub.net.au).

85


Australian Window Association & Window Energy Rating Scheme

The Australian Window Association own and manage an independent scheme called the Window Energy Rating Scheme (WERS). WERS rates the energy impact of residential and commercial windows in homes and buildings. Windows can severely impact the thermal and cooling loads of a building. Up to 40% of a home’s heating energy is lost and up to 87% of its heat gained through windows. Improving their thermal performance reduces energy costs and Australia’s greenhouse gas emissions. Independent of any one manufacturer, WERS is a fair, rigorous and credible system for rating the energy performance of windows and glazed doors. WERS follows all AFRC protocols and processes as required by the Building Code of Australia. Visit www.awa.org.au & www.wers.net for more information.

Windows and the Building Code of Australia Under the Building Code of Australia, window manufacturers are required to produce windows and glazed doors that meet the mandatory minimum specifications under Australian Standards AS2047 and AS1288.

®

Energy efficiency provisions state that external glazing performance data must be determined in accordance with the guidelines of the AFRC (Australian Fenestration Rating Council). Compliance to the Building Code of Australia All Australian Window Association members have products tested to AS 2047 including AS 1288 and are a part of a third party NATA accredited program. This accreditation program is a proven and nationally recognised method of achieving compliance to assist certifiers, builders, specifiers and homeowners to ensure products selected comply with Australian Standards.

Don’t get caught approving non-compliant products

Look for AWA & WERS Members Their products are: - BCA Compliant - Australian Standard Compliant (AS2047) - Independent Third Party Accredited - Energy rated Visit the AWA Website and click on the Compliance link for important information for all involved in the building industry

®

www.awa.org.au

www.wers.net

86


GREEN STAR RATINGS HAVE CHANGED ®

The Green Building Council of Australia has recently changed the Steel Credit criteria used in the Green Star® rating tool for office, retail, education, residential and health care buildings. To be eligible to apply for up to 2 points, 95% by mass of steel used in buildings needs to be sourced from: • Steel making facilities that have an ISO 14001 Environmental Management System (EMS) in place and; • Steel makers who are members of the World Steel Association’s Climate Action Programme So before you start designing, talk to OneSteel about achieving maximum Green Star® Points. • Recognition is given for the use of higher grade steel such as C450; and • The use of Polymer Injection Technology (PIT) in producing steel reinforcing products.

To find out more about Green Star® contact OneSteel on 1800 178 335 or visit www.buildwithstandards.com.au ©Copyright 2011. OneSteel Manufacturing Pty Limited ABN 42 004 651 325


A welcome change to green building criteria for recycled content no longer applies The Green Building Council of Australia (GBCA) has revised the Green Star ‘Steel’ credit points. The Green Star ‘Steel’ credit points published in April 2010 remove the criteria for recycled content, recognising that Australian steel manufacturers already recover scrap steel from the waste stream at world’s best practice rates. While the old credit was based only on the production and manufacture of steel, the new credit acknowledges that the whole supply chain can play its part, from design to steel making, manufacturing, and fabrication. The new credit encourages dematerialisation through the use of higher grades of structural steels and more efficient offsite optimal fabrication techniques for reinforcing steels. The revised ‘Steel’ credit also recognises innovative and environmentally-responsible steel production and fabrication methods. Since the GBCA first introduced its Green Star® rating system in 2003, there has been an ever-increasing focus throughout the construction industry on sustainable buildings. An objective of the Green Star® rating system is to encourage the adoption by architects, design engineers, specifiers and builders to select and incorporate materials that contribute to the environmental sustainability and life cycle of commercial developments. To assist all key stakeholders on how they can attain the maximum Green Star® rating, OneSteel has developed the ‘Build with Standards’ campaign. “OneSteel recognises the importance of a sustainable approach to our operations across the entire supply chain,” said Nick Fithall, General Manager, Sales, OneSteel Market Mills.

“If we can work with architects, design engineers and specifiers during the initial planning and design stage of a project, we’re able to demonstrate how incorporating structural steel products can contribute to achieving steel credit points for their project,” he said. OneSteel welcomes the revision of the steel rating. As a GBCA member OneSteel is highly supportive of sustainable construction and believe that steel has an important role to play in the growing green building industry in Australia. Changes to the Green Star® Rating Tool Old credit vs. new credit points for steel. Compliance criteria OLD No requirements

“This extends from the extraction of raw materials to the manufacture of finished steel products and distribution to our customers,” he said. The rating tools developed by the GBCA cover various building types such as commercial offices (design, construction and interior fit-outs), education (universities and schools), retail centres, residential, industrial facilities and public buildings. The Green Star® rating system is designed to facilitate the transition of the Australian building industry towards more sustainable building initiatives and incorporating them into mainstream designs. Essentially the Green Star rating system is a checklist of items for which points are awarded in eight environmental impact categories (management, indoor environment quality, energy, transport, water, materials, land use and ecology, emissions) plus innovation. The steel credit, which is contained in the materials category, is not only aimed at how materials are used, but also how those materials are manufactured, processed and supplied.

88

NEW Steel maker/manufacturer must: • Have a valid ISO 14001 Environmental Management System (EMS) in place All of OneSteel’s major manufacturing facilities have ISO 14001 EMS compliance • Be a member of World Steel Association’s Climate Action Program (WSA CAP) OneSteel is a member of WSA’s Climate Action Program

Structural Steel credit points • 1 point awarded • 1 point awarded for greater than 95% category A for 30% recycled product (light gauge steel product) and greater than 25% content, and category B product (structural steel product). • 1 additional point awarded for 45% recycled content

(For further information on Category A and B products please visit the “Green Star” section of www.buildwithstandards.com.au) • 1 point awarded if 60% or greater of the fabricated steelwork is supplied by a steel fabricator accredited to the Environmental Sustainability Charter of the Australian Steel Institute

Reinforcing Steel credit points • 1 point awarded • 1 point for using >60% steel made from Polymer for 30% recycled Injection Technology (PIT) content, and • 1 point if >15% steel is produced using off site optimal • 1 additional point awarded for 45% recycled content

fabrication techniques

Up to two points may be awarded where at least 95 per cent of all structural and reinforcing steel used in the building’s structure is sourced from a steel maker that is a member of the World Steel Association Climate Action Program (WSA CAP) and whose manufacturing facilities are ISO 14001 EMS compliant.

For a complete overview of the Green Star® steel credit rating system for structural steel or OneSteel’s ‘Build with Standards’ programme; visit www.buildwithstandards.com.au

“OneSteel is a member of the World Steel Association’s Climate Action Program (WSA CAP) and all of OneSteel’s major manufacturing facilities are ISO 14001 EMS compliant,” said Nick.

Supporting information for specific OneSteel Reinforcing ECOREO™ products is available at www.reinforcing.com in the ‘Technical Resources’ section.

Note: Recycled content is no longer applicable


NEW ECO-REO™ range of sustainable reinforcing products that makes economical sense OneSteel Reinforcing can now offer builders and construction companies a range of REBAR, REOMESH® and Decking products that can provide a more sustainable use of materials in structures. These carry the additional branding of ECO-REO™, ECO-BAR™ or ECO-MESH™ as they feature more economic and environmental benefits compared to traditional reinforcing steels.

ECONOMICAL – The products can give more cost-efficient cover and economy in the number of sheets or bars, or the volume of steel needed to efficiently reinforce the structure and meet the design intent of the project.

Engineered and tailored mesh solutions can include variable wire spacing and wire diameters and ductilities, and optimised mesh size (length and width).

ENVIRONMENTAL – OneSteel’s manufacturing of reinforcing steel utilises energy reducing Polymer Injection Technology (PIT) and recycled steel scrap content.

Examples are the new UTEMESH® and the extra large (up to 9 m x 3m) ONEMESH® MADE-TO-SIZE sheets which give more cost-efficient cover and economy in the number of sheets used on projects.

OneSteel has introduced a number of initiatives in recent years to assist with more sustainable use of materials. The majority of OneSteel’s reinforcing bar and reinforcing mesh has been made from recycled scrap for many years – OneSteel announced on 10th June 2009 that the overall percentage of post-consumer recycled content (FY2008 average) was 89% for reinforcing bar and 66% for reinforcing mesh. OneSteel announced on 1st May 2010 that OneSteel’s improved energy-efficient steel making process Polymer Injection Technology (PIT), used at the Rooty Hill Sydney and Laverton Melbourne electric arc furnaces has allowed OneSteel to achieve an average 66% of reinforcing rod for mesh and 82% of reinforcing bar produced using this technology. In operating this technology as standard practice at OneSteel’s Rooty Hill and Laverton Steel Mills, there is potential to recycle more than 285,000 passenger tyres per annum. OneSteel Reinforcing is supporting customers to have projects gain up to two Green Building Council of Australia (GBCA) Green Star Steel credits with enhanced capability to provide off site optimal fabrication of reinforcing steel used in the building structure.

ECO-REO™ products include: • TRUSSDEK® – Like reinforcing bar carpets and special meshes, TRUSSDEK® panels can reduce lapping and steel intensity and also serves as a permanent formwork system, thereby eliminating other formwork and the need for backpropping. • Spacing between TRUSSDEK® panels can be optimised to reduce material, and concrete savings due to voiding of TRUSSDEK® panels can be significant. • The volume of the steel reinforcing bars or mesh in a TRUSSDEK® slab can be up to 60% of that used in a conventional one-way reinforced-concrete slab. • TRUSSDEK® panels can span up to 8.5 metres, which in steel framed buildings can potentially lead to the complete elimination of the secondary steel beams. Supporting information for specific OneSteel Reinforcing ECOREO™ products is available at www.reinforcing.com in the ‘Technical Resources’ section.

ECO-BAR™ products include: • 500PLUS® BAMTEC® – Engineered reinforcing bar carpets can allow the size and positioning of reinforcing steel to be optimised with variable diameters and spacings. •

500PLUS® PREFAB – Prefabricated reinforcement is a more efficient process that can be designed to generate less waste and scrap on site.

ECO-MESH™ products include: • ONEMESH® MADE-TO-SIZE and UTEMESH® •

Customised special run ONEMESH® can minimise duplication of reinforcing steel and scrap losses that result from excess lapping and trimming of mesh sheets.

89


Climate Smart Solutions offers a remarkable Heat Reflective Insulated Coating that utilises revolutionary Thermal Protection Technology which will reduce the temperature of your building as well as insulating and providing protection from the elements.

Heat Reflective Coatings reflect up to 90% of the UV rays and 80% of solar rays subject to colour and application. This means that it will be up to 40+°C cooler on the surface of your roof or wall and 10°C – 15+°C cooler inside the building!

When outside temperature increases, so do cooling costs. The emission of harmful UV rays and ultra violet light on a roof or wall, can over time take a tremendous toll. These emissions cause high cooling and air conditioning costs, damage to the roof or wall itself, and even underlying structural damage if left unaddressed.

Heat Reflective Coatings is a highly energy efficient coating that reduces summer cooling costs, reduces peak energy usage and helps reduce pollution, fossil fuel usage, land fill and also extends the building’s lifespan.

A hot roof or wall increases a building’s energy consumption. An immediate benefit of using Heat Reflective Coatings will be energy cost savings. It also has a guaranteed long-lasting attractive appearance.

Reflective Coatings The Benefits of NuHeat Concept Developments Pty Ltd and how it saves youT/A money; Climate Smart Solutions

Tel: Reflective Coatings 1300 57 58 59Developments Nu Concept Pty Ltd have a longer lifespan Heat Fax:traditional paints 0755 96 01 77 Smart T/A Climate Solutions than providing significant Email: admin@climatesmartsolutions.com.au savings both short and long term and offer a 10Tel: 1300 57 58 59 15Head yearOffice: warranty.4/22 New St & Gilston Rd, Nerang, Q 4211 Fax: 0755 96 01 77 Heat Reflective Coatings can be used on:CQ Office: Bacon St,to Moranbah, Q 4744 • Reduced cooling 7costs (up 40%) conserving Email: admin@climatesmartsolutions.com.au Postal:and valuable PO BOX 52, Oxenford, Q 4210 Industrial and Commercial Buildings, Shopping energy resources. Centre’s, Schools, Tafes, Clubs, Pubs, Mining Head Office: 4/22 New St & Gilston Rd, Nerang, Q 4211 • AABN: cooler building means reduced chemicals and 971 68 CQ Office: 271 124 7 Bacon St, Moranbah, Q 4744 Accommodation, Containers, Caravans, Trailers, Plant pollution for healthier cities. BSA:Postal: 109 57 48 PO BOX 52, Oxenford, Q 4210 and Equipment, Water/Fuel Tanks, Storage Solo’s, • air conditioning maintenance and Reduced Factories, Workshops and Residential. ABN: costs. 271 124 971 68 replacement BSA: 109 57 48 • Prevents surface rust, roof deterioration or roof How It Works TEMPERATURE REDUCTION OF PAINTED AND UNPAINTED SURFACES replacements. The Nu-Technology reduces the amount of sunlight your roof absorbs, dramatically lowering its heat • Access to Government grants/funding and buildup. Conventional zincalume, colourbond roofsOF and PAINTED carbon credits. TEMPERATURE REDUCTION AND UNPAINTED SURFACES buildings absorb up to approximately 95% of the suns infrared heat.

Before and after shots show temperature reduction between painted and unpainted surfaces.

Before and after shots show temperature reduction between painted and unpainted surfaces. after shots show temperature reduction between and RSL unpainted surfaces. TheBefore Photosand above show the temperature reduction of the roof at painted Albion Park Club (NSW) This job was completed in November 2009.


“GOVERNMENT GRANTS AND FUNDING AVAILABLE TO APPROVED APPLICANTS” The ‘Green Building Fund’ is an element of the Clean Businesses Australia initiative by the Australian Government. This aims to reduce the Greenhouse gas emissions impact of the built environment by decreasing energy consumed in the operation of commercial office buildings and industrial warehouses. Grants can be obtained from Federal, State and Territory Governments in order to help businesses reduce Greenhouse gas emissions with funding available for up to 50% of the total costs, ranging from $50,000 - $500,000. Energy Supply companies are also offering carbon credits and funding to large businesses with highpower consumption. Climate Smart Solutions are fully licensed/insured sustainable builders (Australia Wide). Climate Smart Solutions can also offer your business the following services; • • • • •

Heat Reflective Roof and Wall Coatings Sustainable Homes & Mining Accommodation Industrial & Commercial Retrofit (Renovations & Fit Outs) Solar Hot Water/Power Water Tanks and Water Saving Fixtures

Some Of Our Recent Customers Include: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

News Limited – Chullora (NSW) Tupperware Warehousing – Brisbane (QLD) BHP Billiton – Mt Isa (QLD) Shoalhaven Heads Bowls & Rec. Club – Shoalhaven Heads (NSW) Albion Park RSL – Sydney (NSW) Public Trust Building (QLD Govt) – Toowoomba (QLD) Motorama Holden – Springwood (QLD) Sunshine Ford – Southport (QLD) Clarke Rubber – Sunshine Coast (QLD) Ray’s Resort – Southport (QLD) Peachy Constructions – Ormeau (QLD) Illawarra Yacht Club – Woolongong (NSW) Help Enterprises – Brisbane (QLD) Red Cross – Gympie (QLD) Moranbah Sporting Club – Moranbah (QLD)

For Further Information and an obligation free quote please check out our websites www.climatesmartsolutions.com.au www.heatreflectivecoatings.com.au www.coolpaints.com.au Email admin@climatesmartsolutions.com.au Free call 1300 57 58 59


Environmentally friendly buildings

Adelaide

– leading the way in

sustainability

92


Adelaide is well placed to lead the way in developing an environmentally sustainable city. It is surrounded by extensive Park Lands which provide accessible open space and places for nature conservation, and the River Torrens flowing through the city cools it while providing a place for rest and recreation. In addition, Adelaide is built on geographically flat land which makes it particularly suitable for walking and cycling. Adelaide City Council has policies in place for enhancing the city’s environmental credentials and for ensuring as many developments as possible offer sustainable solutions while reducing costs. “Creating a sustainable future for Adelaide relies on Council working collaboratively with its community, including individuals, businesses, organisations and all spheres of Government,” Lord Mayor Stephen Yarwood said. “Finding ways to reduce waste, while preserving water and energy use can only improve the environmental sustainability of our beautiful city.” Better energy efficiency There are a number of initiatives that work towards greater energy efficiency in the city by reducing emissions and changing the way our environments are managed. This involves using alternative energy sources wherever possible. One example, jointly funded by the Australian Government and Council through the Adelaide Solar City project, is the installation of solar energy systems around the city to reduce reliance on fossil fuels. The Rundle Lantern, a digital light art structure located on the city’s Rundle Street UPark, is now solely powered by solar energy. Another solar system installation is at the Adelaide Central Bus Station which reduces emissions equivalent to taking 16 cars off the road each year. It powers Tindo, the world’s first 100 per cent solar-powered electric bus, as well as other Council solar electric vehicles. The Lord Mayor’s car of choice, the all-electric Mitsubishi i-MiEV car, is also recharged from the Adelaide Central Bus Station’s system, making it the only solar-powered electric car to be driving on the city’s roads. “The car is great – it’s totally silent, can go for 160 kilometres before it needs to be charged and can really zip along when I need it to,” Stephen said. Solar panels were recently installed on the roof of the Adelaide Central Market, a much-loved fresh produce market in the centre of town. This project shows how solar technology can successfully integrate with historic buildings. The Market is powered by 50 per cent accredited green power. Other recent energy efficient projects include lighting and air conditioning upgrades and the installation of voltage optimisation technology (which have further reduced carbon emissions). Market traders divert 90 per

93


Environmentally friendly buildings

cent of their waste from landfill each year, including over 700 tonnes of organic waste used for composting. Council also takes part in activities that promote awareness of energy use in the broader community. A recent example is Earth Hour held on Saturday March 26, where Stephen encouraged city residents to switch off all non-essential lights between 8.30pm and 9.30pm. Council participated by turning off non-essential lighting in various buildings and icons around the city, including the Victoria Square and Elder Park fountains and parts of Adelaide Town Hall. “Together we can send a united message that we care about the planet and want to make a difference to our environment,” Stephen said. Sustainable city living Part of Council’s long-term vision is to create a population-dense city where people live in vibrant mixed use settings close to facilities and have access to sustainable commuting options, including walking and cycling. Part of this is the development of a cycling network, with over 500 bike parks now in place.  Some bike lanes have been redeveloped with plans to further improve both on and off road cycling routes. The Adelaide City Bikes Scheme provides free unlimited bike hire from eight spots around the city during the day. Users can travel anywhere within the city limits and there are various points throughout the city where bikes can be hired. Council encourages the use of other alternative transport options. The recent installation of the world’s first fuel cell-powered electric vehicle charging stations in the Central Market car park enables city shoppers to recharge their electric vehicles from low emission sources rather than carbon intensive power from the electricity grid. It is powered by an innovative Australian-developed fuel cell. There’s even a plug for electric gophers! “This initiative reinforces the City of Adelaide’s role as a leader in environmental sustainability and new technology,” Stephen said.

A joint initiative between the State and Federal Government, the 32 kilometre pipeline from the Glenelg Wastewater Treatment Plant transports recycled water to irrigate the city’s Park Lands and gardens. The pipeline replaces billions of litres of mains water previously used to irrigate parks and gardens and so reduces pressure on Adelaide’s main water sources. The pipeline has helped improve the quality of turf and gardens across the city and has enabled community water features such as the Veale Gardens Creek and Rymill Park Lake to be converted to recycled water. “Adelaide is really leading the way in recycled water use and it’s fantastic to see the Park Lands flourishing again after 10 years of drought conditions,” Sustainable City Program Manager Adrian Stokes said. Careful private water use can also go a long way towards conserving the city’s water. City residents, community organisations and sporting clubs can receive $500 from Council towards purchasing and installing a rain water tank. Looking after local habitats Sustainable irrigation is only one part of keeping the city green and inviting. Thriving ecological systems and habitats also enrich the city. These are maintained through conservation of vegetation, habitat restoration and by encouraging community participation and interaction with the local environment. Different volunteer teams working with Council put in a lot of hard work to maintain vegetation. For example, Wirranendi Park on West Terrace is cared for by several volunteer groups. “We have a group of residents from the city’s south-west community who are revegetating a section of this park, and they also monitor water use, collect seeds and do fauna surveys in the park,” Adrian said.

“This project is a sign of things to come as we move towards a cleaner and greener future for our city.”

The park has a billabong restoration area, maintained by two student groups who conduct 10 working bees a year and even grow the plants to revegetate the site.

To help city residents take part in creating a more sustainable city, Council provides rebates for the installation of solar panels, solar hot water systems and insulations of rainwater tanks.

Students from Adelaide High School are planting local native plants on their school grounds to improve habitat for animals, and Santos are planting and maintaining a site just outside the CBD.

Protecting a precious resource South Australia is known as being one of the driest states in Australia. Council recognises its responsibility in careful planning and management of its water resources to ensure it can continue to meet the city’s water needs into the future.

94

Council maintains and manages Adelaide’s ‘green belt’ which is thriving again since the completion of the Glenelg to Adelaide Recycled Water Project (GAP) in 2010.

“Volunteer groups are a vital part of maintaining native vegetation and habitats in and around the city,” Adrian said. There are over 15 biodiversity sites in the Park Lands with many of the sites replanted in partnership with the South Australian Government’s


‘Million Trees Program’. Community volunteers take part in planting activities as part of National Tree Day and World Environment Day. The Million Trees Program has helped with growing native plants along parts of the River Torrens to improve the health of the river and restore habitats, with over 20,000 plants having been planted by community members. Keeping it clean A clean city is a city that people want to visit and live in. Adelaide City Council held a public cleanup at Ellis Park / Tambawodli on West Terrace in the city as part of Clean Up Australia Day and has proudly supported the event since 2004. “Clean Up Australia Day not only raises awareness about litter reduction and recycling but builds community pride. It’s the perfect opportunity for everyone to come together and do our bit for our local parks and waterways,” Stephen said. Over the last year Council has extended its commitment to recycling initiatives and provides a kerbside three-bin waste and recycling collection service for residents and small businesses. A sustainable vision for the future Adelaide City Council’s vision is for a city that is vibrant, populous and sustainable and builds upon Adelaide’s heritage and lifestyle. The Environmental Sustainability Strategy 2009-2012 sets out goals and actions for a sustainable city in the areas of climate change, water, waste and biodiversity. Council’s Carbon Neutral Action Plan sets a target to reduce carbon emissions from Council’s own operations by 60 per cent by 2012. To achieve this target, Council has invested $1.3 million per annum for three years in projects that will improve energy efficiency, generate renewable or low-emission energy at Council facilities, and procure renewable energy. Excitingly, projects implemented to date have seen Council reach its 60 per cent carbon reduction ahead of schedule. To date, Council has reduced its carbon emissions by 61 per cent compared to 1994 levels; that’s the same emissions as 4,900 cars taken off the road for a year. “Council is committed to achieving significant and long-term changes to the way it and the city operates to protect its natural environment and reduce its carbon emissions, mains water use and waste generation,” Stephen said.

95


The only company in Australia to offer you ALL the choices… There are now two very different technologies available when choosing recycled plastic materials, each suited to different applications. This means at Cosset Industries Australia, we don’t just offer you what we have, we offer you what you need... Recycled Plastic: Cosset’s management have been developing recycled plastic products for over 13 years. In that time, manufacturing processes have been developed which have placed Cosset at the forefront of recycled plastic manufacturing in Australia. Pure recycled plastic is used at Cosset’s moulded products plant and is used predominantly for nonload bearing products such as the award winning PlastiPole. Recycled Wood Plastic Composites (WPC): This innovative material is a combination of recycled plastic and recycled timber and is one of the fastest growing industries in North America and Europe, as the world is forced to confront the growing quantities of waste plastic going to landfills and the depletion of the planets precious timbers. Cosset’s EVERTUFF™ is a breakthrough for recycled plastic manufacturing in Australia and allows specifiers to use recycled materials in applications not possible before. Given its recycled timber content, EVERTUFF™ is stronger than pure recycled plastic and is smoother and more consistent in its appearance and is available in standard charcoal only. DuraComp™ is Cosset’s most innovative recycled WPC product range to date and is available in 8 iron-based colourfast colours. Manufactured under a regional partnership, Cosset develops products and designs tooling in Australia, but uses the cost effectiveness of manufacturing in Asia to bring its customers one of the most advanced range of coloured WPC products available in the world today. Recent projects 40,242KG’S of waste used for boardwalk Stage 1 of a 1.5km boardwalk has been recently completed for the District Council of Robe and is constructed from the ground up using Cosset’s recycled WPC - EVERTUFF™. 40,242kg’s of post-consumer waste was diverted from landfill giving the boardwalk a design life of over 40 years. ‘The response to council’s decision to construct a boardwalk has been extremely positive and we could not be more satisfied with the result. The product and service supplied by Cosset has been excellent’ – Bill Hender, CEO, District Council of Robe. Recycled plastic signs educate walkers The Baw Baw shire council has chosen recycled plastic signs for council’s rebuild fire recovery programme. Lucas Paull, the Bushland Reserves Project Officer with council said “The podiums signs are used for educating people about bush regeneration, nature and the environment and linking the indigenous community to these particular sites and reserves.” The Kurnai Trail travels across five of these reserves that were affected directly or indirectly by the Black Saturday fires. Recycled composite adds finishing touch The Unley City Council’s decision to purchase Cosset’s EVERTUFF™ Recycled Wood Plastic Composite bollards, wheel stops and garden edging will reward them for the next 40 years with zero cracking, splitting or rotting. The bollards alone at Orphanage Park, Goodwood

96

were responsible for diverting 5,592kg’s from landfill and will offer council maintenance free performance for years to come. New products DuraComp™ Hollow pyramid top bollard

Available in 3 sizes and 8 different colours, Cosset’s DuraComp™ Hollow Bollards are a robust, attractive and cost effective alternative to timber with a design life in excess of 40 years. With a unique internal design, DuraComp™ Hollow Bollards are lighter than solid offerings yet strong enough to withstand day to day duties. Pelican feeding platform goes green For years the Pelicans have performed for visitors from all over the world at Kangaroo Island’s Kingscote where at 5pm every day they come in for feeding. Up until recently people would gather on the rocks beside the water to witness this event but not anymore. Cosset’s EVERTUFF™ Recycled Composite provides those viewing the performance with a now comfortable seating position which also accommodates a wheelchair deck and performance platform. The design and fabrication of marine grade stainless steel components was also carried out by Cosset.


Products designed to help reduce landfill, logging & mining. The decision to help is yours...

“Australia’s Leading Innovator, Designer and Manufacturer of Recycled Plastic Products” Cosset Industries Australia Pty Ltd Unit 2/4 Charles Street Woodside South Australia 5244 ABN 37 136 643 260

National Customer Service Free Call 1800 COSSET (1800 267 738) Telephone: (08) 8389 9331 Facsimile: (08) 8389 7332 Email: service@cosset.com.au www.cosset.com.au


Smartstream Technology ‘‘All drains lead to the ocean’’… is a quote from the well known children’s animated movie, ‘Finding Nemo’, as simple as it sounds…. ‘Why are we missing this point?’ because of the nature of the discharge from its site, however when closely investigated it has been identified that the pipes and chambers downstream from the relative site will never stop releasing oil into the downstream environment, within the life of the storm drains and structures.” Storm Water Drainage runoff contains a large variety of contaminants, ranging from physical nasties including syringes and condoms as well as regular community waste such as bottles, cans, packaging and of course organic material/sediment. Storm Water Drainage infrastructure design selections will play a big part in the protection of our water ways in the future, its time we adapt our principles to reflect our learning. Primarily reinforced concrete and steel, the infrastructure of the past decades, is thwart with adverse inherent features, that cannot be ignored. For in excess of 10 years Shane Wormall of Western Australia and his companies Smartstream Technology Pty Ltd and Envirostream Catchment Management Pty Ltd have been actively involved in the Asset Management of third parties / local government drainage systems, the knowledge gained from these activities is priceless for designers wanting to move into the future responsibly. Smartstream Technology is reputed for ‘thinking outside the square’ and initiating change so it comes as no surprise the company now offer designers a range of smarter drainage systems featuring enhancements to overcome inherent flaws found in traditional systems. The products developed by Smartstream Technology reflect experience gained through many years of hands on research relative to the below ground drainage infrastructure and the variations in storm water quality. Gross Pollutant Traps are an effective device used to trap (mainly physical) contaminants, however if not cleaned ultimately the contents will escape and overdose the downstream ecosystem with the same nasties that we intend to remove. The Gross Pollutant Traps offered by Smartstream Technology boast the most versatile range of features available, including telemetric communications and automated water quality testing, giving consideration to the fact that such devices are evidently not always cleaned effectively. Advanced material science has paved the way forward making it possible to build structures from inert materials such as plastic and/ or composites, which is something that we must embrace. Aside from the obvious weight savings plastic is superior due to its anti- corrosion characteristics and non porous properties. Like a sponge, the porous walls of concrete, pipes, manholes and other drainage structures are very effective at absorbing and retaining many substances, including largely hydrocarbons. Shane Wormall said “there have been many scenarios where an authority has intended to prosecute against a private company

98

The maintenance undertaken on most city drainage systems is appalling, we are very fortunate that comparatively globally Australia is a very young country and the age of most below ground infrastructure is only now reaching its expiration date, because the structural integrity of our deteriorating drainage systems is not satisfactory and will inevitably result in collapsed structures and road/ verge subsidence. Concrete and steel are not suitable materials to feature within a humid and/ or corrosive environment, such as drainage systems. Aside from the structures, the contents of our systems will result in an increase of public liability claims, due to the fact that we do not clean our drains until such time as a residence becomes flooded… we must stop being reactive and move towards regular cleaning, giving consideration to seasonal factors. Considering the fact that there would be almost zero pollutant trapping devices that would not contain dirty discarded syringes and the fact that if not cleaned, the contents of such a device will bypass and discharge downstream, which could be on to a community public open space….. ornamental community lake…. or like little Nemo said…. The ocean! We must get it together to protect our environment and ourselves!


Poorly Maintained Drainage Systems Are Putting Our Community & Environment At Risk As the photo to the left show, storm water drainage runoff is full of contaminants, ranging from physical nasties such as syringes and condoms as well as regular community waste such as bottles, cans, and packaging. On top of all the physical contaminants there are also the organic contaminants that are breeding grounds for diseases and cause a lot of harm to our natural environment. In Australia, the maintenance undertaken on most city drainage systems is minimal at best, this results in the drains not being properly cleaned or emptied until the drain has flooded. This often means that public places such as parks or reserves become flooded and are covered by the physical and organic contaminants, which are completely unsafe for the community and the environment. Apart from the poor maintenance, In Australia we also have a serious underground infrastructure problem. The drainage systems are primarily concrete and steel, which are both corrosive materials that are completely outdated. There are new alternative materials that are superior in many ways that should be used for replacements and all future drainage work.

We all need to work together to alter the existing infrastructure throughout Australia and ensure that from here on, all future drainage systems are environmentally friendly and safe for our community

For almost a decade now, SmartStream has been actively monitoring, cleaning, and Private drainage cleaning, maintaining maintainingand andreporting reportingononCouncil Council and Private draininfrastructure assets, in theineconomical and practical method. age infrastructure assets, the economical and practical method. With over 10 10 years yearsexperience experienceoffering offeringspecialist specialistservices servicesofofcomplete complete management management over over every every aspect aspect of of any any Storm Storm water waterDrainage DrainageCatchment Catchnetwork, Smartstream are Australia’s leading experts when when it comes ment network, Smartstream are Australia’s leading experts it to drainage comes tosystems. drainage systems. Shane Wormall, Wormall, one of Australia’s leading drainage experts and founder of SmartStream SmartStream isiskeen keentotopromote promote work government andand work withwith bothboth government and and private organisations to alter the existing infrastructure throughout private organisations to alter the existing infrastructure throughout AusAustralia ensure on, environmentally friendly and tralia andand ensure that that fromfrom here here on, environmentally friendly and safe safe systems and used. systems and used. Shane isiscurrently currentlyoffering offering a Free 15 minute “Drainage Phone a Free 15 minute “Drainage Phone ConsulConsultation” will discuss let you any discuss anyexisting of yourdrainage existingproblems, drainage tation” that willthat let you of your problems, future designorprojects or anydrain possible drain maintenance your futureyour design projects any possible maintenance issues to issues to may have. willyour provide expertand advice may have. Shane willShane provide withyour his with experthisadvice put and you put into contact right people who suitspecific your specific situation. intoyou contact with thewith rightthepeople who suit your situation.

FREE “Expert Drainage Advice” To Shane up upononhishisgenerous generous offer a FREE “Drainage Phone To take Shane offer of aofFREE “Drainage Phone Consultation” of the the following following Consultation”valued valued at at $97. $97. Please Please get get in touch in one of ways back. ways and andaatime timewill willbe bearranged arrangedfor forShane Shanetotogive giveyou youa call a call back.

1300 689 833

Phone: Phone Email: solutions@smartstream.net.au As Shane is very busy, he can only take 10 FREE phone consultations each month, so ensure you get in now to avoid disappointment.


Security

Cybersecurity:

constant challenge, constant vigilance national security priorities. In fact, the risk to the Australian economy from cyberattacks and the spread of malicious code by well-funded and highly organised cybercrime groups has been assessed as high. Australia’s national security, economic prosperity and social wellbeing are critically dependent upon the availability, integrity and confidentiality of a range of information and communications technologies. This includes desktop computers, the Internet, mobile communications devices and other computer systems and networks.1 Today’s Threat Landscape

By Keith Price CISSP, CISM, CGEIT Introduction The Internet’s growth has exploded from humble beginnings as a military and academic distributed computer network to become a critical and essential public service utility for all modern and emerging world economies. The Internet has changed many companies’ business models, put some companies out of business, and spawned some of the world’s largest companies (for example Facebook, Google, and Groupon). Increased network connectivity with partners and customers, the explosion of Web services, commercial off the shelf and custom applications, the complexity of today’s IT systems, legacy systems spread throughout an organisation, and the increased threat of organised criminal cyber gangs makes keeping information assets secure more difficult than ever before. With the launch in 2009 of the Australian government’s Cyber Security Strategy, it’s clear that cyber security is now one of Australia’s top tier

100

Cybercrime is a term broadly used to denote a crime involving the use of computers and computer networks for hacking, unauthorised computer intrusions, and denial of service attacks against websites and other Internet facing systems. The largest computer network is of course the Internet. Cyberattacks have been around since companies first opened their networks to the emerging Internet and the World Wide Web. There are four primary threat actors operating in cyberspace: • Lone hackers who range from the curious to the hired gun professional • Cyber hacktivists who are politically-motivated hackers and vandals • Cyber criminals who are smart, skilled, well-funded, and highly organised • Nation states who use their intelligence and security agencies for cyber espionage In the beginning of the cybercrime explosion, cybercriminals usually operated alone or in a closed group of likeminded individuals. These were often young people who had developed skills through research into Internet technologies. Today, a highly sophisticated underground economy provides the malware to enable hackers with minimal computer skills to commit their crimes and sell to the highest bidder the financial information or intellectual property they’ve stolen from individuals, companies, and governments. The profile of these


cybercriminals has also changed and many are not the youngsters that we have come to envision as being the proponents of cybercriminal activities. Today’s cybercriminals are often in their 30s or 40s.

media users. Social media needs to be included as a component of all security awareness programs and a national awareness program in order for some of these threats to be managed.

Cybercriminals are successful for six primary reasons:

Protecting Yourself

• The basic protocol of the Internet – TCP/IP – is inherently insecure and was not designed with security in mind • There are approximately 2 billion people who use the Internet and this creates a massive array of potential victims • The sheer number of machines with unpatched operating systems creates a massive array of potential targets to compromise with the latest malware • Software programmers have not in the majority of cases considered security as a primary part of their software design leaving an unfortunately large number of vulnerabilities that cybercriminals exploit • The Internet is an open network of networks with no central police or regulatory authority

Managing the risk posed to information assets requires: • A clear and communicated policy • Classifying and labelling information • Identification and valuation of IT assets • Procedures for use, distribution, storage, and disposal of information assets • An awareness of the threats faced • An awareness of your security state • Periodic security awareness training for users at all levels of management • Detection, recording, and reporting of intrusions and misuse

• The Internet is boundary less in that cybercriminals can sit at their computers in one country and attack a person in another country, often covering up their tracks in the process.

• Correction of problems

As both consumer and business users continue to flock to social media and networking sites for immediate communications and data sharing, we expect to see increasingly more targeted abuses of personal identity and data. Social media connections will eventually replace email as the primary vector for distributing malicious code and links. The massive amount of personal information online coupled with the lack of user knowledge of how to secure this data will make it far easier for cybercriminals to engage in identity theft and user profiling than ever before. Spear phishing—targeted phishing attacks—will move to Twitter and like technologies because choosing users and groups to exploit through these channels is simple.2

An information security policy is the mandatory rules and practices to direct the organisation on how to manage, protect, distribute, and dispose of its information assets. Information security policy is an essential component of organisational governance as it’s a primary mechanism to enforce rules. Information security policy should be based on a combination of risk assessments, legislation, corporate governance requirements, applicable industry standards, and the organisation’s internal business requirements to protect information assets.

We are already seeing targeted attacks on major corporate bodies that are being planned and developed in military style operations using intelligence that has been gathered using publicly available information on social media sites. This will undoubtedly increase in the next few years unless considerable effort is put in to the education of social

• Periodic assessment

Information assets include all forms and types of electronic and paper-based business related information. One of the first critical steps to effective information protection is the appropriately classify and label information assets. To determine the level of protection that should be applied to varying types of information, an information classification scheme should be established based on the impact on the confidentiality of information should it be compromised or inadvertently put in the public domain. Information is classified according to its

101


Security

criticality (the importance of an information asset to the business) and sensitivity (the consequences of exposure of this information to unauthorised parties). Once classified, information should be subject to a documented and strictly applied labelling regime so that everyone who handles the information would be aware of its importance to the organisation and the protection it requires. Information assets also include the physical assets (such as IT and communications equipment) and the services which support these physical assets (such as power, communications links, and air conditioning). The organisation should maintain an inventory of critical and supporting assets in order to recover from a disaster or for other business purposes such as insurance or financial asset management reasons. The process of developing an inventory of assets is an important first step in risk management. This inventory should be detailed enough to include the type of asset, business value, physical location, operating system (and patching level), software licenses, and other related information. Information can be and often is compromised through the careless use, distribution, storage, or disposal of the information or through uncontrolled re-use or disposal of information processing equipment. To reduce this risk, a documented policy and operating procedures should be prepared for system activities associated with critical information processing and communications equipment. These documented procedures should be considered formal operating procedures authorised and enforced by management. In order to properly defend yourself from the many, often clever, ways cybercriminals use to directly compromise your information assets or indirectly compromise your information processing systems through malware, you have to have an awareness of the threats you, your company, and your industry faces. Many sources of information related to threats and vulnerabilities are available via professional associations, industry groups, sector-based computer emergency response teams (CERTs) and national CERTs. One of the best sources for this information is the myriad information security and Internet threat reports published each year. Threat reports from Microsoft, SANS, Cisco, Symantec, McAfee, Verizon, Sophos, and others are available for download. These and other research publications provide analyses of attacks, reviews of known vulnerabilities, and the latest developments in malicious code. From this research, it is possible to learn what attackers are after and how they’ll go about attacking you and your assets. You’ll then be in a much better position to defend yourself

102

Once you know some of the ways cybercriminals will go about attacking you (it’s impossible to know all the ways with ever evolving malware), you can then review your defences to determine how well prepared you are.3 Assessments should be performed on a regular basis to address changes occurring in the general business environment, information protection requirements, and evolving threats and vulnerabilities. One of the best resources for managing risk related to IT is the U.S. NIST Special Publication 800-30 Risk Management Guide for Information Technology Systems. This guide provides a common foundation for experienced and inexperienced, technical, and non-technical personnel who support or use the risk management process for their IT systems.4 Awareness of the threats you face and the available safeguards to protect your information assets is the first line of defence for the security of information systems and networks. Awareness is the ‘what’ component of the education strategy for an organisation which tries to change the behaviour and practice of its targeted audience (for example employees, general public, etc.) and it is a distinct element from training. This is why the awareness activities occur on an ongoing basis, using a variety of delivery methods and are less formal and shorter than training.5 People are our last line of defence but can also be our weakest link if their training is neglected. Awareness training allows individuals to recognise information security and IT risk concerns and respond accordingly. The detection and reporting of system misuse and unauthorised access and intrusions is critical to understanding what’s going on in your environment on a day to day basis and protecting your information assets. Cyber criminals understand human nature and play heavily on that in their attack methodologies. Investigations contribute not only to subsequent litigation and support to law enforcement agencies (if appropriate), but also to asset recovery, identifying the root cause of the incident, preventing future occurrences, assessing the real damage or loss caused by the incident, identifying peripheral issues/problem areas, and recommending corrective actions. Appropriate investigative techniques should be used at all times and legal considerations taken into account when developing an investigative plan.6 Security managers must understand ‘chain-ofevidence’ requirements in order to assure that evidence is maintained in a usable format if and when the time comes. Once the results of investigations and security assessments are known, corrective action can begin. It is operationally critical to ensure that


effective corrective actions are taken to address identified weaknesses, including those identified as a result of potential or actual security incidents or through security alerts issued by vendors and other trusted sources. These actions must be planned, prioritised, and implemented in a controlled manner following the organisation’s testing and change management processes. Routine self-assessments are an important means of identifying inappropriate or ineffective security procedures and controls, reminding employees of their security-related responsibilities, and demonstrating management’s commitment to security. Reviews of documentation, walk-throughs of facilities, and interviews with key personnel, while providing useful information, are not sufficient to ensure that controls, especially computer-based controls, are operating effectively. Examples of tests that should be conducted are network scans to identify known vulnerabilities, analyses of router and switch settings and firewall rules, reviews of other system software settings, and tests to see if unauthorised system access is possible (through penetration testing). Tests performed should consider the risks of authorised users exceeding authorisation as well as unauthorised users (e.g., external parties, hackers) gaining access.7 Identified risks and their factors (that is, the business value of assets, threat agents, vulnerabilities, likelihood of occurrence, and the magnitude of impacts) should be constantly monitored and reviewed to identify any changes. Changes can occur due to new systems deployments, retirement of legacy systems, new application and operating system vulnerabilities announced by the vendor, new malware attack vectors, and the constant threat of human error in system configuration and hardening.

exposure is so small or the cost too great to eliminate the risk. Other cyber risks must be mitigated because the potential damage is too great and the cost to bring this risk down to an acceptable level makes for a reasonable investment. About the author: Keith Price, CISSP, CISM, CGEIT is the National Director of the Australian Information Security Association. References 1.

http://www.ag.gov.au/cybersecurity

2.

2011 Threats Predictions by McAfee Labs

3.

Analysis by the Australian Defence Signals Directorate (DSD) revealed that 70% of intrusions targeting government information systems could have been prevented by following just four mitigation strategies listed in their Top 35 mitigation strategies document (available online at http://www.dsd.gov.au/ infosec/top35mitigationstrategies.htm).

4.

http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/PubsSPs.html

5.

The new users’ guide: How to raise information security awareness, European Network and Information Security Agency (ENISA), 2008

6.

Information Asset Protection Guideline, ASIS International, 2007

7.

Security Self-Assessment Guide for Information Technology Systems, US NIST Special Publication 800-26, 2001

Conclusion Opening your corporate networks to the Internet to facilitate lightning fast communications with customers and business partners exposes your organisation to increased cyber risks. The alternative of operating a closed, isolated network just doesn’t make sense in the second decade of the 21st century. No organisation can afford to eliminate all risks including cyber risks, the cost/benefit justifications just aren’t there. The trade-off between risk exposure and risk management is becoming increasingly complex, and there’s no silver bullet solution to managing risk. Therefore each organisation needs to establish its own cyber risk tolerance threshold. Some cyber risks will be accepted because the

103


Five ways governments open doors to cyber criminals AVG (AU/NZ)’s tips for keeping communication open - and crooks out The cyber threat to governments was rammed home this year with reports of the suspected hacking of the parliamentary computers of 10 federal ministers, including the Prime Minister. Shutting the door on cyber criminals is no longer enough. Staff are potentially going directly to the baddies every time they click on a link, use their smartphone or visit a website. Today’s governments need a lock-down process that constantly monitors for new and emerging threats from a variety of channels. Lloyd Borrett, Security Evangelist for AVG (AU/NZ) Pty Ltd, says, “Managing security requires a fine balancing act. Governments need to be open, transparent and available to the communities they serve, without compromising the integrity of their networks and the privacy of information. “The same Internet connection that lets constituents pay rates online can let in a Trojan horse. Staff can use smartphones to access sensitive documents. Social media channels used to engage the community can be hijacked to damage reputations. The same people governments hire to help them can cripple a network all because they didn’t exercise caution in their use of the web and mobile.” AVG has highlighted five doorways through which cyber criminals can access government data – and how to stop them. Door #1 – Social Networks Danger: TRUST. Social media has changed how governments communicate. US President Barack Obama launched his re-election campaign with a message on Twitter, a status update on Facebook and an email blast to millions. Social networking equals sharing. People trust people they know. Users are more likely to click an infected link if it comes from a trusted colleague or friend. Solution: Use AVG’s free ‘scan before you click’ LinkScanner technology to ensure shared links and files are checked and safe. Beef up security policies and give staff clear guidelines: 40% of organisations allow access to social networking technology, but only 23% have security policies in place. Door #2 – Instant Messaging Danger: Viruses and other malware can be hidden in Instant Messaging (IM) files. Introduce policies to educate and control IM use. Some IM services link your screen name to your email address when you register. Having your email address so readily available can increase spam and phishing attacks. Solution: Don’t use an email address that can be easily identified by your IM username. Door #3 – Insider Threats • Danger: Most malware is introduced to networks by employees. • Solution: Background checks on potential employees especially IT and technical staff are essential. High-risk departments should use advanced tools to conduct criminal history and social security searches. Trust your gut, educate staff on keeping data and network

104

safe and enforce a robust internal security policy combined with a security audit. Door #4 – Don’t Lose Remote Control • Danger: Allowing staff to use their own smartphones, tablets, and PCs for work increases the risk of malware getting inside your network. CIA director John Deutch was stripped of his security clearance after he downloaded and stored hundreds of classified documents on his unsecured home computer! • Solution: Prevent staff from using their own machines or use virtualisation technology to create a virtual safe-zone within your hardware - like an embassy does in a foreign country. Establish a strong set of security controls that ensure all staff only use hardware with appropriate Internet security software in place, with automatic updates working and subject to regular audit procedures. Door #5 – USB Sticks and Smartphones •

Danger: Plug-in memory USB sticks and portable drives are good at spreading malware. Allowing staff to insert storage devices into company computers unchecked is an unnecessary risk. Email-equipped smartphones pose the same network risks as desktop computers. Smartphones can spread malware onto other network devices and hackers have used text messages to guide unsuspecting users onto web sites containing infected code.

Solution: Automatically check removable devices using AVG’s business security software, or run a manual scan before accessing any files on the stick. Create policies to keep personal and business drives separate on any machine.

Borrett says, “Keeping the door open to the people governments represent doesn’t have to mean rolling out the welcome mat to cyber criminals. “AVG protects local, state and federal government networks in realtime against the latest threats with advanced, next-generation, smallfootprint, best-of-breed security products, including layered protection that defeats malware plus spam, online threats and identity theft.”


Think security

…THINK ASIAL When it comes to protecting your business, property or family you cannot afford to take any chances. Always use an appropriately licensed security provider and make sure that they are a member of the Australian Security Industry Association (ASIAL). ASIAL is the peak national body for the security industry. Our members are bound by a Code of Professional Conduct and are committed to providing the highest standard of service and excellence. To find an ASIAL member in your local area visit www.asial.com.au

‘The peak body for security professionals’ corporate design: ©2010 www.webfx2.com.au


Security

Safety

Measuring a liveable city is always a chart stopper, and security is one of the measures that assists a city in achieving this ultimate award. We see our major cities of Australia eagerly accepting the anointment as a safe city, as the benefits can be measured in growth, investment, and tourism and for the residents, health and happiness. The Economist Int elligence Unit1, part of the Worldwide Cost of Living survey, surveyed cities based on 30 factors such as healthcare, culture and environment, and education and personal safety. The top 10 most liveable cities of the 140 cities surveyed, as ranked by The Economist Intelligence Unit in 2010 were: 1. Vancouver, Canada 2. Melbourne, Australia 3. Vienna, Austria 4. Toronto, Canada 5. Calgary, Canada 6. Helsinki, Finland 7. Sydney, Australia 8. (equal) Perth, Australia 8. (equal) Adelaide, Australia 10. Auckland, New Zealand The ranking scored each city from 0-100 on 30 factors spread across five areas: stability, health care, culture and environment, education, and infrastructure. These numbers were then weighted and combined to produce an overall figure. Having four Australian cities in the top 10 is a testament to the Australian ‘way of life’, however to maintain such a privileged status, cities must continue to keep up the fight in all areas forming the basis of the assessment. Security underpins each of the five reviewed and scored areas of stability, health care, culture and environment, education and infrastructure. A surprise to many in the international arena, the liveable rankings placed London at 54 and New York at 56, however a different survey2 with a focus of the greatest city (a city with a ‘buzz’), placed London and New York as the two greatest cities in the world. Of note Sydney achieved equal 9th of the 75 cities surveyed. When we compare differences in the surveys, we recognise that London and New York scored low in The Economist Intelligence Unit survey in their “stability” scores. “Stability” reflects residents’ fear of terror, crime and conflict, and it was recognised that no city in the top 50 got within ten points of New York’s score of 70.

in the City

So for our stable cities of Melbourne, Sydney, Perth and Adelaide who achieved a top 10 ranking, do the residents feel more comfortable in their environment? Not according to our daily papers who bring stories of street violence, gangs, home invasions, corruption, manipulated crime figures, public transport and transit problems and the all too regular incidents at our clubs and pubs. Although we do recognise that we are a lucky country when comparing what is recognised as terror activity. No two cities in developing a ‘safe city’ are identical especially when responding to local conditions and analysis of incidents etc. We do recognise a common thread in achieving a safe city and that is in cooperation between all stakeholders. Be it a city council, police, private security, welfare organisations and commercial operators within our entertainment precincts, successful outcomes are not achievable without purpose, planning, and partnerships. Many stakeholders are members of industry associations or professional bodies who have a responsibility to their members to facilitate representation in partnering with government, police and local councils in providing a more stable environment and safer place to live. The Australian Security Industry Association Limited (ASIAL)3 is one such body. ASIAL is the peak national body for the Australian Security Industry. Established in 1969, ASIAL represents approximately 85 per cent of the security industry in Australia who employ in excess of 140,000 people who can play a partnering role in maintaining safe cities. ASIAL naturally brings to the table a security approach. Some cities will have an emphasis on a CCTV network and other technology and the sharing of that technology with stakeholders and some will utilise the eyes and ears of the human resources at the coalface to achieve outcomes. To create a ‘stable’ environment takes many and varied approaches. One such program has been established in conjunction with the South Australian Police and the Private Security Industry. Titled, ‘Operation Griffin’, and based on the London model, ASIAL sponsored international speakers to come to Australia to present their success stories and encourage development of similar programs. The SA program is recognising success and in turn developing a culture of sustainability. See breakout box.

South Australian Police – Community Safety Model In July 2010, the South Australia Police implemented a state-wide community safety model with the private security industry to address security and community safety issues. The project was based on the United Kingdom Project Griffin and was developed to enhance police and private security partnerships based on the key elements of awareness training, information sharing, and observing and reporting expectations relating to community safety and counter-terrorism.

107


Security

As a cooperative model, Project Griffin is an example of a stronger partnership approach between the private security industry and police to general crime prevention – a resource that is well placed to act as ‘eyes and ears’ for any suspicious activity in the community. The key aims of the South Australia approach is to ensure the focus remains on preventing crime through partnerships and working together. Although the British model of Project Griffin had an initial emphasis on counter-terrorism issues within the City London only, the South Australian model has been adapted to engage the private security industry in the broader aspect of community safety and crime prevention and has been rolled out across the state. The South Australia Police, in consultation with the private security sector, adopted a state-wide model of police and private security interaction in order to encourage the private security industry to work in partnership with the police to deter, disrupt and support pro-active operations regarding community safety issues including general crime and terrorism related activity. The success of Project Griffin relies on building relationships and sharing information between the private security industry and police. This engages and empowers participants, enabling them to become a highly-effective part of the extended crime reduction network. The South Australian model engages the private security industry in partnerships based on the key elements of awareness training, information sharing and observe and report expectations relating to community safety and counter terrorism. The main strand of the South Australian model is about the police sharing local information with key trusted partners in the community, namely the private security industry, by providing input through appropriate training and regular contacts in respect to recent and current crime trends, issues and forthcoming events. The concept aims to train the private security industry in various disciplines so that they are better equipped to be of assistance to police in times of crises – an effective crime reduction strategy to ensure the safety of the community. It educates members of the private security industry, through ‘awareness training days’, provides an opt-in registration process and has clear boundaries surrounding the use and deployment of those members of the security industry that have opted in. This approach to wider community safety issues takes advantage of the growth in the numbers of the private security industry operatives and is an example of a stronger and effective partnership approach to general crime prevention. The South Australian model of Project Griffin aims to reduce crime by: • Engaging the ‘guardians’; • Establishing networks; • Target hardening; • Increasing the likelihood of detection;

108

• Reducing criminal opportunity; and • Maximising strategic alliances. The key to crime prevention is strong links between police and the community including private security providers. The latter, as an industry, are in a unique position to hear something, see something and then say something. Project Griffin, through the broad awareness training program provided by police, places the private security industry in an even better position to hear something, see something and then say something. The strong partnership approach of the South Australian model has been successful in building better relationships with the private security industry thereby empowering and engaging participants to become a highly effective part of the extended crime prevention network within the community. The South Australian model has not only combined many of the elements of the British model of Project Griffin but has expanded the initiative as a whole-of-state cooperative model to include all police Local Service Areas and all sectors of the private security industry, through information sharing, in preventing crime and disorder – not just terrorism related activity - within the community.

As indicated other programs rely more on technology and without the investment and development of new technology, Australian cities would struggle to achieve world recognition of ‘safe cities’. Australian security clients continue to embrace leading edge technology to support their organisations in providing a safe and secure workplace. That safe and secure environment is now expected in our cities and the demand on Governments, Police and Local Governments to provide that safe and secure environment requires significant partnering with the private security industry. One of the most discussed technological devices has been the use of security or closed-circuit television (CCTV) to provide law enforcement and security personnel with better visibility throughout their facilities. As a benchmark it is estimated that there are at least 500,000 live CCTV cameras in Britain today, and a person walking the streets of London can expect to be filmed dozens of times each day. Whilst the cameras are useful in live identification, they also play an important role for the investigator following an event. Significant investment is made on camera installation however one must also invest in the back end of monitoring the cameras, recording the footage and making the video available on a compatible and universal platform for law enforcement agencies when and where appropriate. ASIAL is a leader in this area and supports standards that require all monitoring stations be suitably accredited and operate in a professional manner with procedures to support community


expectations in the operations of such surveillance devices. When selecting an organisation to monitor alarm and security surveillance devices, one should confirm that the monitoring company is appropriately licensed and the monitoring centre is certified to the Australian Standards 2201.2-2004 (Intruder Alarm Systems – Central Stations). ASIAL provides a public list of monitoring centres that have been certified through the Associations process. 4 The monitoring of electronic security equipment, CCTV presents a challenge for organisations not only in the selection of quality equipment and its operation but also the legislative requirements and privacy issues. As with security, there is no uniform national legislation covering CCTV and the associated privacy issues. The uncertainty of operational accountability and level of public intrusiveness exercised by private organisations operating CCTV continues to attract public and government interest. Several publications provide guidance and information regarding the issues surrounding the use of CCTV. 5 Despite concerns over the use of CCTV, its use in Australia is now widespread with significant public support when the value of CCTV is demonstrated as a means of crime prevention and as a proactive security measure. In Victoria the Melbourne City council has been proactive in the development of CCTV programs and partners with several private security operators in the implementation of security surveillance and response measures. One program has been the trialling of CCTV patrol vehicles. Two vehicles were equipped with 360 degree CCTV cameras, with footage available in real time and recorded and made available for investigative purposes. See breakout box detailing Council comments.

Melbourne City Council trials CCTV patrol vehicles to enhance city safety Two security vehicles that have been fitted with 360 degree CCTV surveillance cameras will patrol city hotspots over a six-month trial period. Lord Mayor Robert Doyle said the surveillance cars would record in real time, with footage downloaded at the end of each shift to Council’s security control room to be accessed later if required. “These vehicles will be valuable tools, acting as visual deterrents and assisting in the detection of street crime, violence, crowd numbers and contributing to the Council’s increasing arsenal in addressing city safety,” the Lord Mayor said. “They will operate on Friday and Saturday nights between 10pm and 6am, and will complement the additional 31 safe city cameras, which brought our total in the CBD to 54.

“These surveillance vehicles will be instantly recognisable. The CCTV cameras will have a 360 degree view of the street and surrounds for the car crews and our camera operators to observe and record activities in selected areas of the city. “While the vehicles will patrol the whole CBD, they can be used in the known hot spot areas where necessary and areas of the city where we don’t currently have CCTV such as Docklands and Southbank. The beauty of these cars is that they can be called to certain areas if it is felt there is a need to provide extra surveillance resources. “The six-month trial will cost $150,000. I make no apologies for the cost – it is about creating a safer environment and sending a clear message that we are doing all we can to address the issue of city safety. “If this latest initiative improves safety in the CBD by helping innocent law abiding citizens feel safer and assist in detecting the minority who are intent on committing crime, it is a small price to pay”, he said. The Lord Mayor said there was no doubting the success of Council’s CCTV program in terms of making the city’s streets safer. More than 1000 on-the-spot arrests had been made by Victoria Police in the last two years alone as a result of footage captured and provided to police. “Council thoroughly considered the privacy issues surrounding the trialling of these CCTV cars and is satisfied that the initiative is within the remit of local government and does not breach the Privacy Act. “All recorded vision will be strictly managed in accordance with Council’s current safe city camera usage protocols, to ensure compliance with privacy provisions.” The Lord Mayor said the program would be evaluated after six months, and if the trial was deemed successful, funding would be sought through Council’s budget process to have them permanently operational. “City safety remains a major priority and challenge for Council, and our cameras program forms just one part of a suite of responses, including safe city taxi ranks, improved city lighting, improvements to safety through urban design, and improved management of licensed venues,” he said. “Our approach will continue to be to work collaboratively with the relevant agencies, particularly Victoria Police, to ensure that we can provide a safe environment, reduce crime levels and help detect crime in Melbourne.” Privacy issues in the use of security technology are and should be a priority concern for society. ASIAL encourages the selection of suitably qualified and licensed security operators. The association’s slogan of ‘think security – think ASIAL’ continues to reinforce the need to engage professional security providers.

109


Security

Although not a national requirement, the majority of jurisdictions require security providers, advisers, security sales people and technicians responsible for installation of electronic security equipment to be licensed. ASIAL provides a public search database for providers of security services. The corporate member database can search by services offered, State/Territory and region. The search service is found at http://www.asial.com.au/FindASecurityProvider. Being a ‘safe city’ is not just a capital city CBD requirement. New South Wales has responded with targeted safe security programs in several inner suburban areas including Redfern and Glebe. The City of Sydney recognised that crime in Glebe was a genuine community concern and worked with a range of groups and individuals in forming genuine partnerships and developing compassionate and innovative solutions to the community safety needs. The City recognised that there is no “one size fits all” solution to the complex causes of crime and anti-social behaviour. Accordingly the City focused its resources into preventing crime from occurring in the first place. See Breakout box relating to aspects of the City of Sydney’s Glebe Plan. “The Glebe Community Safety Plan 2009-2012, the first of its kind for the area, is a three-year strategy, which recognises the considerable strengths of stakeholders and the community and its ability to work together in developing local solutions to its own unique crime and safety problems. The City of Sydney has been committed to a crime prevention approach that: –– Delivers a measurable reduction in crime –– Improves quality of life for all members of the City community –– Delivers best practice, evidence-based and economically sustainable solutions that provide the greatest benefit to all members of the City community –– Works in partnership, and in meaningful consultation with other levels of government, business and residential communities –– Includes an active advocacy role that promotes comprehensive and coordinated public policy responses to crime –– Recognises that crime and the causes of crime are complex and require multi-faceted strategies which address the needs of specific locations and target groups –– Recognises the need for primary prevention and early intervention.

interdependent and embrace the activities of every group and individual with a stake in the community. They reflect that the safest communities are not those with the most police and prisons, but those with the strongest community structures, including cohesive families and socialisation and economic opportunities. A central theme of this plan is therefore shared responsibility, that we all have a role to play in building effective partnerships to meet the emerging challenges in community safety.” Security providers as part of the community play an important part in the cooperative approach and partnering with the community in providing a safer environment. The Redfern-Waterloo Community Safety Plan was an endorsed Council program and tackled the underlying causes of crime through community strengthening activities and the prevention of community harm. The Redfern-Waterloo Community Safety Taskforce, a forum that included a broad cross section of Government and Non-Government organisations as well as residents and local businesses, put the plan together. It recognised that the key to creating safer communities was to work together on a range of identified issues in making communities safer places to live, work and visit. Although agencies are aware that much of the challenge continues, the Redfern-Waterloo Community Safety Plan achieved some encouraging results in its three years of implementation, with statistics from Redfern Police Local Area Command indicating decreases in the offences of: • Break and Enter - down 26% • Stealing - down 24% • Robbery - down 14% • Stolen Vehicle - down 14% and • Assault - down 7%. In Western Australia, the City of Perth has developed a crime prevention plan to combat anti social behaviour. As reported in WAtoday.com.au the plan is to make Perth a safer place. Anti-social behaviour is a major concern for Perth. Encouraging more movie theatres, better availability of toilets and linking train services to taxi pickups at train stations could be the new tools in the inner city fight against crime.

–– Respects the right of all community members to use public spaces

They are some of the ideas being floated in the City of Perth’s latest crime prevention plan.

The Sydney city council identifies the key to success for the Glebe Community Safety Plan will be achieving broad agreement of the need to work cooperatively. Crime and safety issues are complex,

The plan, which was developed in conjunction with police, government departments and community and business groups, looks at options for increasing community safety in the next three years.

110


It identifies four priority areas to tackle -  a lack of activity in the city outside business hours, excessive use of alcohol and other drugs, anti-social behaviour and safer and more welcoming environments for the public. Among the strategies to boost after-hours activity are encouraging more diverse venues, such as small bars and music venues, having small vendors open near transport locations, and encouraging more cinemas and galleries to be developed. To combat excessive alcohol and drug use, strategies include targeting underage and street drinking and managing the impact of party bus and boat operations, while the plan advocates reviewing the availability of public toilets and water and increasing these services in hotspots at night. Suggested strategies include extending the CCTV network; and developing “safe” taxi ranks, particularly in Northbridge. “Ongoing efforts and strategies... need to continue and be directed at hot spots,” the plan says. “Although there has been some media reports indicating improvements in safety and crime data, this has often been overshadowed by high profile, negative crime stories,” the plan says. Skilled security professionals are capable of solving a security problem without detracting from the environment. Excessive visual security measures may be inappropriate or give the wrong message in that ‘crime does occur here’. Such an impression may not attract investors, owners, and tenants or provide a degree of comfort for occupiers or visitors. On the other hand security options including electronic access control, CCTV, managed reception/security control points, can present security options that deliver the message that ‘we care’ and that the area provides a safe feeling and a pleasure to be there. Suitable environmental security measures including appropriate lighting, space management and a culture of compliance and acceptance of procedures, naturally support this. Whatever the security initiative, security is an investment in a safe and secure environment. The selection of the security measures must take into account the requirements of all stakeholders. One must recognise the need for security solutions that meet the basic needs of all whilst providing the additional security measures required by some. As indicated successful outcomes are not achievable without purpose, planning, and partnerships. ASIAL’s advice is to ensure your security provider is appropriately qualified, experienced and licensed.

References 1. http://www.economist.com/blogs/gulliver/2010/02/liveability_rankings 2. http://www.timeout.com/travel/features/362/the-worldsgreatest-cityr 3. ASIAL - http://www.asial.com.au/ 4. View the current ASIAL approved monitoring station list at http://www.asial.com.au/AlarmMonitoringCentreCertification 5. The following publications provide further information regarding the issues surrounding the use of CCTV. • The Western Australian Police CCTV Guidelines • The Victorian Law Reform Commission – Surveillance in Public Places • Northern Territory CCTV Code of Practice • New South Wales CCTV in Public Places Guidelines • Commonwealth Organisation of Australian Governments (COAG) National Approach to CCTV

Peter Johnson, Manager-Compliance, Australian Security Industry Association (ASIAL) About ASIAL ASIAL is the recognised peak national body for the private security industry in Australia. Established in 1969, ASIAL’s members represent approximately 85% of the security sector. ASIAL has played a key role in driving Australian standards, developing codes of conduct and raising the level of professionalism within the industry. Visit www.asial.com.au for further information.  111


Securing public infrastructure Public infrastructure such as depots, libraries, sports grounds, youth centres and other municipal facilities play an important role in community service and vitality, but unfortunately they are often an attractive target for thieves and vandals. The cost from the damage to and loss of public property can quickly run into the millions of dollars, making an effective security system an essential component of any facility management strategy. With more than a century’s worth of experience, ADT Security is the world’s largest electronic security company. In Australia, the company is one of only a handful of security suppliers that has achieved Type 1 certification for its alarm installation and alarm monitoring services. This certification recognises ADT’s ability to support the high security sector, which includes many departments and agencies within government. ADT Security’s high-level security alarm monitoring platform is called ADT IP Connect. At its heart is the IP Connect Gateway, which connects an organisation’s security system to a network of their choice – wired, wireless or both. Not only does this substantially increase the integrity of alarm signalling, but it also paves the way for the development of many new and innovative remote services, including visual verification of alarms – an exciting capability for which there is growing demand. According to Mark Norton, Managing Director, ADT Security Australia, the movement towards IP security services is gathering pace. “Businesses are increasingly deploying broadband wide area networks based on IP technology. The corresponding increase in available bandwidth and the ‘always on’ connection capability have provided an ideal platform for the development of next generation remote security monitoring services such as video verification services.” The IP Connect Gateway supports communication via a number of paths – constantly polling the connection between the alarm panel and the ADT Security Response Centre to test the integrity of the link. To provide greater protection from determined intruders, alarm traffic is encrypted and the frequency with which the connection is polled is entirely flexible.

While IP security services open the door for the adoption of more advanced security systems, facility managers are also demanding more control over these systems. To provide clients with the ability to access and monitor alarm activity and account information 24 hours a day, seven days a week, ADT Security offers a web-based customer service portal called ADT Select. This real-time technology allows users to retrieve up-to-date account details accessed, anywhere, anytime, over a highly secure network. ADT Select is a very transparent service, showing all access activity, alarm activity, and instructions being followed, from every event which has arisen. This extensive level of site information allows for highly functional and informative reporting, with more than 20 specialised documents for customised reporting solutions including information about the alarm history, schedules, callouts and zone lists. A further significant benefit of ADT Select is the ability for customers to effectively manage their sub-contractors. Using ADT Select, customers can access information as and when needed to assist the various office managers such as those in charge of security, EH&S, service, HR, risk and compliance, facilities or sales. For example, a security manager might use ADT Select to monitor the various sub-contractors on site at a given time, such as fire testers, cleaners or building maintenance workers, ensuring each individual logs in upon arrival and logs out when leaving. For more information call ADT Security on 131 238 or visit www.adtsecurity.com.au.

In the event that the primary communication path fails, a back-up path ensures the alarm signal continues to be transmitted. In fact, a second back-up path can be configured to continue communication in the highly unlikely event that the first back-up fails. Offering absolute flexibility, the paths can be configured in any combination to suit the risks and individual requirements of the organisation. By employing multiple paths and regular polling, the ADT Security Response Centre is able to quickly verify if an alarm panel connection is cut or otherwise compromised and respond immediately. Using a regular phone line (PSTN) alone, for example, can mean that it takes up to 24 hours for a fault to be reported. The IP Connect Gateway also allows for the omission of a PSTN connection altogether, saving the cost of line rental and call costs. Norton believes these are among the reasons why many organisations have already made the switch to ADT IP Connect. Scalability is another key benefit. “Demand for video verification services will soon reach a tipping point, with more and more organisations asking for greater control over their security system and improved visibility of onsite activity. The power and flexibility inherent in the ADT IP Connect platform provides organisations with the readiness to move with the boom in video integration, whether they adopt this technology now, or sometime in the future”, says Norton.

112

About ADT Security With more than a century’s worth of experience, ADT Security is the world’s largest electronic security company, providing electronic security solutions to more than seven million residential, commercial and retail customers worldwide. ADT Security’s products include alarm systems and integrated security applications that link access control, CCTV, electronic article surveillance and source tagging systems. www.adtsecurity.com.au Master Licences: VIC No. 65201491P WA No. SA37852 SA No. ISL152299 NSW No. 405187443 ACT No. 17501009 QLD No. 3258669


ALARM & FIRE MONITORING | INTRUSION ALARMS | VISUAL SURVEILLANCE/CCTV | ACCESS CONTROL | VISUAL VERIFICATION | INTEGRATED SOLUTIONS |GUARD & PATROL RESPONSE

TOTAL SECURITY SOLUTIONS

Security solutions without compromise If you’re responsible for protecting people and property in government or large commercial environments, there is simply no room for compromise. Fortunately ADT Security has got you covered. With vast experience in the government sector, ADT Security provides electronic security to millions of commercial, government and residential customers across your street and around the world. Our tailored solutions range from intrusion alarms, smoke detection and life safety through to closed circuit television (CCTV), access control, radio frequency identification (RFID) and wireless networks. When it comes to security, we know that one size does not fit all. Combining intelligent technology with vigilant expert security teams we can design, install, monitor and maintain integrated systems to match your needs. To find out more, call 131 238 or visit www.adtsecurity.com.au/commercial

Master Licences: VIC No. 65201491P | WA No. SA37852 | SA No. ISL152299 | NSW No. 405187443 | ACT No. 17501009 | QLD No.3258669


Securing the Safety of Government Facilities How to Address Key Challenges and Mitigate Risk Customer-focused security and safety initiatives are top priorities for the Government sector, given the high-risk nature of the industry and the public interest Government activities attract. Having the appropriate strategies in place to protect the Government’s assets, people, reputation and highly sensitive information is critical in securing Australia’s Government facilities. While each department, facility or council precinct has its own unique risk factors, there are common security challenges across the sector:

• Customer service training focused on communication, helpfulness, attitude and interpersonal skills

• Managing Government protocols and access compliance for dignitaries, officials, visitors, staff and contractors

• Conflict resolution strategies to neutralise conflicts and avoid escalation of aggression

• Sourcing security personnel with the appropriate Government and/or Defence clearances (‘Baseline’ to ‘Top Secret – Positive Vet’)

• Cultural awareness

• Maintaining the privacy and confidentiality of Government information • Monitoring for protestor activity • Unauthorised access, theft and vandalism • Threats including domestic and international terrorism. The first step in addressing these challenges is to conduct a site safety/security risk assessment to identify the individual site risk factors. This should form the basis of a detailed security plan which outlines the strategies, responsibilities and contingency plans to mitigate the risks involved. Success Factors There are a number of key success factors in effectively managing the safety and security of a Government site: • Comprehensive security risk assessment of the site, resulting in sitespecific security, access control and safety recommendations • Detailed security plan with clear guidelines and responsibilities • An experienced, highly trained, vetted and cleared security team to implement the plan • Effective communication between the security team and the management and staff at the site • Robust occupational health and safety procedures • The ability to immediately deploy additional security resources to scale up in the event of an emergency, threat or additional security requirements (such as a protest or demonstration). An experienced security team which has completed a comprehensive training programme tailored to each Government establishment is vital to an effective and efficient security operation. The team should be prepared for any situation and be capable of effectively responding to threats and emergencies with minimal disruption to the site. The comprehensive training programme should encompass: • Risk management – identifying risks, mitigating those risks and determining the safest response 114

• Investigative procedures • Emergency response including base level fire training, bomb threats and site evacuation • Compliance with OHS policies and procedures, focusing on the ability to identify and control workplace hazards • Report writing to ensure that all security related matters are appropriately recorded and communicated • Government privacy and confidentiality protocols. David Cheatham, General Manager ACT for MSS Security, agreed that the experience and training of the security team directly correlates to the overall successful security operation of the site. “Providing comprehensive and customised training for our security personnel gives them the qualifications, skills and competencies they need to ensure the security and safety of our clients’ sites,” explained David. “The Government sector is a unique one and the training programme needs to reflect this. We expect our people to be proactive and go that extra mile – so we give them the tools and support they need to achieve this. MSS Security is so committed to training that it has established its own Registered Training Organisation to support its clients’ needs.” A critical factor in successfully managing the security of high-profile government sites is ensuring the security officers deployed have attained the relevant Government or Defence clearance status (from ‘Baseline’ through to ‘Top Secret – Positive Vet’) as directed by each department. This can be a challenge as, in the case of a ‘Top Secret – Positive Vet’ clearance, the vetting process can take up to 12 months. “MSS Security has implemented a security clearance programme to identify and nominate suitable candidates to progress through the Government or Defence clearance accreditation process. When the candidate achieves the appropriate clearance status they are added to the pool of cleared security officers available for core or additional security duties,” stated David. “We have worked closely with our Government clients, including various Federal and State departments, embassies and Defence installations, to develop and implement this resourcing and clearance initiative with excellent results.” With the right planning, training and people, any potential threats or hazards can be averted, mitigating the risks in securing high security Government facilities.


You’re only as strong as your weakest link

When it comes to safety and security, you can’t afford second best. As Australia’s largest security company,

MSS Security prides itself on the calibre of its security

MSS Security has unrivalled experience in protecting

personnel. Our comprehensive training programme

the nation’s high security Government sites.

facilitated by the MSS Training Academy (RTO) ensures

We work closely with Government departments and installations to support their security objectives and protocols ensuring a seamless security service.

that all officers are fully equipped to effectively deal with any situation, mitigating any potential risk involved. MSS Security’s established pool of security cleared (from ‘Baseline’ to ‘Top Secret – Positive Vet’) and

What makes MSS Security the industry leader? • Largest pool of highly trained Government and/ or Defence cleared security officers to specifically meet the needs of the Government sector • Specialist management and security teams skilled in delivering tailored, confidential services for high security Government sites • Comprehensive Government training programme • MSS Training Academy (RTO accredited).

trained officers allows the immediate deployment of highly trained officers to rapidly respond to threats, emergencies and any additional resourcing requests. Our specialist contract management teams are experienced in conducting thorough site safety/ security risk assessments which form the basis of a detailed security plan. Our expertise, effective planning, innovative infrastructure and depth of resources provide you with a strong partner to ensure the safety and security of your Government facility.

Leaders in Security For more information, please contact David Cheatham on 0401 776 428 or david.cheatham@msssecurity.com.au

Security Licence Numbers: ACT 17501687 | NSW 408742075 | NT 117 | Qld 41299 | SA ISL 177435 | Tas 5784 | Vic 409-987-30S | WA SA33781

Integrity | Teamwork | Attitude | Performance | Passion


Ensuring safety & security in the Griffith CBD Council chooses a Bosch IP Surveillance Solution With a thriving economy and a young and growing population Griffith has quickly expanded from a quiet rural town to a vibrant city. Throughout this process, Griffith Council and NSW Police have faced challenges common to all fast growing rural centres in Australia – an increase in crime in public areas. Griffith Council and the Griffith Chamber of Commerce were the initial drivers of the project and they were supported by residents who wanted to see measures in place to counter the crime trend. In order to increase the safety and security of the Griffith CBD it was decided to employ an IP video surveillance system as part of a total crime prevention strategy. With no existing surveillance system in place, Griffith Council, in conjunction with the NSW Police Department, identified an area of Banna Ave that was particularly prone to assaults and other forms. Armed with this information and a clear understanding of required outcomes, Council began the process of preparing for Federal funding and compiling a specification for tender release. The tender was released with suggested locations for cameras and areas of coverage required as a minimum. The aspects of the system that were seen as critical to Council were; reliability, quality, service and backup, operator acceptance, compatibility and value for money. Council had specified frame rates of 25ips at a resolution of 4CIF and 31 days storage capability. The Bosch IP surveillance system chosen is designed around 6 locations each comprising a Bosch Autodome 300 Series PTZ camera and 2 fixed AutoDome 100 Series dome cameras. Meanwhile, Griffith Library has 2 Bosch Dinion IP fixed domes. The design looks to reduce the likelihood of PTZ’s (Pan-Tilt-Zoom cameras) from missing incidents in high traffic areas while in Tour modes. All cameras are from the Bosch IP range and each camera location comprises a 4-port Gigabit Switch and Media Converter residing on a dedicated Gigabit Fibre LAN. The Archiving Infrastructure consists of an HP Server with 18TB of storage in a Raid 5 Array. Bosch BVMS was chosen as the Archiving Software and a dedicated HP client installed within the same rack for footage retrieval. The Archiving Infrastructure is supported by a 2nd dedicated 5000VA UPS. All equipment is housed in a secure 45RU Cabinet within a newly constructed Disaster Recovery Room. Griffith Council had no experience with CBD CCTV systems and relied on town planners and engineers to manage the project from concept to handover. This scenario involved the development of Standard Operating Procedures, compliance with the Code of Practice, Application for funding from the Federal Government and a Community Consultation Process. Once each of these had been addressed, the tender documents had to be compiled, advertised, received and assessed. Once the initial design was formulated meetings were held between the installer, Eacom Systems, and councillors to educate them on the benefits of Fibre Optic Cabling and IP technology. This education process was critical to the success and the quality of the system. The installation timeframe was 12 weeks from date of order to handover, so this represented a challenge within itself but accurate planning and timely execution meant the project was brought in on time.

116


Ensure safety & security in your CBD Bosch VMS: ideal for street surveillance

Security Managers, Operators, and IT all agree that the Bosch Video Management System is the best way to manage digital video, audio and data across any IP network. A Bosch VMS solution stores all video streams at 4CIF and 25 images per second, and can be used by police to ensure safety and security in your CBD. With this unique enterprise IP video security solution, you can: • View live and recorded video images of any site at any time, from any location. • Utilise redundancy and fail-over technologies to drive mission-critical applications. • Respond efficiently in emergency situations thanks to superior alarm and event handling. • Reduce costs by harnessing the power and convenience of existing IP networks. • Take advantage of the system’s flexibility and scalability to suit your needs. Find out more about BOSCH VMS by contacting our offices below for a product demonstration or for more information visit www.boschsecurity.com.au. Australia NSW: (02) 9672 1777

VIC: (03) 9558 8088

QLD: (07) 3267 0442

WA: (08) 9240 5455


SNP Security chalks up 85% reduction in Graffiti

The best policy

for integrated security

Greater Dandenong City Council had a problem. In certain parts of the city, graffiti was appearing as quickly as council officers could remove it. Graffiti wasn’t the only problem. The surrounding streets were becoming increasingly unsafe at night.

The Council called on SNP Security for a solution. The team, headed by SNP’s Stuart Pitcher, recommended a trial program designed to provide maximum coverage of the targeted buildings and shops. “There was one council building in particular that attracted the vandals,” recalls Stuart, “and the nearby shops were affected too.” The SNP solution involved CCTV coverage of several areas and special treatment for the problem zone. “We installed CCTV cameras and recording equipment to provide 24/7 surveillance across the board,” says Stuart, “combined with remote real time monitoring for the target area.” Working in cooperation with local police, the decision was taken to utilise cameras incorporating advanced megapixel technology. “This has enabled us to provide police with images that are much clearer than earlier systems,” says Stuart, “so it’s easier to identify persons of interest.” Police have been very supportive, as the combination of monitoring and high quality images has helped them apprehend a number of people involved. Significant graffiti reduction The real breakthrough, however, has been the significant reduction in incidences of graffiti vandalism. “Council reports a reduction in graffiti of 85% and significant reductions in street violence,” says Stuart, “and the trial has been declared a definite success.” As a result, the use of the CCTV equipment supplied by SNP Security has been expanded in the Greater Dandenong CBD, ‘the city of Greater Opportunity’. Stuart Pitcher points out that the installation of CCTV surveillance has been accompanied by a solid Process and Procedures Manual designed to protect the privacy of individuals lawfully using the Dandenong streets. “Only designated people can view the footage,” says Stuart, “and it can only be used for the purposes for which it was intended”. For more information about SNP Security’s services designed for Local Government – including CCTV and monitoring services, ring 1300 30 31 32 or visit the Government Industry section at www.snpsecurity.com.au

At SNP Security we provide integrated security solutions to an impressive portfolio of government clients who know they can rely on us to meet their exacting standards. Our reputation for highly trained security officers, quality assurance, electronic security and innovative ways to integrate a range of complementary security solutions is well established on a national level. We’re also leaders in highly specialised Type 1 Monitoring, designed specifically for Australian Commonwealth departments and agencies. The service is linked to our two Grade 1 Monitoring Centres, which provide alarm monitoring and response with total system redundancy. We also provide security screening at number of airports including Sydney Airport – Australia’s busiest – and a number of regional airports, making us Australia’s leading airport security provider.

Grade A1 Monitoring Electronic Security Security Officers Aviation Security Mobile Patrols Gated Solutions

Master Licence NSW 40067 4602

To find out why SNP Security has become the largest integrated security company in Australia, visit www.snpsecurity.com.au and click on case studies.

1300 30 31 32

email enquiries@snpsecurity.com.au

www.snpsecurity.com.au 118


Street Surveillance Systems A brief overview By independent security consultants IPP Since the inception of street surveillance systems over two decades ago, many millions of cameras have been deployed around the globe. This has provided a wealth of learning experience which has demonstrated the positive outcomes that can be achieved, as well as some limitations. One issue that is commonly encountered in a typical Street CCTV deployment is the nomadic nature of the target activity. In systems where saturation coverage is obtained, this is less of an issue. However, many Street CCTV deployments are limited by budget meaning the location of cameras is critical; coverage gaps are commonplace. Such camera placement is further complicated by competing outcome priorities related to different stakeholders. Typical target activities might include drug dealing, vandalism, offensive behaviour, assault, robbery, terrorist bomb threat and so forth.

In some cases, the placement of cameras about key geographic landmarks (e.g. Public buildings, parks, railway stations) provides a good compromise for multiple target activities. However, there are categories of target activity such as drug trade (and associated crimes) and offensive behaviour that are mobile, and tend to change location over time as a result of different stimuli. CCTV coverage can be one such stimulus, and in many cases the deployment of a camera at a particular location just sees the problem move around the corner into one of the coverage gaps. To address this problem IPP developed a solution on a recent innersuburban street camera project to make better use of the street surveillance system by treating the cameras as transient units much like the nature of crime. Wireless technology is becoming increasingly cost effective and more reliable to a point that it reduces the need to install infrastructure underground which inherently attributed considerable costs to many street surveillance projects. Utilising wireless infrastructure allows the council to not only have permanent CCTV at nominated hotspots but the ability to have “transient” cameras installed at a moment’s notice if and when the particular target activities move. The strategy for this type of solution is to push undesirable behaviour out of the Central business district and into areas where dealers, for example, cannot be found thus leading to users moving away. IPP are the leaders in street surveillance system advice and design and have offices in Melbourne, Sydney and Brisbane. Contact details are available at www.ipp.com.au for further information.

 

 

 • • •

  

• • •

  

• • •

  

  • • •

  

• • •

  

• • •

  

 119


The Future Of Remote Camera Monitoring For Safety and Security Are you able to: • • • • •

view your work site/s live remotely? show customers the work sites live in meetings? get daily snapshots on progress? update your web site with snapshots? view site issues and safety remotely?



POE Solutions has brought a new way of using the latest in camera technology to monitor the work site for safety and security and more… With the new technology in cameras bring lower-power consumptions, onboard storage solutions, high-resolution images (Megapixel/HDTV) and many more capabilities and control. With the advantage of using IP networking technology and 3G (Next G) we are able to deploy multiple cameras around sites and use IP messaging to generate alarms making our system the most cost effective 3G solution on the market. We manufacture a number of standard off-the-shelf solutions which can be customized to suit your needs from: •

Rapid Deployment Camera Solutions

Trailer Or Concrete Block Mounted

Mains powered and Solar Systems

One of our main things is we like to listening to our customers’ needs then going away and designing a solution that best suits the customer and where possible demonstrating the equipment/solution to make certain it is what they are asking for. We carry out a large amount of R&D so we can provide reliable and cost effective solutions which meet the customers expectations.



• • • • • •

 



New Solutions: Beacon PTZ cam for the roof of vehicles.

Note: due to the security of some products we can’t promote them publicly. If you are looking for a solution talk to us as we would like to assist you to achieve you goals.

• •

For more information please contact: POE Solutions 02 9618 0444 sales@poes.com.au

     

• • •

          

   120


Australian Lock Company

…securing your future!

With a modern 3,400 sq m manufacturing & distribution facility located 1 ¼ hours south of Sydney Australian Lock Company (ALCo) is Australia’s only fully owned manufacturer, distributor & exporter of high security master key systems & associated architectural hardware. The company has built its domestic & global market by ensuring flexibility in the design & manufacture of all products it brings to market. The company’s unique commitment to project specific product solutions ensures high security lock requirements can always be provided. Within the business a high priority is based on R&D. This focus incorporates a combination of specialist industry, engineering & manufacturing expertise. To ensure operation excellence is achieved at all times, ALCo abides by the processes & procedures determined by ISO9001:2000. To this end a further 3 year extension of this accreditation has recently been approved. The core focus & competency of ALCo is the manufacture & distribution of high security lock cylinder & master key systems. To this end BiLock is the product on which the company’s success has been built. Invented, designed & built in Australia, BiLock continues to be the product of choice for those that require a high security solution. SCEC endorsed, constant product innovation & design ensures BiLock remains as relevant today as it was when it was launched 30 years ago. Not being a company to rest on its laurels, ALCo has recently launched another high security lock & master key system – Galaxy. The extensive range of Galaxy products offers security features & end-user benefits not previously available. Galaxy has the potential to change the face of highsecurity lock & master key systems forever. Complementing BiLock & Galaxy is a range of ALCOM architectural hardware products. The ever expanding range consists of floor & wallmounted stops, door furniture, door handles, push plates, pull handles, flush bolts, skeleton bolts, barrel bolts & door closers. A SCEC endorsed range of stainless steel mortice locks completes the range. For the opportunity to view the ALCo product range in more detail please call customer service on 02 4272 4922 or visit the website at www.australianlock.com.au

…securing your future!

… taking security to another level!

Ph 1300 00 LOCK (1300 005 625) www.australianlock.com.au Australian Lock Company Pty Limited 17 Doyle Avenue, Unanderra NSW 2526 PO Box 479 Unanderra NSW 2526 Ph 02 4272 4922 • Fax 02 4272 4677 Email sales@australianlock.com.au Web www.australianlock.com.au

121


Fleet Management - IPWEA - AFMA

When a simple journey tur

ns int o

ar oll e

rco as te

rr id

e

fleet management now goes beyond simple administrative functions such as vehicle re-registering, organising maintenance and managing fuel bills.

By Ken Thompson Director Research & Communications Australasian Fleet Manager’s Association (AfMA) Ask the question of where vehicles and the management of the fleet fits into the organisation and you will get an enormous variation in the responses. Today many organisations still see the management of their fleet as a minor activity; after all they’re only vehicles and what could be difficult about that? All too often the fleet is not even given a dedicated manager but instead this responsibility is tacked onto another middle-management position - anyone from the HR manager to purchasing, accounting, or even a senior manager’s personal assistant who just happened to have some time on their hands. It’s a strange approach when you consider fleet budgets are often the third largest outgoing, potentially greater than those of any other single department. The practice of managing fleets has been undervalued for a long time. This is due, in part, to a lack of appreciation of the factors involved in managing fleets. It might surprise many senior management groups that

122

Fleet Management has developed into a strategic management role especially in today’s business world where legislative responsibilities have increased dramatically. Occupational health and safety (OH&S) ‘duty of care’ responsibility and legislation such as ‘Chain of Responsibility’ and ‘Fatigue Management’ have exposed organisations to substantially greater risk. This is true equally of the private sector and public sectors. This strategic aspect to fleet management is very often underestimated and misunderstood. It’s probably only the Fleet Manager who sees the organisation’s transport activity in its true perspective. In fact most organisations use three or four distinct vehicle groupings (fleets) each of which requires a somewhat different management approach and sets of policies and procedures to manage them effectively. The first grouping involves ‘Tool of trade’ vehicles, which are those required by the organisation to perform its intended business function. Then there are those vehicles that are provided as part of the employment package or as an employee benefit as novated or salary packaged vehicles. The second two are more problematic for the organisation as often they do not see these transport modes as being part of their responsibility. It may come as a surprise to many organisations that outsourcing the organisations transport activities to another organisation or the allowing the use of privately owned vehicles does not remove the organisations ‘duty of care’ responsibility to provide ‘a safe workplace’. In fact taking this road introduces another slightly more complex layer of fleet management activity. (continued page 124)


THE SAFE CHOICE TO GET THE HARD JOBS DONE

Built to get the hard jobs done, Triton is loaded with serious grunt and leading first-in-class1 safety features including Active Stability and Traction Control. With a range of models and body styles in both 4x2 and 4x4 including Cab Chassis and Double Cab, there’s a Triton to suit your fleet requirements. Triton GLX 4x4 Double Cab shown includes the following features to tick all the boxes:

✔ Active Stability Control2 ✔ Active Traction Control2 ✔ Hi-power Common Rail Turbo Diesel ✔ 3 tonne towing capacity3

✔ Six Airbags2 ✔ ABS with EBD ✔ Bluetooth® connectivity4 ✔ Optimised carrying capacity

1. 4cyl, diesel, 4x4 pickup class. 2. Optional safety pack. 3. Model fitted with Genuine Accessory 3.0 tonne towbar. 4. Connectivity subject to phone compatibility. †10 year or 160,000km Powertrain Warranty (whichever comes first) MMR1318 (non transferable). *5 year or 130,000km New Vehicle Factory Warranty (whichever comes first). ^5 years or 130,000 km (whichever comes first). Service conditions apply. See your Dealer for full details.

123


Fleet Management - IPWEA - AFMA

Just how much may the organisation be at risk? It is worth looking at three recent cases that demonstrate the ease with which organisations can get into difficulty.

• People management

The High Court of Australia appeal in the Kirk v The Industrial Relations Commission of NSW case is particularly useful for the Fleet Manager as it clearly outlines how the courts view the extent of an organisation’s ‘duty of care’ liability and its responsibility to provide a ‘safe workplace’.

• Contract management

In this judgement, the court clearly identified the organisation’s obligation to ‘identify risk’ in its operations under the OH&S legislation. These requirements are clearly articulated in paragraphs 7 through 19 of the judgement; a copy of the judgement is available on the Australasian Fleet Managers Association (AfMA) website at www.afma.net.au.

• Training

To identify risk the organisation needs to conduct a risk assessment of its transport activities. From this assessment the organisation must then develop and put in place processes to actively manage that risk. Two other cases, the Australian Rail Track Corporation and CBH case, involve transport activities where the organisation fell foul of the law. The Australian Rail Track Corporation case originated from a double fatality at the organisation’s facilities. While the company was found not to have contributed to the fatalities it was nevertheless fined $200,000 for, in the courts opinion, it had failed to maintain an actively managed safe system and a proper risk register. On top of the OH&S legislation organisations have to contend with both the ‘fatigue management’ and ‘chain of responsibility’ legislation. The nature of the CBH judgement shows how easily it is to be tripped up by not complying with legislation. CBH was in the bulk storage business. Product it didn’t grow was transported on vehicles it didn’t own by drivers it didn’t hire but the organisation was pulled into the ‘chain of responsibility’ nonetheless because it accepted delivery from vehicles that were overloaded. As the receiver of goods it was deemed to have had a responsibility in ‘the transport chain’. This approach to ‘duty of care’ changes the nature of the understanding of process needed to manage for safety in the organisation’s transport activities. Now organisations need to address safety through a management of risk process; the method has now effectively become a process of managing risk which in turn leads to a better safety outcome. Internationally the World Health Organization (WHO) estimates that nearly one-third of all road deaths occur when people are engaged in work-related activity. The economic price tag for traffic accidents alone is estimated to be some US$500 billion per year globally. The rising of the importance of fleet management as a distinct profession is demonstrated by its elevation internationally where the International Organization for Standardization (ISO), a worldwide federation of national standards bodies, is developing an international standard in the form of ISO/CD 3 39001 Road Traffic Safety (RTS) management systems. Currently under review, it is scheduled for publication in December 2012. Still on the subject of road safety, UN General Assembly Resolution A/64/L.44/Rev.1 has declared 2011-2020 the Decade of Action for Road Safety. Co-sponsored by 100 countries, the purpose of the resolution is to reverse the growing trend in road-traffic deaths and injuries worldwide. The level of skill and the skill sets a Fleet Manager needs incorporate components of almost every management function within an organisation including, but not limited to: • Financial management • Change management

124

• Contract negotiation

• Conflict resolution • Verbal and written communication

• Risk assessment and management A good knowledge of OH&S duty of care as it related to the organisations transport activities is critical. Managing what is normally the third-highest corporate asset and associated expenses in a cost-effective way; analysing and reducing transport-associated risks; providing data analyses; recommending and implementing changes to optimise fleet operations; and ensuring legal obligations are met is the task of the modern fleet manager. This holds true even if fleet functions are outsourced. What is often overlooked is the strategic management of the organisations transport tasks. This is, and will always be, a function internal to the organisation. It is interesting to note that Fleet Management is essentially the only middle management role for which there is no formal qualification in Australasia. AfMA is working towards rectifying this situation by developing a formal qualification program for Fleet Managers. The Association is expected to make an announcement on a program by mid year. In 2008, The Australian Safety & Compensation Council reported that, at 34%, the most common cause of workplace fatalities involved vehicle crashes. 1 January 2012 is the anticipated date for the introduction of nationally consistent Occupational Health and Safety (OH&S) legislation. It is envisaged that this legislation will for the first time set out steps that directors personally must take to meet their obligations under ‘duty of care’ in providing a ‘safe workplace’. The consequences of not meeting these obligations could be significant as the new legislation provides for a maximum penalty of imprisonment for a period up to five years and a $600,000 fine. When such cases arise it is most likely that lack of knowledge will not be a successful defence. The precedent has already been set and officers would be judged not on what they know but on what someone in a particular position should know to ensure that the activity is undertaken with minimum risk. Fleet management is at the front of the big ticket items of today; safety and emissions. Fleets also play a significant role at both a federal and state economic activity level with fleet sales accounting for more than 50% of all new vehicle registrations. With more and more attention being given to effective management of the fleet many organisations are wisely returning to using the services of the in-house professional Fleet Manager, an individual who can ensure that in an increasingly complex world their organisation is not disadvantaged because of its transport activities.


Bynx fleet management Why should you take an interest in Bynx and its fleet management solutions? We are the only provider with over 20 years’ experience in vehicle leasing, rental and fleet management that is part of a global company but with local development facilities. We have a 100 percent track record of successful implementations in Australia and our business solution is, for example, currently running StateFleet - the largest government fleet in the country. They have been using Bynx to manage their fleet business for over six years. Our products are ready to use out-of-the-box but, as not all businesses are the same, Bynx software is fully customizable. Our solutions are also scalable; it doesn’t matter what size your fleet is now or in the future, it will grow with you. Based on industry-standard technology, Bynx ensures quality and reliability - and you don’t need specialist equipment to run it.

ease and online. The products cover every aspect - from quote, order and procurement to short-term rentals, accident, driver management and vehicle remarketing. A full suite of financial management tools is included to make certain every financial aspect is tracked and controlled. Real-time reporting ensures all the information you need is available at the click of a button. Bynx also provides implementation, project management and customisation from our development team based in Sydney, New South Wales. No other provider can match our depth of experience, sector knowledge, flexibility, dedication and local facilities. Visit: http://www.bynx.com call: +61 2 90253750 or Email: sales@bynx.com for more information.

Our solution will streamline your business, cut costs and enable you to enhance customer service, profitably. Our products have a proven track record in different markets throughout the world and deliver some of the highest ratios of vehicle to full-time employee in our sector. Fleet, vehicle and driver management can be complex but our software is up to the job. It is comprehensive yet easy to use. bynxFLEET and bynxNET enable companies to control and manage the lifecycle of vehicle assets and engage with customers and stakeholders with

business without boundaries bynxFLEET and bynxNET - at the forefront of  vehicle fleet, leasing and rental management    Bynx is the only specialist solution designed by the industry for the industry.

Bynx - global company, local delivery

Visit: www.bynx.com call: +61 2 90253750 Email: sales@bynx.com for more information.   125


Pro Fleet delivers more power to Fleet Managers. Powered by Tyrepower, Australia’s biggest independent, ProFleet gives Fleet Managers the power to manage their fleets in the most cost-effective and timeefficient way. As a relative newcomer to the fleet business, ProFleet has quickly built a loyal customer base right around country. “We’re delighted to count amongst our customers some of the biggest fleet groups in Australia,” says Matthew Barallon, ProFleet’s National Fleet Manager, “And it’s growing every week,” he adds. So, what is it about ProFleet that has caught the attention of so many Fleet Managers around Australia? “It’s a combination of factors,” says Mr Barallon. “We’ve put into play a number of systems and created a fully integrated package that is very time-efficient and cost-effective.” “ProFleet gives our customers more power to save time and money. But that’s only the tip of the iceberg – ProFleet gives them the power of so much more!” adds Mr Barallon. Get the power of smarter technology With an integrated system for seamless direct invoicing and minimal account reconciliations, ProFleet gives Fleet Managers the power to track, account for and cost everything related to your fleet’s tyres. “We analysed what the competition was doing and knew it could be done better. We developed an integrated package that allows for direct invoicing and cuts down time-consuming paperwork,” says Mr Barallon. “With the power of real time track and trace, as well as a number of other technological innovations, ProFleet really helps streamline our customers’ fleet operations,” says Mr Barallon.

126

Get the power to choose from all the top tyre brands As the fleet arm of Tyrepower, Australia’s biggest independent tyre retailer, ProFleet customers can choose from a great range of tyre brands. “Our customers like the fact that because we’re an independent group, we don’t push you into buying one particular tyre brand over another,” says Mr Barallon. “Our independence means we can offer a choice of brands at very competitive prices,” he added. Get the power of a 260 store, Australia-wide network With more than 260 stores right around Australia, Tyrepower offers ProFleet customers convenience plus the peace of mind that wherever they are, there’s sure to be a Tyrepower store nearby. “Of course, our size also means we have the buying power to deliver great pricing and a better bottom line to our ProFleet partners,” says Mr Barallon. Get the power of better service “One important factor that our customers have commented on, is that they like the fact that Tyrepower stores are all run by owner-operators. The person who owns the store runs the store, which ultimately means a better level of personal service,” says Mr Barallon, “not to mention expert and friendly advice!” he adds. If you’re interested in getting the power of ProFleet to work for your business, email fleet@tyrepower.com.au or call Matthew Barallon, National Fleet Manager, on 1800 143 030.


“I

GOT THE POWER TO RUN MY FLEET MORE EFFICIENTLY.” TIME-EFFICIENT AND COSTEFFECTIVE FLEET MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS AND SOFTWARE. Powered by Tyrepower, Australia’s biggest independent, ProFleet gives you the power to manage your fleet in the most cost-effective and time-efficient way. ProFleet also gives you the power to choose from all the big tyre brands, at the very best prices, from more than 260 owner-operated stores around the country. And with an integrated system for seamless direct invoicing and minimal account reconciliations, ProFleet gives you the power to track, account for and cost everything related to your fleet’s tyres. To get the power of ProFleet, email fleet@tyrepower.com.au or call Matthew Barallon, National Fleet Manager, on 1800 143 030.

Pro Fleet powered by


SUPPORTING AUSTRALIA’S MOTORISTS FOR OVER 100 YEARS

...and we are looking forward to the next 100 years. Call us on (03) 8823 4433 or 13 16 18 to find out more about how Shell Card can help you manage and reduce your fuel use and fuel expense. www.shell.com.au


THE SMARTER WAY TO FUEL YOUR BUSINESS FUEL MANAGEMENT CONTROL FUEL MANAGEMENT TOOLS AND REPORTS SECURITY PIN ON CARD 24/7 CARD BLOCKING SERVICE SMART ALERTS — INCORRECT OR MISSING ODOMETER DETAILS — TRANSACTION COUNT — TOTAL FUEL VOLUME — MAX TRANSACTION VALUE — MAX VOLUME SET PURCHASING RESTRICTIONS

CONVENIENCE & QUALITY EASE OF ADMINISTRATION ONLINE ACCOUNT MANAGEMENT — ORDER, CANCEL OR MODIFY YOUR SHELL CARD — GENERATE GST AND FUEL TAX CLAIMS — RUN FUEL MANAGEMENT SUMMARY REPORTS SINGLE GST INVOICE UP TO 51 DAYS INTEREST FREE CREDIT CUSTOMER SERVICE (13 16 18) COMPETITIVE DISCOUNTS ACROSS A NATIONAL NETWORK


Fleet Management - IPWEA - AFMA

Strong Response to IPWEA’s Fleet Management Certificate The release of the Institute of Public Works Engineering Australia’s fleet management certificate course has resulted in a strong response from industry in Australia. The Certificate is a self paced learning program involving 5 units associated with procuring and managing plant, vehicles and equipment. The release of the Institute of Public Works Engineering Australia’s fleet management certificate course has resulted in a strong response from industry in Australia. The Certificate is a self paced learning program involving 5 units associated with procuring and managing plant, vehicles and equipment. Speaking recently, IPWEA Executive Officer Ross Moody said he has been overwhelmed by the number of enrolments in the Fleet Management Certificate course. “In the first 4 weeks we received 140 registrations”, he said. While this was consistent with our market research, I didn’t expect it to happen so quickly. I think this is a reflection of the IPWEA’s high penetration and credibility in fleet management particularly in the government sector although our reach is also now into the private sector”. The number of enrolments has now topped 260 and is continuing to grow. According to Moody the feedback from people who have completed the Certificate has been excellent with the most pleasing comment being how practical the course is and the immediate benefits in the workplace. “We have had international enquiries and the course can be undertaken from anywhere in the world” Moody said. The fleet management certificate is the latest initiative for IPWEA since the launch of the Systems Plus Plant & Vehicle Management Program in 2004. When IPWEA released the program the best practice Plant & Vehicle Management Manual was the cornerstone supported by initial training and followed by quarterly news letters, twice yearly seminars and Manual updates. “Right from the start our objectives were to fill a significant industry need in fleet management particularly in public works. We wanted to improve the knowledge of people working in the industry and raise the profile of what we felt had tended to be a neglected area of public works. Plant and fleet just seemed to be there in the background and was not being given the attention it needed. Apart from its sheer capital value, fleet has an enormous impact on operational areas in civil construction and public works. If the fleet isn’t being kept up to date and being properly maintained, the cost impact through downtime and lost productivity can be significant. If downtime isn’t being recorded, the associated cost goes unnoticed and management has no idea of the savings that can be made through improved plant and vehicle management”, said Moody. According to Moody from the start IPWEA realised the importance of keeping the fleet management initiative dynamic. “We knew that producing a best practice manual wouldn’t by itself achieve our objective of improving the knowledge of fleet management in public works. Hence the birth of the System Plus concept and its ongoing support for the Manual”, he said.

130

National Panel When IPWEA initiated the Systems Plus program it immediately established a national panel of fleet management practioners representing all States. The panel provided a peer review role during the development of the Manual and again with the new Certificate. Most of the panel members are also the chair of the local fleet management group in their area. There are currently 9 active fleet management groups participating in the IPWEA twice yearly professional development workshops delivered in 9 locations around Australia twice a year. “It was about 4 years ago when our national fleet management panel told us we needed to develop a qualification in fleet management. We took notice and I am so pleased that IPWEA were finally able to deliver the Certificate. The panel members provide invaluable input and support and they have played a key role in the Systems Plus program’s success.” Moody said. According to Moody, the Systems Plus program won’t end with the Fleet Management Certificate. There are plans for an Advanced Fleet Management Certificate and a major update of the best practice Manual is well progressed. “The work done in developing the Certificate has provided more exciting ideas for the future but it will take time and these initiatives need funding and resources to develop. We also believe the Certificate will have increased appeal to contractors which will open up our whole program to a wider audience. We already have contractors attending our seminars and training workshops” he said. Fleet Management Certificate Content The Fleet Management Certificate is based on the Institute’s Plant & Vehicle management Manual and its purpose is: • to enhance the plant & vehicle management skills of people working in the management, procurement, maintenance and use of plant, vehicles and equipment • to provide recognition of the skill level attained • to meet an industry need for some form of accreditation/certification • to provide the opportunity for continuing professional development The course comprises 5 units representing the key steps involved in procuring and managing an item of plant/vehicle/equipment.


Unit Title

Overview

1 Utilisation

This unit covers utilisation and optimum replacement points to manage annual service and maintenance schedules and ownership or hire decision making.

2 Whole of life Costs

This unit covers plant, vehicle or equipment costs in both financial and operational terms to define projected whole of life costs.

3 Tendering

This unit covers preparing a specification and detailed tender for the procurement of plant and vehicles.

4 Maintenance

5 Regulatory Requirements

This unit covers servicing and routine maintenance of plant, vehicle or equipment. This unit covers regulatory requirements including OH&S procedures, vehicle weights and dimensions and environmental considerations.

The course is delivered by distance learning and there are no classes to attend. Course materials are provided on a CD containing the electronic workbooks and assessments. The course is delivered by distance learning and there are no classes to attend. Course materials are provided on a CD containing the electronic workbooks and assessments. The course is suitable for people involved in the management, maintenance, procurement and end use of plant, equipment and fleet vehicles. On the job learning occurs through participant’s liaison with relevant staff in their organisation (or external contractors) and the use of their own fleet items as case study examples in the assessments. New Live On-Line Training IPWEA launched the Fleet Management Certificate with a national 1 day training program that attracted over 200 delegates to the 9 delivery locations. The (optional) training which also provides stand alone professional development, was launched specifically to support people intending to enrol for the Fleet Management Certificate. As a result of industry demand to repeat the training but without the economies of scale provided at the launch, the 1 day program is now delivered live on-line every few months. On-line delivery allows participation from people anywhere in Australia (and beyond) and without having to leave their workplace.

The training is delivered over 5 sessions of 60-90 minutes held weekly plus an introductory and a review session. Feedback from participants has been excellent and the next series has already been scheduled for May 2011. Best Practice Plant & Vehicle Management Manual With sales of over 650 copies since its release in 2004 the Manual is currently undergoing a major update. The Manual starts off with a Quick Guide to fleet management and the Six Key Performance Indicators to effective plant and vehicle management. The Manual is divided into sixteen modules, encompassing all the significant aspects of plant and vehicle management in a public works environment. Most modules are introduced with a flow chart that provides a step by step approach or action summary for quick reference. Case studies are provided, detailing real examples provided by plant and vehicle managers in public works. Modules in the Manual 1.

Managing the Fleet (General)

2.

Tendering Guide & Evaluation Process

3.

Buy/Hire Decisions, Financing, Whole of Life Costs

4.

Light Vehicles including FBT Management

5.

Heavy Vehicles

6.

Earthmoving Plant

7.

Grounds Care Plant & Equipment

8.

Ancillary Equipment

9.

Mechanical Workshop Management

10. Service Agreements 11. Occupational Health & Safety 12. Tyre Management 13. Oils & Oil Analysis 14. Fuels & Environmental Issues 15. GPS & Fleet Tracking 16. Fleet Management Software Twice Yearly Professional Development Workshops Initially establised as user forums associated with release of the Plant & Vehicle Management Manual the 1 day national workshop series now delivers ongoing professional development to around 180 delegates twice yearly. The workshop content is different for each series and is

131


Fleet Management - IPWEA - AFMA

Plant & Vehicle Management MANUAL

Compiled by

Institute of Public Works Engineering Australia Limited in association with

1 Day Plant & Vehicle Management Workshop March 2011 Professional Development Program MARCH 2011 DATES & LOCATIONS

developed from delegate feedback and consultation with the national panel of fleet managers. IPWEA’s participant evaluation shows the workshops are highly valued by industry practitioners who come from different backgrounds and industries. For more information on the IPWEA Systems Plus Plant & Vehicle Management Program or the Fleet Management Certificate contact Ross Moody at rmoody@ipwea.org.au or visit www.ipwea.org.au/fleet. About IPWEA The IPWEA is the peak professional body providing member services and advocacy to people involved in delivering public works and services in Australia. Its national membership of 2,000 represents practitioners in state and local government, and also in private industry. About the Author Ross Moody is the Executive Officer of IPWEA National, a part time role he has held since November 2004. Ross has coordinated the IPWEA’s plant & vehicle management program since its inception. He has 28 years experience in local government, including 15 years in a Director’s role. He holds a Bachelor of Civil Engineering, a Graduate Diploma in Business and a Certificate IV in Training & Assessment. Ross has been active in the professional side of local government engineering for over 25 years, having held the positions of WA State President and National President of the Institute of Public Works Engineering Australia. He has been the editor of the IPWEA Journal, Public Works Engineering since 1995.

132

Dates

Location

State

Mon 14 Mar Tue 15 Mar Wed 16 Mar Thu 17 Mar Fri 18 Mar Mon 28 Mar Tue 29 Mar Wed 30 Mar Thu 31 Mar

Casino RSM Club Brisbane North Lakes Resort Golf Club Rockhampton Travelodge Rockhampton Sydney Holroyd Centre Dubbo Dubbo RSL Club Hobart Hobart Town Hall Melbourne Manningham Function Cntre Adelaide City of Mitcham Perth Ascot Quays Apartments

NSW QLD

1 Day Plant and Vehicle Management Workshop These workshops have been designed to provide ongoing professional development in plant and vehicle management.

Topics explored in the workshop include: 

NSW

VIC SA

Procurement of Plant & Vehicles

Process, compliance and opportunities. A presentation relevant to your State with the opportunity for Q&A.

NSW TAS

IPWEA Update and Open Forum

News update, Q & A, Open discussion forum on your local issues.

QLD

Business Case Analysis

We take you through the process step by step over 2 sessions. 

From the Manufacturer’s Perspective

Safety & training, plant tender specs and future technology 

Fleet Management Software

Why do you need it and what capability needs to be specified

WA

Market Update

Latest information on market trends in light and heavy fleet vehicles

COST

Systems Plus Subscribing Organisation $ 290 (inc GST) per participant Non Subscribing Organisation $ 350 (inc GST) per participant

REGISTRATION

To register for this workshop please select one of the following methods: 1. Online – Preferred method of registration Register online, and pay using credit card or use purchase order, at: www.ipwea.org.au/FleetMgtWorkshop 2. Fax Registration Form Please complete registration form and fax to IPWEA on (02) 9283 5255 or email admin@ipwea.org.au

WHO SHOULD ATTEND

Plant & Fleet Managers, Fleet Officers, Works & Parks Supervisors, Workshop Supervisors, Works Engineers, Asset Managers, and Procurement Officers - anyone working with plant or fleet within their organisation.

FURTHER INFORMATION VISIT

www.ipwea.org.au/FleetMgtWorkshop For all enquiries please contact Lita Somogyi at IPWEA on (02) 8267 3001 or email admin@ipwea.org.au. Level 12, 447 Kent St, SYDNEY NSW 2000

Proudly presented by IPWEA Institute of Public Works Engineering Australia In association with Uniqco International

The objectives of the day are to: • Improve plant & vehicle management practice • Provide an update on the latest technology in various fields of plant & vehicle management • Provide professional development and networking The workshop will provide further professional development and networking in plant & vehicle management best practice building on the material in the IPWEA Plant & Vehicle Management Manual. It will also provide the opportunity for people involved in plant & vehicle management to network & share their experiences with other participants.

Who Should Attend Plant & Fleet Managers, Fleet Officers, Works & Parks Supervisors, Workshop Supervisors, Works Engineers, Asset Managers, Procurement Officers - anyone working with plant or fleet within their organisation

Presenters Ross Moody, IPWEA National Executive Officer

Ross was the editor of the IPWEA’s Plant & Vehicle Management Manual and coordinates the Systems Plus program including workshops, training and newsletters.

Grant Andrews, Managing Director, Uniqco International Plant & Vehicle Mgt Grant is a specialist fleet management consultant who has a focus on best management practice. Grant was the main author of the IPWEA Plant & Vehicle Management Manual and has been involved in delivering the IPWEA Systems Plus program since its inception.

Peter Valkanidis, Government & Industrial Representative Australia & New Zealand Caterpillar Inc. Peter’s main role includes counselling dealers on existing and potential customer issues, forecasting sales strategy planning, support rollout of new or customised product requirements and creating and promoting sales programs for the Governmental and Industrial market segments.


WHEN IT COMES TO SAFETY, SECURITY, RETAINED VALUE AND ENGINEERING PERFORMANCE, SUBARU IS SIMPLY A SMARTER WAY TO ADD VALUE TO YOUR FLEET.

Our ALL-WHEEL DrIVE rAngE Our DNA is what makes Subaru different from every other car in the world, it’s what makes a Subaru a Subaru. It starts with the heart and soul of every Subaru – Symmetrical All-Wheel Drive, a horizontally-opposed Boxer engine and the maximum five-star ANCAP occupant safety rating. Together, our technical innovations and safety credentials combine to deliver performance, enhance safety and maintain consistently excellent retained value for every Subaru owner. The team is ably equipped to support business clients with their vehicle purchase needs. Our Fleet and Corporate Sales message is a simple one, we offer: • Commitment to our customers; • Engineering performance; • Environmental commitment and continuous improvements; • Enhanced security features; • Active and passive Safety; and • Renowned Retained Value. Subaru is simply a smarter Fleet choice.

For more information please call 1800 22 66 43 or visit subaru.com.au

FOrESTEr - SUV Designed to give you the capability and flexibility you need to run your business. Also available in a Diesel variant with manual transmission. LIBErTY - Sedan and Wagon Everyone puts different performance demands on their car. That’s why we don’t make just one Liberty – we make several, with some variants available in both sedan and wagon. This well appointed Liberty 2.5i range has great economy with rewarding performance and our Lineartronic™ CVT transmission, delivering sub 200 grams of CO 2 per km. OuTBACK - SUV Allows you to take on challenging conditions with confidence. With its technological advancements and appointments the Outback is fit for business, both in the city and the country. Also available in a Diesel variant with manual transmission.

IMPrEZA - Sedan and Hatch There’s a difference between arriving and making an entrance. TrIBECA - SUV Luxury and ability combine with 7 seat versatility in a new breed of luxury SUV – one with the agility you’d expect from a passenger car, but with enough space for many applications. WrX AnD WrX STI - Sedan and Hatch The Subaru WRX STI represents the pinnacle of Advanced Driving Technology from Subaru.

LIBErTY EXIgA - Wagon The Liberty Exiga 2.5i and Liberty Exiga 2.5i Premium combine six-seat luxury and versatility.

Fleet & Corporate


Car Parking Solutions

Parking Association Australia

Article for Magazine-Australian GovLink Prepared by Leyon Parker on behalf of the Parking Ass

When the Hobart Cityinstalled Council installed Australia’s first pa When the Hobart City Council Australia’s first parking meter on1955, the 1st the April people 1955, theof people of Hobart were beingintroduced introduced to to a lot m Hobart were being a lot more than just a piece of American technologyinfirst installed in City 20 y American technology first installed Oklahoma Oklahoma City 20 years before.

They werewere about about to engage the process known today asknown ‘paid They toinengage in the process today as ‘ on-street parking’. Newspaper reports at that time indicate some Newspaper reports at that time indicate some public sceptic public scepticism towards Council’s departure from the roads, rates departure from the roads, rates and rubbish (and for for Hobart and rubbish (and for Hobart also water and sewerage) to charging hitherto free parking space. charging for hitherto free parking space.

The Lord Mayor at the time, Archibald Park described the move “as theThe first step by Mayor Council toatregain control Archibald of its streets and to ration Lord the time, Park described the parking space in the city, thereby stemming the flow of business from Council to regain control of its streets and to ration parking the city centre”, one presumes he meant taking control from the all stemming flow customers of business from city centre”, one pr day parkers whothe prevented parking nearthe the shops.

control from the all day parkers who prevented customers p

The early fees of three pence for 15 mins and six pence for 30 mins were approved by the State Government on the strict understanding that all income to the of off-street The earlywould fees be ofhypothecated three pence forprovision 15 mins and sixcarpence for parks. In subsequent years over 3000 multi-storey parking spaces have State Government on the strict understanding that all incom been constructed in and around the relatively small Hobart CBD using thefunds. provision of off-street car parks. In been subsequent those Those legislative requirements have since removed years ov and Councilhave is nowbeen free to constructed use the money however chooses. the relatively s spaces in and itaround

funds. legislative have since Hobart wasThose by no means unique in requirements this endeavour and during the been 1950s and the 1960s other capital cities and a few suburban and regional to use money however it chooses. cities followed with their own meter installations again within the strict legislative requirements set by State Governments.

remo

The mechanical clockwork single or double head parking meter, little changed from the original US model, remained the primary parking Hobart was by no means unique in this endeavour and duri machine until the late 70s and early 80s when ticket spitter or voucher capital cities andbegan a few suburban cities issuing parking meters to be installed byand someregional Council’s at first follow forinstallations higher density angle parking bay areas and then later for normal again within the strict legislative requirements parallel on-street kerb side parking. The age of the electronic parking The mechanical clockwork single or double head parking m meter had arrived in Australia and a popular variant adopted by many original model,multi-bay remained thespace primary parking Councils was US the ticketless pay by meter serving up machine to 80’s 12 separately numbered spaces. when ticket spitter or voucher issuing parking meters b

for higher density parking bay areas In Council’s recognition of at thefirst challenges of dealing with this angle changing technology The Capital Cities Lord Mayors formed the Parking parallel on-street kerb side parking. The age of the electron Association of Australia (PAA) in 1986 and it is this organisation,

in Australia and a popular variant adopted by many Counci pay by space meter serving up to 12 separately numbered s

134

In recognition of the challenges of dealing with this changi Cities Lord Mayors formed the Parking Association of Aus


since expanded to include the many non-government entities involved in the parking industry, which takes the lead in advancing parking matters in Australia. Perhaps partly because of this change in technology and because more commuters were taking up shopper parking space, there was a significant expansion in the number of Councils across Australia who adopted paid on-street parking. In some States, Council’s first needed to be freed from restrictive legislation before they could install and enforce their meters. If such enforcement could also be efficiently coupled with enforcement of non-metered time restrictions and other kerbside parking regulated zones then Councils had an excellent opportunity to put in place all the elements needed for an effective all encompassing parking strategy for their city. Many Councils now have such strategies in place and their communities are reaping the benefits of efficient parking space turnover or ‘rationing’ in the words of Lord Mayor Park, as well as a source of income that is being used to construct off-street spaces that can be made available at low rates to shoppers and visitors to the retail and commercial centres. Some Councils also use such income to improve and maintain the appearance and amenity of their streetscapes making them attractive places to visit. Installing parking meters for the first time in any location can be a challenge and there are many examples of failed attempts. The robust democracy of Australian Local Government is far more likely now to provide these challenges than in the 1950s and1960s, often supported by an activist local print media. Usually the greatest fear of parking meters is that it will encourage shoppers to park elsewhere and therefore opposition may be expected from some retailers. Often the failures can be traced back to a flawed consultation process where the traders and their customers have had the benefits inadequately explained to them. This presumes of course that the particular Council is not using the meters as just a revenue source and really does have a desire to increase turnover in the their on-street parking spaces and use the funds to increase the off-street parking opportunities and for streetscape improvements. Of course not all Council shopping centres and streets are suitable for paid on-street parking and locations need to be carefully assessed. It may be that beachside parking or other ground level off-street car parks with high demand would benefit from a higher turnover using meters and again such revenues could be directed back to improve the safety, security and amenity of the car park itself or the streetscape and urban design of the local area. Demand for highly accessible short term parking may be better controlled using restricted time zones alone. Normally however depending on demand, the enforcement of non-metered parking restrictions is more difficult, less efficient ,less effective and attracts higher fines than those on parking meters. It is for this reason that parking meters are the most effective means of guaranteeing parking space turnover and accompanying increased business for nearby traders. The move from mechanical to electronic meters allowed for the addition of payment by credit card and by mobile phone (limited adoption) and the use of more efficient and cost effective enforcement processes. Electronic meters could be built tougher to resist the theft of cash and vandalism and cash collection could be properly audited, something that mechanical meters unfortunately could not be. For the first time Councils could begin to collect data on how their spaces were being used without the labour intensive task of direct observation.

Reduced numbers of meters sometimes with solar panels to recharge batteries reduced the capital and maintenance costs of owning meters and assisted Councils to improve the visual amenity of their streetscapes. Councils that have well defined and clear parking policies in place that includes paid on-street and off-street parking will soon have access to technology that may in future replace the parking meters altogether. The pace of change in parking related technology is quickening with innovation in parking management racing to keep up. A few Councils are leading in the adoption of this new technology, some examples being the installation of devices in the road pavement to measure accurately when a vehicle enters and leaves a particular parking space and have these devices automatically relay this information to hand held enforcement devices or back to a computer in the Council office. Together with the use of Licence Plate Recognition (LPR) Technology, such devices could dramatically raise the efficiency of enforcement, lowering costs and making the task much safer for enforcement officers at the same time. Mobile phone payment heralds the biggest change of all, probably since Oklahoma City in 1935, creating for the first time a viable and simple way of managing paid parking without the need for any meters at all. A pre registered mobile phone user will simply park in a designated parking space on or off a street where Council charges for parking. Once having informed their phone parking account of the ID of the space and how long they wish to park, they will be charged against their credit accordingly and by arrangement between the Council and the phone parking system provider Council will collect its fee. Again this may involve a marriage between mobilephones and LPR to facilitate enforcement and to enhance customer service. The beauty of this mobile phone technology is that it can run parallel with existing parking meters and these do not need to be phased out until the level of public acceptance of the new technology is high enough to warrant it. For off-street car parks LPR could be used to allow automatic exit to those drivers who prepaid by mobile phone. In the future it is even possible that all car parks could be operated using this marriage of technology but this would require a combination of very high ownership of mobile phones and a willingness by those owners to use them to pay for parking. While the technology is just about capable of doing anything for the management of parking spaces its use is still limited by whatever management processes a Council is willing to adopt. The PAA is aware that keeping up with available technology let alone taking advantage of it, is no easy task for any individual in the parking industry including the managers of a Council’s parking infrastructure. For that reason it sees its main objective as keeping all of its members informed using its National Convention held every two years, regular seminars and forums held a number of times per year in most capital cities and special industry related workshops with expert presenters. For further information on how the Parking Association of Australia can help your Council or organisation take advantage of the changes in parking technology to improve the management of your parking spaces and your level of customer service please see our web site www.parking.asn.au or contact paa@parking.asn.au. Leyon Parker Immediate Past President Parking Association of Australia

135


Parkability There are many reasons a public body may consider using a Parking Consultant; fresh eyes to review a project, your already committed in-house resources are overstretched, or a lack of confident internal expertise. Parking Consultants bring a depth of knowledge to a project to bring about a timely, cost effective-result as well as providing advice as to which tried and tested or innovative solutions are available. A Parking Consultant may be engaged on a fixed price, project-based engagement, or simply engaged for the time their expertise is required. Your purchasing guidelines may already contain proscriptive processes for engagement. Not all available solutions may be applicable to your project – a volunteer surf club member with a book of raffle tickets may be as effective as the latest satellite-guided locating and charging platform. It really is a matter of selecting the right solution for your opportunity. The range of solutions on offer can appear daunting. Which ticket parking machine can withstand high humidity, can that thermal-coated ticket be read after hours in the sun? Will maintenance cost consume all my capital savings? Are spare parts readily available and at what price. Will changing standards render my investment obsolete? Will my demographic of customers be able to readily understand and use the system offered? These are all questions your Parking Consultant should be able to answer as part of their proposal. The question of price. A good parking consultant should, within the scheduled ROI period, cost you nothing. By streamlining the process, the savings in time for your organisation can be quantified. If you’re updating equipment, the savings in maintenance, increased revenue through capture rate, will more than compensate your organisation. Selection of a Parking Consultant is important to the success of the project, whether it is the public or private sector. The selection process allows the project owner to obtain the best consultant for the specific task at hand, at a cost that is fair and reasonable for both parties. A successful selection and negotiation process is also the basis of for a well managed project with scope and responsibilities clearly defined. Parking Consultants con provide a wide range of services. These services can include research, parking planning and operational studies. Typically services offered include• Parking planning and needs studies • Site selection studies • Functional and layout design • Parking rates studies • Financial and economic feasibility • Parking management systems • Security and operational processes In choosing a Parking Consultant, there are critical factors such as knowledge, reputation, rapport, technical competence and commitment to your interest.

136

Each of these factors will have a major impact on the project delivery. Above all, the Parking Consultant should be retained early in the project while the project parameters are still flexible. With adequate information the Parking Consultant can provide technical input and responsive ideas which allow you to make informed choices at the onset of the project, thereby avoiding or minimising duplication of efforts or expensive mistakes. Another important aspect of the selection process is the involvement of appropriate individuals throughout all phases of the process. The selection of the Parking Consultant will have a major impact on the success of the project. The Parking Consultant should not be selected purely on price but rather based on the submitted qualifications, technical proposals and interviews. Then you will have adequate data to select the best qualified Parking Consultant. Biography Malcolm Edwards is the principal consultant at Parkability, a member of both the Parking Association of Australia and the US National Parking Association. Malcolm has managed and upgraded significant car parks in both the public and private sectors and holds the Certified Parking Professional credential from the US National Parking Association. He now consults to raise both the profile of the parking industry and to promote a sustainable and professional attitude to the industry.


Parkability we know parking Parkability we know parking

Parking Consultants Parkability provides affordable services to customers in several niche markets in the billion Parking Consultants dollar Australian parking industry. Parkability provides affordable services to customers in several niche markets in the billion

The access to your facility often through the car park. Is the gateway to your asset up to dollar Australian parkingisindustry. Standard? The access to your facility is often through the car park. Is the gateway to your asset up to

ManyStandard? car parks do not meet Australian Standards, exposing owners to potentially costly litigation, the users justAustralian plain, unnecessary risk andowners inconvenience. Many and car parks do notto meet Standards, exposing to potentially costly litigation, and the users to just plain, on unnecessary risk and inconvenience. Parking Parking Consultants We offer plain language, timely advice safety,Event compliance, efficiency, access and

revenue We control. offer plain language, advice compliance, efficiency, access and affordable event parking division provides Parkability provides affordabletimely services to on safety,Our revenue control. event based parking solutions, utilisingfrom customers in several niche marketsquotations, in the billion EOI’s, We are experienced in sourcing RFT’s and project management innovative electronic systems and purpose dollar We Australian parking industry. areconcrete. experienced in sourcing quotations, EOI’s, RFT’s and project management from concept to designed equipment. concept to concrete. The access to your facility is often through the car Our simple solutions will save you time, money and energy. We manage park. Is thesimple gateway to yourwill asset upyou to Standard? Our solutions save time, money and energy. your event parking needs, rain, hail or shine, night and day. Many car parks do not meet Australian Whether you need to park 5,000 or more cars Standards, exposing Event Parking Event Parkingowners to potentially costly for a sporting event, or a hundred VIP guests, litigation, and the users to just plain, unnecessary Our event parking division providesaffordable affordable event based parking solutions, we can provide trained staff, supervision and risk inconvenience. Ourand event parking division provides event based parking solutions, utilising innovative electronic systems and purpose designed equipment. management, including site security and cash utilising innovative electronic systems and purpose designed equipment. We offer plain language, timely advice on safety, solutions. We manage event parking needs,control. rain, hail hail management or and day. compliance, efficiency, access and revenue We manage youryour event parking needs, rain, orshine, shine,night night and day. have specialised equipment such as our famous Whether you need to park 5,000 or more cars forWe a sporting event, or a hundred VIP We are experienced in sourcing quotations, Whether youwe need park trained 5,000 or more cars formobile a sporting event,including or aallhundred VIP ticket booths and safety guests, can to provide staff, supervision and management, site equipment. EOI’s, RFT’s andprovide project management from guests, we can trained staff, supervision and management, including site security and cash management solutions. concept concrete. securitytoand cash management solutions. We have specialised equipment such as our famous mobile ticket booths and all

Our simple solutions willequipment save you time, money safety equipment. We have specialised such as our famous mobile ticket booths and all and energy. safety equipment.

Parking Consultants

Parking Consultants w w w.p a r k a bility.c om.a u

w w w.p a r k a bility.c o m.a u www.parkability.com.au

Event Parking Specialists

Event Parking Specialists info@parkability.com.au

info@parkability.com.au info@parkability.com.au


TMA Car Parking Solutions TMA offers a unique opportunity to the car parking industry with the ability to supply end to end servicing of all parking applications. TMA offers a complete range of high-quality equipment, including supply, installation and on-going maintenance. Our aim is to provide clients with an integrated service specifically tailored for the individual needs of each project. TMA’s parking equipment product range is extensive, state of the art and affordable. This combination allows the versatility to cater for any project design specification required. TMA can also provide added car park protection through licensed electronic security, CCTV surveillance, intrusion detection and people counting. The reliability of Scheidt & Bachmann Parking Access Control Systems ensures the ability to perform in high volume commercial and retail car parks. Scheidt & Bachmann parking equipment is used throughout Australia and worldwide. With more than 20,000 installations globally and 30 years’ experience, Scheidt & Bachmann offer fully secured and durable unit housings, flexible networked and customised business system solutions. C

The Indect Parking Guidance System is the most advanced single space system available on the market and provides high quality guidance systems to efficiently direct vehicles throughout parking sites. There are more than 200,000 bays installed worldwide in over 400 sites, including the prestigious Dubai Mall (15,000 bays). Indect offers a 100% solution for parking guidance through parking system integrations with options of ultra sonic sensors, floor sensors or Upsolut ceiling sensors with optional cameras. Australian reference sites include Top Ryde Shopping Centre, Westfield Hornsby and Centro Box Hill.

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

On street bay sensing is becoming commonplace. The Street Smart System includes space-by-space vehicle detection, mapping, real-time enforcement alerts for spaces in violation, revenue accounting, and real-time meter malfunction reporting. The Street Smart System is based around the “Vehicle Sensor Puck”, a wireless mag field detector below the surface of each bay. Web-enabled mobile devices will alert Parking Enforcement Officers of violations as they occur. A password protected portal will be made available to personnel providing access to real-time geospatial views of the status of all monitored spaces and to related databases and reporting engines. The Unified Parking Interface supports and coordinates all individual system components and activities. Vehicle sensors, smart meters, and handheld enforcement devices from multiple vendors are all seamlessly integrated into one complete parking operation. Metric Aura Pay & Display Parking Machines provide cost-effective, flexible and secure controlled on-street parking as a solution to control urban traffic congestion. The consistency of Metric P&D Machines to perform in areas of high parking demands, effectively controls all your on-street parking requirements. More than 70,000 installations worldwide have been commissioned by Metric during their 30 years’ experience. Metric offers fully secured and durable unit housings, flexible networked systems and customised business solutions. Additionally, TMA’s Ticketing Division manufactures, converts and prints both paper and synthetic stocks required for all major on-street and off-street parking equipment. This range of supplier accredited products includes tickets, tags, rolls and infringement notices up to 10 colours, incorporating magnetic tape and high security features, including

138

magnetic tape encoding, UV and invisible fluorescent inks, holographic foils, holograms, trust seals, security paper and water marks. TMA’s expertise also extends to our installation teams and after sales servicing. TMA provides a comprehensive range of professional services across the entire spectrum of traffic and transport consulting. TMA’s parking equipment Engineers and Technicians are thoroughly experienced in software and parking systems and have undergone intensive training with Scheidt & Bachmann, Indect and Metric. This training is complemented and constantly reviewed through our in-house training facility. TMA also has the additional resources of fully qualified Engineers to provide assistance with the installation and on-going service and maintenance of the parking equipment. Furthermore, our professional and technical staff have extensive experience in traffic engineering, transport planning, traffic operations and traffic systems design. TMA’s commitment to exceptional Customer Service is evident in the innovative philosophy of providing an Account Manager as a single contact point for all equipment and ticketing queries. TMA is committed to supplying flexible solutions for all our customers including financing and full cost of life packages tailored to your needs. As a public company listed on the ASX, TMA provides you with the security of knowing that we will be here tomorrow. Please contact TMA on our Australia wide free call number 1800 222 879, or visit us at www.tmagroup.com.au for further information or to discuss TMA designing a unique solution for your precise parking needs.


• Access Control Equipment • Parking Guidance Systems • On-street Parking Meters

• Security Solutions • Traffic Equipment • Accredited Tickets

SECURITY GUIDANCE ACCESS PAY & DISPLAY

TICKETING TRAFFIC CONTROL

be first!

Freecall

1800www.tmagroup.com.au 222 879


Parking Officers wave goodbye to tyre chalking Ground   s ensor   t echnology   i ntegrates   with   M etro   p arking   m eters Enforcement Officers will no longer be reading pay and display tickets on dashboards nor will they be crouching down with chalk to mark and check vehicle tyres to prove whether vehicles have overstayed their welcome. running trials and looking closely at the technology. The race is now on to get the technology and the solution right.” “It’s quite staggering the information that’s already coming out of the Palmerston North installation, but once all 4,000 sensors are in place and after six months we will be able to present a really convincing business case.“ Oliver says that Councils will realise how sensor-based management can improve parking availability and deliver better traffic management. “Many processes around parking management are still done manually so an automated approach is valuable to them. If we can show the benefits from the Palmerston North City experience it will prove our case beyond question. The public will certainly like it as they no longer have to go back to their cars to display a ticket. They can just pay and walk away.” The rugged solar powered in-ground Frog sensors can be surface or flush mounted

Integrated Technology Solutions (ITS) which holds 90 percent share of the New Zealand on-street parking meter market is integrating ground sensors from Frogparking to Palmerston North’s 200 Metro ‘Pay and Display’ meters which are being modified to function as ‘Pay by Space’ parking meters. 4,000 solar powered sensors are being installed on-street at each of the city’s parking spaces enabling parking officers to know which spaces have had vehicles in them beyond their time limits and exactly for how long. Using GPS technology the system operates in real-time delivering a bird’s eye view of every parking space to a central management system then back to the Parking Officers’ handhelds with all of the necessary information displayed. “And because the ground sensors are fully integrated to their parking meters the officers can see on their handhelds which culprits have underpaid; or not paid at all,” says ITS Technical Director, Mark Oliver. “The Metro ‘Pay by Space’ meters can be programmed to zero out any unexpired time when vehicles depart and there is no lost revenue like there is with the older multi-bay meters,” says Oliver. “You can pay at any ‘Pay by Space’ Meter, whereas multi-bays have dedicated parking spaces which means lost revenue when one is out of order.” Oliver says that a boost in parking revenue can also be expected as more motorists will comply with the parking regulations because the sensors alert the Parking Officers in real-time. “Palmerston North will be the largest test case we know of for a parking bay sensor system integrated to ‘Pay by Space’ meters. Councils around the world are

140

ITS believes that Palmerston North will prove that the transition from ‘pay and display’ to ‘pay by space’ really works. “The benefits are numerous,” says Oliver. “Parking Officers will be able to direct traffic to available parking spaces as this information will be displayed on their handhelds.” This live occupancy data will enable Councils and private parking operators to better manage their parking spaces with flexible fee structures and time limits. ITS plans to offer the meter and ground sensor combination to clients across Australasia, United Kingdom, Canada and USA. “Because we are the manufacturer we can easily integrate our meters to any approved third party enforcement system.” says Oliver. “We have 1,000 Metro ‘Pay by Plate’ meters now operating in Brisbane and if this Council decides to introduce licence plate recognition cameras we will be ready for the integration.” ITS is also integrating ground sensors from MeterEye with Metro ‘Pay by Space’ meters operating in Liverpool, England. ITS has service offices in all major centres throughout Australia and New Zealand. For more information: Integrated Technology Solutions Technical Director: Mark Oliver +64 9 448 0200 Tel: Email: Mark_Oliver@ITSLONLINE.COM Web: ITSLONLINE.COM


GIS METRO ‘Pay by Space’ and ‘Pay by Plate’ machines are ticketless parking systems where motorists enter the Bay number or their Vehicle Registration number. Both systems link to a central enforcement database for on‐line tracking and enforcement providing parking information in real‐time to Enforcement Officer handhelds. Information searching is also available on‐screen at the machines. For a fully automated parking scheme Parking Bay Sensors and Licence Plate Recognition Cameras can be integrated to the METRO machines. Designed for on‐street and off‐street parking. See story opposite page

Durable Construction with optional Security Sensors and Audible Alarm

Industry leading aluminium housing with stainless steel doors and non‐corrosive powder coated finish. Secure Cash Vault with 4.5 litre interchangeable self‐locking cash tin. Optional shock and vibration sensors for security alerts. A piezo audible alarm can also be fitted. Certified to IP33 by independent laboratory.

Electronic Door Locking and Door Access Logging

Six point locking on upper and lower cabinets with locked mid‐security plate. Electronic ID ibutton keys for secure key handling. Fast re‐registration for lost or stolen ibutton keys. Identifiable ibutton keys means door access logging with tracking of users. Door sensors activate an alert when doors are opened without an authorised ibutton electronic key.

Capacitive Touch Pad User Panel (0-9 A-Z)

Supersized 12cm LCD Monochrome Graphical Display

State‐of‐the‐art touch pad with easy‐to‐use button controls for PIN Code data entry by customers. Tough polycarbonate high contrast ‘silver white’ display screen with automatic backlighting. Ample room to display tariff rates and customer instructions; no need for machine labels. Machine status and last 50 transaction logs displayed for enforcement staff via ibutton menu access.

Reliable Payment Methods with Real time Transaction Processing

Coins: Automatic coin shutter for valid coin acceptance with coin escrow for cancelled transactions. Credit Card: Pre‐authorised PCI compliant transactions on‐line. Fastest transaction time available. Mobile Phone: Payment by SMS text. Optional Banknote Acceptance: Lockable banknote stacker in vault.

Energy efficient Long-life batteries with Solar trickle charging

Integrated 5W solar panel fitted as standard. Optional 10W Solar Panel is available for extending battery life of machines installed in darker areas or for machines with banknote acceptance. Central data storage with an internal failover database.

Over-the-Air Programming, Alarms and Warnings

Web Based Management and Enforcement Database Systems

Remote management of tariff alterations, ibutton locking access rights and display messages. Errors and Warnings to a Central Management System | Audit and Performance Reporting Statistical Data | Enforcement Data | Reports on demand | New Version 2011 EziCom 2 Release

Switchable Print Mode for Customer Receipts or Pay and Display Tickets

Option to switch on printing for customer receipts or ticket printing for Pay & Display functionality.

Established sites with all METRO Series models operating

First and largest ‘Pay by Plate’ site operating in Australia (1,000 units) First ‘Pay by Space’ site being integrated with ground sensor technology in New Zealand (200 units) Australia, New Zealand, Ireland, United Kingdom, USA and Canada Manufactured by GIS (Part of the Linfox Armaguard Group)

Jump the queue with GIS integrated parking solutions AUSTRALIA Integrated Technology Services Pty Ltd

NEW ZEALAND Integrated Technology Solutions Ltd

Level 1, 12a Rodborough Road, Frenchs Forest NSW 2086 TEL +61 (02) 9454 8700 FAX +61 (02) 9975 3966

21 William Pickering Drive, North Harbour Auckland 0632 TEL +64 (09) 415 6588 FAX +64 (09) 415 6599

EMAIL

enquiries@ITSLONLINE.COM

WEB

ITSLONLINE.COM

Part of the Linfox Armaguard Group

GIS Metro is classified within the following EU Directives: EMC Directive 2001/108/ECU | Machine Directive 2006/42/EC and further conforms with the following EU Harmonized Standards: EN 12414:1999 | EN 61000‐6‐3:2007| EN 61000‐6‐1:2007 EN 12100‐1:2003+A1:2009 | EN 12100‐2:2003+A1:2009


Car Parking Solutions

Car Park Accreditation Scheme The City of Melbourne established a car park accreditation scheme to raise the standard of safety in car parks. The scheme also recognises and rewards both responsible practice and improvements to operational management promoting safety and security of car parks and their patrons. The scheme is one of a range of initiatives currently being implemented by the City of Melbourne to promote safe transport to and from the city. How does the accreditation work? The City of Melbourne Car Park Accreditation Scheme requires a demonstrated commitment to the safety and security of customers and their property through the maintenance of specific safety standards.

What are the benefits of participating in the accreditation? The safety of car parks has been identified as a significant issue affecting public perception of safety in the city. Making improvements to your car park will provide you with the following benefits: • free advice and assistance from the City of Melbourne and Victoria Police on how to improve your operations; • improved safety and security practice within your car park; • raised staff awareness of safety and security; • raised participation of your staff in processes to improve safety and security within your car park;

Only car parks which clearly demonstrate a commitment to the safety and security of customers and their property will be accredited.

• improved safety for your customers while in your premises;

Car parks will be assessed by an independent team using specific safety criteria. Commitment to safety will be rated on a star basis:

• overall reduction of crime related costs, for example repair of property damage and graffiti removal;

Accreditation is undertaken every three years to recognise continuous improvement and maintenance of the safety standards achieved.

• improved customer confidence and repeat custom;

Who can participate in the accreditation? Every off-street car park in the City of Melbourne is eligible to participate in the accreditation and involvement is voluntary. Who makes up the assessment team? Participating car parks will be assessed by a team of representatives from: • City of Melbourne; and • Victoria Police Crime Prevention Unit.

142

• opportunity for you to promote your business as an accredited car park; • promotional material for prominent display in your premises to advertise your accreditation to customers; and • inclusion in the City of Melbourne’s accredited car park advertising initiatives. How to participate The accreditation process Every off-street car park in the municipality will receive information


about the City of Melbourne Car Park Accreditation Scheme. To be involved in the scheme simply follow the process outlined below. Step One: Documentation for the accreditation process Documentation required for the accreditation can be downloaded from the City of Melbourne website www.melbourne.vic.gov.au. This information will explain the accreditation process and get you started in making improvements to prepare for the accreditation process.

The City of Melbourne Car Park Accreditation Scheme is a joint initiative of the City of Melbourne and Victoria Police, developed in consultation with car park operators.

Step Two: read through all documentation carefully Step Three: Self Assessment Checklist - how would you rate your car park? Undertake a self assessment of your facility using the self assessment checklist. If required, use the improvement tips incorporated in the guidelines to assist in improving your facility and operations. Step Four: register your interest To register your interest in participating in the accreditation scheme or to find out more information contact City of Melbourne on (02) 9658 9658. Step Five: Discuss the results and rating Once the audit has been completed the assessment team will make an appointment with you to discuss the results. Where appropriate, all car parks will be provided with feedback to assist in making future improvements to achieve higher level accreditation. Car parks that achieve accreditation will receive materials to promote their facility as a City of Melbourne Accredited Car Park.

143


Parking Ranger Abuse OH&S time bomb defused? How often have you found that time and events have left you ten minutes away from an expired meter? Does Prayer work or did Lady Luck keep the Parking Ranger otherwise occupied while you stress tested your heart, hurrying and dodging pedestrians unconcerned by your little parking indiscretion? In response to these challenges a number of councils are currently exploring the role of technology in addressing these issues, specifically the use of handheld devices and in-ground sensors that can register the duration that a vehicle has occupied a parking bay, to enable enforcement officers to capture an image, with the time and date of the infringement event and then automatically issue an infringement notice. Whilst handheld devices and bay sensors deliver some productivity improvements these approaches have failed to address the low detection rates due to limited manpower and officer OH&S issues. The “They” just got a technology boost from Mars...via the Scientist Developers of SenSen Networks Pty Ltd,. SenForce Automated Mobile Parking Infringement Detection & Enforcement As an astounding National average, better than 90 percent of us get away with it – “just this once more.” But ultimately there is no free lunch – or parking. The business owners and staff that depend on customers having access to the door – pay the price. The clients that circle the block in frustration, or abandon the attempt pay the price. The city assets of road, curb and path are just that little less productive for the residents, who in turn – pay the price. “Can’t stand the place, can never find a park”. “They” should do something about it... School Zone/War Zone – like a highway accident the “regular impromptu” meeting of the 5 minute set down parents stretching into 10 – grows a tail of frustrated traffic around the block – good design is thwarted – “just a couple more minutes” - Double time means Double Parking, Trapped Parking, “ Let me Out!!” No Standing, Kids at risk, Road rage...work rage, there is a price being paid. “They” should do something about this... Parking Rangers – their mothers love them, and their partners and their children and their friends – and the Council even employs them – these street game linesmen – as tough as any umpire and just as one eyed – wont listen, wouldn’t listen – had a good excuse too - handing out $50 fines... not so popular with some. Punt the Parking Ranger – an Australian pastime – give em an earful...”get a real job”. But this is their ‘real job’ and a tough one with 67% of Council Enforcement Staff in NSW verbally and physically abused by an increasingly difficult public in 2010 It’s the job which keeps the school, business and city traffic turning over. It’s the job that is an Occupational, Health and Safety nightmare for Council Human Resources

144

SenForce is a complete law enforcement solution for councils, police, and local government agencies carrying the responsibility of managing street parking spaces and making the streets safer. It is an advanced, vehicle mounted, intelligent robot that automatically invokes the (i) location-based orientation of cameras, (ii) infringement detection and (iii) enforcement schemes. Councils have multiple car and parking configurations e.g. school zones, clearways, loading zones, time limits, angled parking, etc. and reconfiguring cameras to car parking and location schemes is a complex process – for a human. SenSen’s roof rack mounted Robotic Pan Tilt dual camera Automatic Number Plate Recognition head unit/s are cost effective and are designed to be used with no specialist training. The cameras are automatically repositioned and re-focused; to deal with say, Angle parked cars rather than Parallel parked cars, all on the move at 40kph, according to a preset map of various parking bays in the city. SenForce is a Council Business Breakthrough, with vehicle mounted Robotic Technology delivering a dramatic improvement in Enforcement Officer Occupation, Health and Safety, together with Officer Productivity, in Non–Confrontational parking (and other regulation) infringement data capture. Senforce has been developed by SenSen Networks Pty Ltd, of Melbourne, to meet Council enforcement requirements in collaboration with Councils to meet Council needs. Its primary targeted benefits include • OH&S for Council Staff (based on total separation of enforcement staff from the infringement event and the offending / offended and often abusive public) • Enforcement Staff Productivity (based on (a) mobile speeds 30 x that of an Enforcement Officer and (b) automated image based infringements with mapped locations that are easily validated by staff using established legally tested back office practices) • Predictable and controlled capture of enforcement revenues for improved public amenities • Improved Business Access and Traffic Compliance


SenSen Networks is a leading provider of Video Business Intelligence solutions that extract relevant information from video cameras and help enterprises to optimize their business operations. The most advanced surveillance sciences and competencies have been successfully brought to bear on Local Government Authority challenges in Parking Enforcement by SenSen Networks in the form of SenForce – Mobile Law Enforcement.  It delivers a new generation technology to ensure the safety, efficiency and productivity of Enforcement Officers in an increasingly hazardous public environment.

Capital cost free evaluation – your time - our capital and engineering As part of a special promotion SenSen is offering a capital cost free evaluation to experience the dramatic improvements in operational efficiency and safety of parking rangers in carrying out their enforcement duties. As part of the evaluation kit, SenSen Networks will provide >>

A fully equipped vehicle to the Council Enforcement Team.

>>

A representative area of regulated parking will be selected by Council in consultation with SenSen staff, for route mapping to the Robot Navigator 

>>

The system captures -- the license plate images of cars, -- converts them into alpha numeric strings -- tags them with the time and GPS coordinate and -- logs them into the database as the user drives the vehicle around a parking lot or a road where parking is to be enforced.

Vehicles that violate regulations are automatically detected and the software generates and logs them as infringements.

The regulated parking zones can be configured & edited using Google Map and Google Earth. >>

Infringements, time stamped image/location files and reports will be generated by the mobile enforcement officer – including -- system generated indicative infringement (no stopping, no standing etc. with GPS location) -- vehicle image against background image for context and officer location recognition -- vehicle number plate image

For booking please contact us at:  info@sensennetworks.com  or call us on Tel: +61 3 9852 0448 and a SenSen representative will contact you promptly


Shedding Light on Coslee

Australia and South East Asia, which makes them well equipped to meet the needs of the most discerning of customers. In addition to our comprehensive product range, we provide a convenient installation service to better facilitate projects.

Coslee is a proudly Australian owned supplier of a wide range of poles used in floodlighting, major and minor street lighting, car parks, rail yards, docks, large storage areas, traffic signals, tram and light rail systems and electricity transmission networks. Our pole designs are noteworthy not only for their functional versatility but also for their environmentally sensitive and aesthetic qualities. Our extensive fabrication facilities also have the capability to manufacture heavier fabricated products such as road sign structures, steel moulds for concrete columns and overhead bridge gantry cranes. Our main office and factory is in Thomastown, Melbourne and we’re also represented throughout Victoria, New South Wales, Tasmania and South Australia The Coslee Guarantee Coslee is proudly committed to providing high-quality product and exemplary, reliable service for the construction and infrastructure sector. Our Business is built on fostering cooperative relationships with our clients while providing real value for money. Our staff have substantial and diverse fabrication experience throughout

COSLEE

DESIGN FABRICATION INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE HARDWARE

The Leading Light Coslee invests in the future of the industry by working with Monash University to maximise the road safety of frangible poles. The advanced level of testing and intensive research is helping to lead our industry towards safer, more reliable, better designed products. Our Project Portfolio Coslee is an approved pole supplier for Vicroads, RTA and power authority companies. We supplied 4,500 lighting and shared pathway poles for the M7 Project in Sydney, following similar success with several other infrastructure projects, including • Craigieburn Bypass

• Packenham Bypass

• Brunswick Heads Bypass

• Boniville Upgrade

• Melbourne Eastlink Project

• Deer Park Bypass

• Geelong Bypass

• Southern Link

• Connect Infrastructure

• Donnybrook Road Interchange

• Monash Freeway

• Citylink

• Westgate Freeway

• M1 Upgrade

• Hume Highway – Northern and Southern Alliance • Brooker Highway Tasmania

17 - 19 Industrial Ave, Thomastown Victoria 3074 Tel +61 3 9357 2311 fax +61 3 9359 5888 Coslee.com.au

Airport Lighting Camera Poles Street Lighting Poles Freeway Lighting Poles Sporting Ovals Lighting Lawn Bowls Lighting Car Park Lighting Poles Construction Sites Solar Panel Poles Telecommunication Poles Banner Poles Flood Lighting Mining Sites Railway Stations Car Park Lighting Shopping Centres

147


Traffic Management

Roads Australia

The roads to recovery

The recent devastating flood events along Australia’s east coast have again highlighted one of the most pressing issues for state and local government - funding for road maintenance, renewal and new capital works. As councils count the costs of flood damage to local roads and state governments implement infrastructure recovery strategies, questions are again being asked about how we, as a community, can adequately fund the ongoing task of keeping our roads serviceable and safe, in pace with a growing economy. It’s a question that is high on the agenda of the national peak road transport stakeholder group, Roads Australia (RA). Over the last decade, Roads Australia has emerged as one of the most important voices in the road industry. Its more than 70 member organisations are the ‘who’s who’ of the Australian road industry, and include state road and transport agencies, private road operators, constructors, consultants, materials and equipment suppliers and representatives of the transport union, freight and motoring sectors. RA’s fundamental role is to create high-level networking opportunities across the road industry. It hosts events around Australia that bring together industry leaders from the private sector, alongside department heads and ministers. Increasingly, these networks are being used as both a sounding board for government policy initiatives and a platform for policy discussion. “The strength of our organisation is our unique membership mix of public and private sector players,” says Roads Australia President, David Stuart-Watt. “By bringing both sides to the table, we can facilitate productive discussions and broach solutions on a wide range of issues that affect our roads and the industry at large.” It’s this collaborative approach that has fueled discussion within RA’s membership about the task of funding and financing new roads, as well as asset maintenance and renewal. “Our road asset - national, arterial and local - is conservatively valued at more than $280 billion,” Mr Stuart-Watt says. “The task of adequately maintaining this asset - not to mention adding new capacity where it’s necessary - has become increasing difficult for governments of all persuasions and jurisdictions. “There are a number of significant, unfunded road projects across the country that have long been recognised as vital economic assets - projects like the M4 extension in Sydney, Melbourne’s outer metro

148

ring/E6 transport corridor, and various corridor upgrades along Queensland’s Bruce Highway. “On top of that, we have the increasing cost burden of aging road infrastructure that urgently needs repair and renewal, exacerbated by the impacts of natural disasters like the recent flooding in Queensland and Victoria. “Federal, state and local governments have competing priorities and clearly don’t have all the dollars required to invest in these and other critical transport infrastructure projects - both road and rail - and, in the wake of the GFC and recent high profile private toll road failures, Australia will need to be innovative if we are to attract private funding for infrastructure.” Mr Stuart-Watt believes the PPP model still has much to offer in the future. “We don’t want to throw the baby out with the bath water, but we do need to explore a broader range of financing solutions that are attractive to institutional investors,” he says. Beyond the challenge of identifying these financing models, RA believes it’s time to take a more fundamental look at the current road funding regime. “The current approach no longer meets the national need in terms of efficient, effective, long-term transport infrastructure planning and delivery,” Mr Stuart-Watt says. “We need a better system – not just to ensure roads are adequately funded on an on-going basis, but that spending decisions are based on realising the best returns, and assets are used more effectively.” As part of this discussion, RA would also like to see the debate on road pricing reform given greater encouragement. “There is a lot of political sensitivity surrounding the issue of road pricing. At the same time, we believe there is a lack of clear information and evidence available to the community to have an informed discussion,” Mr Stuart-Watt says. “For example, most road users mistakenly believe they ‘pay’ for the construction and upkeep of roads through fuel tax and registration charges. The reality is that only a percentage of the fuel tax we pay at the pump goes back into the road network - nowhere near the amount required to adequately maintain existing roads and meet new capacity requirements. “The advocates of road pricing reform argue that a ‘user pays’ approach, where indirect taxes and charges such as fuel excise and registration are replaced by some form of direct charging, is a much fairer and accountable approach.


“On what basis such a charge might be levied – be it distance travelled, time of day, the environmental impact of the vehicle and/or its physical impact on the road surface – needs to be intensely scrutinized, particularly in the context of social equity issues. “The question also arises as to how the revenue raised might be hypothecated – to road use and operations (including public transport) and construction and maintenance. “What is not in question is that efficient and effective land transport development requires long-term planning and assured long-term funding - and from that perspective, we’d like to see a broad, informed debate about what benefits road pricing reform might deliver.” Recently Roads Australia has facilitated a number of industry forums on road pricing to inform its members on developments and key stakeholder policy positions, both here and overseas. “We think we have an important role to play, not in advocating a position one way or the other but in ensuring industry, government and the community have all the facts and a platform to discuss and debate the issues,” Mr Stuart-Watt says. For more information about Roads Australia, visit www.roads.org.au

Stuart Watt

East Link

149


Traffic Control Equipment and Advisory Variable Message Signs

A.D. Engineering International, based in Perth Western Australia, specialise in the design, manufacture and installation of high quality electronic equipment for Motorways and Intelligent Transport System projects. The 2011 product range features Information Display Systems, Large Format Variable Message Signs, Radar Speed Displays, Changeable Message Signs, Ramp Metering for Motorways, Electronic Speed Limit Signs and Car Park Guidance Systems. To date we have completed over 500+ turn-key projects for various Government Departments, State Authorities managing Roads, State Railways, Mining/Construction Industry and private sector organizations throughout Australia and overseas. A.D. Engineering also provides onsite commissioning services and protocol interfacing to exiting traffic operation centre and control networks. Enquiries A.D. Engineering International Pty Ltd Toll Free: 1800 048 700 (Australia) Overseas: 61 8 9248 6990 Email sales@adengineering.com.au Internet www.adengineering.com.au


CPG

As a proportion of all journeys in Melbourne, this is a small contribution, but for CPG it has been a significant shift in the way we travel.

The green light from new CBD location

This way, in addition to our consultancy support to government and businesses, CPG continues to demonstrate its commitment to the development of a better Australia.

According to the Department of Transport’s VISTA survey, trips made by people travelling to work account for approximately 25% of a total of over 11 million daily trips in Melbourne. Of those trips, approximately 75% (approx. 980,000 home to work journeys per day) are made by people driving their car. If we consider that most of those trips are done by people driving on their own, we have that there are almost 1 million cars on our roads contributing to congestion, air and noise pollution, driven by commuters. CPG Australia has recently completed the relocation of approximately 180 Melbourne staff to new premises on 469 Latrobe Street in the Melbourne CBD. The workplace is located within a few metres of the entrance to Flagstaff rail station, has easy access to trams and offers facilities for cyclists to park their bike, including showers and lockers. It has been estimated that, from day one, approximately 60 cars have been taken off the road as a direct result of the relocation. As people learn different ways to access the office, it is expected that most, if not all, of the remaining drivers will leave their cars at home and will cycle or use public transport to travel to work.

CPG

Traffic & Transport Team

THE GREEN LIGHT FROM OUR NEW CBD LOCATION CPG Australia offers traffic and transport related services and has a number of experienced staff with broad skills in transport policy development, modelling and analysis, traffic engineering and management and infrastructure design. We specialise in: – Transport strategy: demand and revenue forecasting, business case development, public transport planning, development of integrated transport strategies, accessibility assessment – Traffic engineering and management: traffic and parking impact of land use developments and transport schemes, road safety audits, local area and worksite traffic management, cycling and walking assessments, traffic signal design and analysis, signs and line marking plans and street lighting design – Transport infrastructure design: for local, collector and arterial roads Level 3 469 La Trobe Street Melbourne t +61 3 9993 7888 | w cpg-global.com | e melbourne@au.cpg-global.com

Buildings | Communications | Energy | Industrial | Resources | Transport | Urban Development | Water

151


Ramguard Bollards Ramguard Bollards is an entirely Australian owned and operated family business. We look to provide our clients with a friendly and helpful service, a superior product range and strict delivery schedules. We have been conducting business in Perth, Australia and New Zealand for over 17 years. Our wide and unique product range has been completely developed from the ground up, in house. All design, fabrication and assembly is carried out here in Perth. Our products have been crafted and styled to perform for many years in the harshest applications. We consider ourselves specialists in Retractable Bollard systems both Manual and Automatic. We developed the simple and user friendly R1 Manual Retractable Bollard to provide adequate security and resistance to attacks. The R1 meets the benchmark of the industry and matches what other companies offer. The R2 Manual Retractable Bollard was designed to supersede the R1’s ability to resist many types of attacks. The R2 offers superior appearance and resistance to both vehicle and hand and power tool attacks. The R2 was designed to cause major problems for any method of attack. Ramguard’s popular R3 12volt Automatic Bollard is becoming common place around Perth. The R3 is suitable for almost any location and application, with its simple, reliable and cost efficient design, you can be assured of many years of problem free operation. The R3’s low voltage efficiency allows hundreds of operations entirely off an optional 40W solar panel. Our entire range is also available in the classy Stainless Steel. If your site requires a higher class finish or a need to match existing architecture, we have you covered. If you find our product range does not include what you are looking for, we are willing to assist you in designing and developing a product suitable for your particular application. Dealing with Ramguard is a breeze. We make your life as easy by asking the right questions, providing the product that suits your application perfectly and backing you up with a full 1 year workmanship warranty. We look forward to assisting you with any inquiries.

152


AUSTRALIA’S LEADING GUIDE & MARKER POST MANUFACTURERS

MARKER POST SYSTEM

Job No: 5765 Date: 23.10.2008

BURIED CABLES

HIGH PRESSURE BURIED GAS PIPELINE

SERVICES BURIED BELOW

BURIED CABLES

BURIED CABLES

HIGH KEEP OUT RESTRICTED SERVICES PRESSURE BURIED BELOW BLASTING AREA BURIED GAS PIPELINE

HIGH BURIED PRESSURE CABLES BURIED GAS PIPELINE

HIGH SERVICES PRESSURE BURIED BELOW BURIED GAS PIPELINE

NO ENTRY

SERVICES BURIED BELOW

BURIED KEEP OUT YOUR MESSAGE HERE CABLES BLASTING

KEEP OUT BLASTING

HIGH RESTRICTED PRESSURE AREA BURIED GAS PIPELINE

RESTRICTED BURIED KEEP OUT AREA BLASTING CABLES

Client: Roadside Products Version: Final

Job Description: Steel Colours: CMYK

Designer: Ken McLennan

462 Wellington Street Launceston TAS 7250 | p. 03 6341 1800 | f. 03 6341 1899 | info@walkerdesigns.com.au | www.walkerdesigns.com.au

BURIED SERVICES NO ENTRY BURIED BELOW CABLES

HIGH RESTRICTED BURIED NO ENTRY PRESSURE AREA CABLES BURIED GAS PIPELINE

HIGH YOUR PRESSURE MESSAGE HERE BURIED GAS PIPELINE

©

SERVICES KEEP OUT

RE

BURIED BELOW BLASTING

HIGH SERVICES YOUR NO ENTRY

PRESSURE MESSAGE HERE BURIED BELOW BURIED GAS PIPELINE

KE BL

SERVICES YOUR MESSAGE HERE BURIED BELOW

AR RANTY W

ABN 68 387 047 965

YEARS YEARS

A R A N T EE

6/38 Eastern Service Road Stapylton, Queensland 4207 PO Box 7278 Loganholme QLD 4207

Web www.durapost.com.au Email sales@durapost.com.au

Head Office & Manufacturing 45-49 St Leonards Road Launceston, Tasmania 7250 Po Box 66 Newstead TAS 7250

Phone 1300 794 397 Fax 1300 794 511 7318

GU


Conference Venues and Solutions

Getting the most from your conference The conference portfolio covers a broad range of industries, including mining, resources and energy; education, healthcare; government and social policy; facilities design and management; legal; security; environment; financial services; industrial relations and workers compensation; indigenous affairs and native title; media and communications and infrastructure and private-public partnerships. Each event is project managed by a team of researchers, producers, marketers and event managers. A substantial lead time of six to twelve months is paramount to a successful and well rounded event. A feasibility study is conducted by the research team to ensure the program is written with the market place in mind. The ultimate goal is to provide crucial information where there is a shortfall in the industry. After surmising the topics the conference producer then works closely with the industry experts to write the program and secure keynote speakers for the conference. The event manager’s co-ordinate all the conference administration including the venue and the logistics, to facilitate the speaker presentations and the event functions. The conference marketing team are responsible for ensuring the relevant industry sectors are made aware of the event through a tailored campaign, targeting strategic company managers and operators. This is done primarily through one of the company’s most unique assets, the broad spectrum global business database, which is maintained and continually researched by a dedicated database team. The PR and social media team facilitate the various mediums to host the event updates and networking activities. The events themselves provide the most lucrative networking opportunities and allow the delegates and guests to have direct access to key industry figureheads. The client relations team are responsible for customer service and provide assistance with specific requests, general information and conference bookings. They also greet delegates and speakers at the conference registration desk and are on hand throughout the event to take messages during the conference proceedings and assist with any special requirements. The Sponsorship Managers are responsible for looking after the organisation’s exhibiting or sponsoring a function at the event. This is a popular aspect of the conference as they are all industry specific and provide a great platform for both vendor and end user alike. They are far more personable than a trade show as the events are niche and targeted at senior level personnel. Most of the larger events also host welcome receptions, cocktail functions and gala dinners to extend social opportunities and enhance networking opportunities to conference delegates and speakers. Some of the conference programs offer extracurricular activities such as site tours to various facilities and also offer hands on master classes and workshops to further the learning experience.

154

Most of the events are an industry success, however on rare occasions an event may have to be cancelled or postponed, due to industry fallouts, legislative changes or unsuitable timing. From the onset of each event plan, a risk-management strategy must be formulated and this is carefully audited by the company’s financial team, to ensure overheads are carefully hedged. Any business plan runs a risk and this is why other organisations commission Informa to convene events on their behalf, to waive any risk and pass this on to the established conference convener. The conference portfolio’s have a flagship event in each sector plus specialised forums across the board. The healthcare conferences focus on health and medical policy and healthcare facilities. The annual Health Congress is the flagship running continuously since 1998. The Health Insurance Summit also has an established following, running each year since 2001. Other annuals include The Future of the Pharmaceutical Benefits Scheme; The GP Super Clinics Conference; Australia’s Ageing Population Summit; Australian Obesity Summit; Hospital Reform Summit; Integrated Cancer Centres Symposium; Green Hospitals & Health Facilities Planning & Design Summits. The Higher Education Series boast a broad range of market leading events for the tertiary education sector. The Annual Higher Education Summit is the series’ flagship event and Australia’s only strategic policy driven event that locates in all of the region’s major academic heartlands. The Higher Education series comprises policy driven events, learning and teaching focused forums, regulatory conferences, social inclusion, student satisfaction and planning & design based gatherings. The Informa group also incorporates the academic publishing divisions of Routledge, Taylor & Francis. Informa is also the largest organiser of transport and rail conferences in Australia. These programs are designed in conjunction with


Informa publication, Lloyds List. The Lloyd’s List DCN State Transport Series include transport infrastructure conferences in NSW; VIC; QLD; WA; SA and NT. These transport events asses the future plans for transport infrastructure development and financing across Australia. AusRAIL is Informa Australia’s largest event. It is convened in association with the Australasian Railway Association (ARA) and is the nation’s largest conference and exhibition for the rail industry, attracting over 3,000 attendees per annum Also in association with the ARA are the following rail conferences Rail Safety Conference; Urban Rail Conference; The Rail Suppliers Forum; The Rail Interoperability Workshop; New Zealand Rail Conference; RISSB National Rail Turnouts Workshop and the Environmental Management in Rail Conference. Other prominent annual transport conferences include AusIntermodal and the Port & Maritime Security Conference. The Mining, Resources & Energy portfolio is the largest in Australasia and covers all aspects of global commodities, mining and energy. The Annual Global Iron Ore and Steel Conference and SEAOCC are the flagship events. Other topics include, SCADA, geothermal energy; clean coal development; LNG trading; FLNG & FPSO; coal seam gas (CSG) and coal mine methane (CMM) and coal seam water (CSW); coal to liquids (CTL) and gas to liquids (GTL); longwall mining; native title issues; modular construction; bulk materials handling; nickel; zinc; gold; rare earths, future metals; shale gas and much more. The International Mining & Metals (IMM) events cover a range of topics for the international mining community ranging from bulk commodities, base metals, energy and growing resource sectors. These mining and metal conferences are held in a variety of countries including Brazil, UK, Germany, Mozambique, New Caledonia, Denmark and China. Other Informa companies in Australia include two management reports businesses, Datamonitor & Ovum and have offices in Sydney & Melbourne. Info Informa Australia are also the publishers of the following industry titles: • The Australian Journal of Mining • Lloyds List Daily Commercial News • Rail Express • The Earthmover and Civil Contractor • Bulk Handling Review These publications work hand in hand with the conference titles to form a prominent industry partnership, culminating in a well established business information and event provider.

Tina Larssen – Conference Marketing Director at Informa Australia Tina has worked in the conference industry for the past 16 years. Tina has a diploma in business management and a background in consumer and B2B sales, brand management and direct marketing. She has been with Informa since 1997 and has seen substantial changes in the day to day operations of executing a business plan, with the help of developing technology and media. Informa plc is a multinational conference and publishing company, with its head office in Zug, Switzerland. It has offices in more than 43 countries and more than 8,500 employees. It owns numerous brands including AchieveGlobal, CRC Press, Datamonitor, ESI International, Lloyd’s List, Routledge and Taylor & Francis. Informa Australia is the nation’s leading business to business event organiser and has established alliances with prominent industry bodies. Each event program also receives a strong state and federal government representation. Delegates benefit from first-hand information of controversial case studies and business strategies, delivered by well-known companies in each industry sector. The acquisition of well-established conference company, IIR, in 2005 strengthened the market positioning of the company and further enhanced the event portfolio in even more industry sectors, together culminating in over 250 events per annum.

155


Bond University Function Centre Bond University Function Centre is the ideal venue for your next event. The striking Bond University campus – complete with its sandstone arches, lakeside setting and landscaped grounds – makes for an unforgettable venue. Bond University Function Centre is the ideal venue for cocktail parties, conferences, gala and offsite dinners, expo’s, corporate and social functions, wedding receptions and ceremonies. Our Banquet and Conference facilities are specifically designed to cater for everything from large conventions, seminars and new product launches to corporate meetings, training and incentive programs. The lakeside setting offers an ideal site for an outdoor function as well as the ADCO Amphitheatre and Alumni Court and Don’s Pavilion.

Bond University Function Centre has an extensive range of 32 meeting and function rooms and is able to cater for functions for 10 to 500 persons. The University Club and Princeton Ballroom, both offer sweeping views across Lake Orr and the water fountain. Both these room provide natural lighting with black out curtains available on request. The University Club and Princeton Ballroom are the perfect rooms for corporate or social breakfasts, lunches and dinners, with seating up to 320 people. Our premier theatre – The Cerum Theatre is one of many theatres available at Bond University. The Cerum Theatre can seat up to 500 guests theatre style or 465 guests classroom style. The Cerum Theatre also has a spacious foyer to network with your guests or for catering. Accommodation and transport can be arranged with affiliated hotels. Bond University Function Centre is located on the Gold Coast and is 60 minutes from Brisbane, 20 minutes from Coolangatta airport, and 15 minutes from Surfers Paradise and five minutes from the beautiful beaches at Burleigh. Our talented and professional staff will work with you to ensure your event runs smoothly. Full day delegate packages from $49.00 per person including complimentary parking. To ensure your next event is memorable, please contact Bond University Function Centre.

Bond University Function Centre Events Sales Manager Tracy – Lee Smith P: 07 5595 4124 F: 07 5595 5009 E: functions@bond.edu.au W: http://www.bond.edu.au/life-at-bond/facilities-services/functioncentre/index.htm A: 14 University Drive, Bond University Queensland 4229

156


Rydges Parramatta Rydges Parramatta has a modern, spacious and relaxed atmosphere which features a stylish open-plan lobby, 151 guest rooms, 13 Conference Rooms, Indoor Heated Pool, 2 Restaurants and 3 Bars including the indoor and outdoor Winning Post Sports Bar with TAB and big screen TVs. mixes A la Carte dining with traditional ‘buffet.’ You will get to select from a range of freshly prepared meats, poultry, fish and pasta cooked by your own chef on the live cooking station while you also indulge in a selection of seafood. We also have a vast array of delicious desserts, cheese and fruit. “FIRE & ICE” is available on Tuesday, Wednesday & Thursday nights & Race Day Saturdays from 6:00pm – 9.30pm. Steeds Club Grill & Bar Steeds Restaurant won ‘Restaurant of the Year’ in the Parramatta Advertiser’s Business Achiever Awards 2010 in the Restaurant category. Shelley Watson, Steeds Supervisor also won Western Sydney “Employee of the Year”. Steeds Club, Grill & Bar Restaurant specialises in market fresh Seafood, Prime Australian Beef, International and Australian wines and Cocktails. This beautiful Restaurant has a menu that changes seasonally with a variety of flavours to suit all palates. Steeds is the perfect meeting place for either a quiet drink or an intimate dining experience. Bar open Monday to Friday & Race Day Saturdays from 5:00pm - 10:00pm. Restaurant - (Dinner) - Monday to Friday & Race Day Saturdays 6:00pm - 9:30pm Rydges Parramatta is just a short drive to Parramatta’s CBD, retail outlets and Westfield Parramatta. Rydges Parramatta is located directly opposite Rosehill Gardens Racecourse and other local attractions include Parramatta Stadium, ACER Arena, The Parramatta River Cat, Homebush Sporting Precinct, ANZ Stadium, Sydney Aquatic Centre and more. All 151 of our guest rooms have the famous ‘Dream Bed’. Luxury Egyptian cotton linen and sumptuous plump ‘Dream Pillows’ accompany the ‘Dream Beds’ to ensure a perfect nights sleep. In addition to the Rydges ‘Dream Beds’, the rooms boast 32-inch LCD flat screen televisions, glass-top work stations with ergonomical leather chairs and the latest in-room technology featuring the ‘Media Hub’ and Broadband. Conferences, Banquets & Weddings Rydges Parramatta features 18 conference and event venues catering from 2 to 400 guests. Thirteen (13) purpose-built event venues with its main venue, The Triple Crown Ballroom, catering for up to 300 banquet style. Rydges Parramatta’s Mezzanine Level is exclusive to conferences and functions with convenient access to hotel lifts, accommodation rooms, bars and restaurants. Our dedicated Banquets kitchen team will guarantee fast food service for all breaks. The versatility of our two in-house restaurants ensures we provide your delegates with a genuine choice of dining. Stock Café has a modern and contemporary menu and also hosts a new & exciting dinner buffet concept called “FIRE & ICE”. FIRE & ICE

158

The Winning Post Bar An indoor/outdoor Sports bar which is located on the lower-ground level of Rydges Parramatta. We are located directly opposite Rosehill Gardens Racecourse. You can come and watch the races on our great Indoor/Outdoor Big Screens or come after the races and let the party continue. We also have a $10 Lunch Special or you can order from our extensive ‘A la Carte’ Menu, where we have a large amount of tasty, yet affordable, meals to choose from. Open 7 days a week for lunch and dinner from 12.00 noon. Champs Bar Specialising in boutique tap beers, cocktails and wines. International Tapas is served nightly which is perfect for a light meal option. Live entertainment on race day Saturday’s. Come and experience what the food, staff and atmosphere at Rydges Parramatta has to offer. Open 5 nights a week from 4.00pm and race day Saturdays.


The

Ultimate Conference Venue

Rydges Parramatta Standard Day Delegate Package $67.00 per person Minimum of 15 Delegates Inclusions: • Conference room hire • Arrival tea and coffee • Morning tea break • Selection of a hot buffet lunch or working style lunch • Afternoon tea break • Audio-visual equipment – whiteboard, flipchart & screen • Iced water & mints • Conference pads & pens • Car parking

Rydges Parramatta 116-118 James Ruse Drive, Rosehill NSW 2142 Ph: 61 2 8863 7600 Fax: 61 2 8863 7601 Email: Functions_parramatta@rydges.com Internet: www.rydges.com/parramatta

Mention this ad and you will receive one complimentary

accommodation room for your event

+ a cocktail party at the conclusion of your event*. *Terms and conditions apply, event must be worth a minimum of $1000 in Food or Beverage revenue, and client must mention this advert at the time of enquiring to receive this incentive. Strictly subject to availability.


MARQSYD_1574DPS

Focus on the meeting outcome not the meeting charges


BACK TO BASICS CONFERENCING Day Delegate Package from only $46.00 per person including in-room audio visual. Conference and Event Sales Tel: (61) 2 9212 2544 banquets.sydney@MarqueHotels.com

www.MarqueHotels.com Sydney | Brisbane | Canberra | Perth | Christchurch


Dedicated learning environment Macquarie Graduate School of Management in Sydney provides two unique conference centres which are ideal for training, business meetings and events. The residential Macquarie Park Conference Centre offers customers a memorable meeting experience through first class customer service, creative food and beverage options, executive style accommodation and superior meeting facilities, all at affordable prices.

Nestled amongst the tree-filled Macquarie University Campus, less than 20 minutes from the City, MGSM’s Macquarie Park Conference Centre is close to public transport and major highways. With its first-class meeting facilities and unparalleled support services, MGSM leads the way in delivering on its commitment to a meeting experience. MGSM’s Macquarie Park Conference Centre, a multi–award winning, purpose built blended learning environment, certified by the International Association of Conference Centres, where wireless internet access is free, data projectors are free, off street parking is free, and first class service is free, and their complete meeting’s package ensures that you know your costs and can set your budget up front and be confident of meeting it. The Non-residential MGSM CBD Campus is located in Pitt Street close to Circular Quay, loads of hotels and easy access to transport. Built by educators for educators, this Sydney CBD conference centre was designed to bring a unique edge to the traditional meeting experience by incorporating a full service conference centre within a first class education environment. MGSM CBD Campus hosts some 600 not-for-profit, government and corporate sector groups annually at its central Sydney location, where a continuing commitment to practical conference planning, sensitive to modern business needs remains an integral part of their objectives. Designed to the standards of the International Association of Conference Centres, this learning environment in the heart of the city provides state-of-the-art technologies including free wireless access throughout, perfect for training sessions, meetings, team-building seminars, and educational classes. Many decisions go into creating a successful meeting but they don’t get any easier than choosing MGSM. Not just conference centres – MGSM are partners that can help drive the success of your conference, training session or meeting. They have the experience and the environments to ensure your next meeting will be a success.

162


Experience the true conference centre difference!

MGSM Conference Centres 

Purpose-built conference and meeting facilities



Flat floor conference rooms & tiered amphitheatres



Dedicated syndicate/break-out rooms equipped with networked computers



Conference and event specialists



Full range of state-of-the art audio visuals equipment including built in data projection equipment



4 star executive hotel



À Ia carte restaurant and function rooms

MGSM CBD Campus

MGSM Macquarie Park

Level 7, 37 Pitt Street

99 Talavera Road

Sydney NSW 2000

Macquarie Park NSW 2113

T: 02 9850 4600

T: 1800 800 803

www.conferences.mgsm.edu.au

E: conferences@mgsm.edu.au 


Conference Venues and Solutions

The changing face of conference management

This may mean shorter meetings as delegates find it more difficult to get away for more than two or three days, including travel time. More one day meetings and a rapid growth in delegates and organisations wanting access to individual session tickets rather than day or full conference registrations are seen as potential moves in the future. The increased use of video and web-based conferencing could also allow greater numbers of delegates to “attend” without leaving their home states. Mary Sparksman, a director of Brisbane event management company YRD, says she believes meetings are likely to become shorter as people become increasingly time-poor. “Lots of people are now wanting to buy session tickets rather than full registrations for conferences, although at YRD we haven’t yet seen a trend towards video or web-based meetings,” she says. Francis Child, managing director of Sydney-based PCO, Conference Action Pty Ltd, says while there will be increased use of live webstreaming of presentations and keynote speeches for people who are unable to attend conferences, most delegates are still travelling often and want to get the most out of their conference. “There is a slight trend towards including one day of the weekend in a meeting – say, Thursday to Saturday or Sunday to Tuesday – because people can’t get away for so long in work time,” he says. “We work mostly with associations, which are made up of people from lots of different companies, and it’s not uncommon for delegates to take holiday time in order to attend meetings and conferences. A wave of new trends is set to hit the conference and meetings industry, driven by changes in the business world that will provide a number of challenges for conference organisers. Among the issues identified by conference management industry insiders are the ever-changing technology landscape, the global economy, and significant increases in travel and accommodation costs for delegates to conferences and large meetings. Changes to how conferences and large meetings are run may be driven by factors including increasing costs and delegates who are time-poor and looking to maximise the value of their attendance.

164

“Nationally, we are not seeing a trend to one-day meetings because delegates want at least a couple of days. While there might a trend towards web-based meetings in some areas, people still want to network within their peer group and expertise niche, they want to talk and exchange ideas and you can’t do that so well through web-based meetings. “But there might still be one or two keynote presentations that are either streamed live or recorded and posted on the web later for those who couldn’t make it,” he says. “At the end of the day, networking has always been important.”


Anne-Marie Quinn, managing director of Adelaide-based All Occasions Group, says demand for pre and post-conference touring has “slowly diminished” in recent years. “People now don’t have the time to take off – they might stay for the weekend before or after but are no longer looking to tie a conference in with annual leave, unless perhaps they are in an unusual destination,” she says. “Conferences are not necessarily getting shorter but people want to minimise the time they are away.” Quinn says she has seen day registrations rise dramatically, depending on the location. “If it’s a major city like Melbourne, companies based there might send an employee for a day but wouldn’t send them interstate for three days out of the office.” She agrees that video and web-streaming has not made inroads into the conference market, except perhaps for corporate meetings. “The emotional connection and ability to eyeball people face to face cannot be replicated by technology.” Suzanne Hart, who owns and operates one of Melbourne’s leading boutique event management companies, Suzanne Hart Events (SHE), says “short, sharp networking events” are what people want to be involved in today. “Some people would prefer to send their people along to a series of shorter professional development events than give them three days out of the office,” she says.

“That kind of instant feedback on events will become quite important and is potentially a very powerful tool,” he says. Changing styles of conference venues are also being seen. Many conferences are now opting for locations in the CBD and suburbs of major centres rather than choosing resort-style venues, enabling delegates to cut down on travel time once they have flown in to the destination. Quinn says changing trends in venue hire have included an increased focus on security and risk management but most conferences are still held in hotels and convention centres because of size and logistics. “It’s nice to be creative but if the facilities are not right that will limit the choices,” she says. Sparksman also says she is noticing that a number of clients are choosing convention centres over traditional hotels for two to three day meetings, often because there are a greater number of breakout rooms available and because of cost effectiveness. Cost is also a factor in determining the length of meetings and what is included for delegates, as the industry becomes more competitive.

Child says the association market is becoming more organised and professional, with networks becoming increasingly stronger and continuing to grow.

Sponsorship dollars – which traditionally support some of the conference costs – are shrinking, leading to higher registration fees and fewer inclusions.

“In the past, many associations were run by volunteers, but now they are becoming more professional, with secretariats and/or their own staff, as people become more time-poor,” he says.

“There is only so much in the pot,” says Sparksman. “In the past few years companies have been finding things a bit tougher and they are more cautious about where they are spending their money. Organisers have to find ways of economising – that might mean taking out a dinner or cutting back on the costs of the conference satchel, for example.”

Social media is another increasingly important aspect of the conference and meetings industry. Child says it is not uncommon today to find conferences setting up Twitter accounts and having audience members tweet from their seats.

Suzanne Hart believes that the challenge for PCOs in the future will be to make conferences and events as cost effective and efficient as possible for their clients, working within a budget. “It’s time that we all looked at things differently and important not to get stuck in a format,” she says. “We need to be looking for solutions for our clients, to help them design an event that is efficient for them. “My gut feeling is that you don’t always need a three day event; you should be looking at the type of event the client wants and how that fits. The ‘norm’ may have to change. “There is a world of opportunity for events, we just need to make it work by using our business skills and applying them to our clients’ needs. It needs to be a partnership, working together to make great events, helping them create any kind of event they want.”

The Professional Conference Organisers (PCO) Association represents 750 PCOs in Australia and New Zealand. 165


Dingley International Hotel Dingley International Hotel is located in the South Eastern suburbs of Melbourne only less than one hour from Melbourne airport. The suburb of Dingley sits on the edge of the high-worth industrial corridor running from Moorabbin to Clayton. It is easily accessible by car as the freeways are close by. It is right next door to the Moorabbin airport that among other activities services the corporate clients.

Whether you are looking for a small intimate meeting room or a theatre style presentation for up to 300, our professional banqueting and conference staff can help plan your conference or function to suit your specific requirements. Our rooms have just undergone a high class refurbishment. We are confident that we are offering you a state of the art facility with all related presentation technology. Our rooms are extremely well lit, our cinematic features are brand new, and our computer interfaces are all proven. Not to be glossed over is the ample free parking in our car park with capacity for 400 cars. If you’re targeting those within 30 minutes of your presentation, our catchment runs from the Bayside to the Pakenham, Frankston to Chadstone. There‘s nothing ordinary about our catering from our tasty muffins to our gourmet meals. You can be assured of a cost-effective solution that will enhance the presentation of your company or organisation. Dingley International is renowned for its quality presentation to a range of events from weddings and other family milestones to major corporate dining with a silver service flavour. Dingley International has a 50 room Motel attached for your in house conference accommodation needs. Please call on 9551 8344 or email aadams@dingleyinternational.com.au Dingley International – another step in your success!

166


Tabcorp Park

Free onsite car parking in our spacious location provides convenient access to both Melbourne CBD and Tullamarine airport.

Situated 40 kilometres west of the Melbourne CBD and 20min from Melbourne Airport; Tabcorp Park boasts an award winning four star Quality Hotel, function and conference centre. Our light and refreshing function rooms can accommodate up to 700 delegates, with the latest audio visual equipment. We are confident that we can meet your everyday conference and function needs with our extensive range of seminar configurations.

Tabcorp Park is the gateway to regional western Victoria, boasting a unique sporting complex alongside a metropolitan harness racing track. On any race day or night we are able to arrange any corporate entertaining you require from private groups in the deluxe balcony suites or a trackside marquee. Races are able to be sponsored to add a personal touch to your event and it provides your guests with the perfect team building atmosphere. Team Building

Our versatile space is also able to provide the ideal backdrop for every event from small board meetings to large scale exhibitions.

In addition to sponsored races, we are able to organise an array of activities to encourage group dynamics. From a corporate personal trainer, golf days, local wine tasting to a sumptuous morning tea on the racetrack. Please don’t feel restricted to the above as we will endeavour to help with all planned activities. Our conference packages are diverse and can be easily tailored to suit your everyday requirements.

In 2010 Tabcorp Park was awarded gold in the Choice Hotels Australasia Annual Awards, denoting our 41 room Quality Hotel to be in the top 10% in our star category.

Mention this advert to the booking co-ordinator to receive up to a 20% discount* when you book a follow up meeting or conference. (Conditions Apply)

Our magnificent accommodation rooms are adjacent to our conference facilities providing convenience all under one roof. Conference Extras In addition to the superb conference and event facilities, Tabcorp Park is also able to provide you with other fantastic services and activities. With our own 11-seater bus, it allows us to organize airport transfers or transport for your guests to activities in the nearby vicinity. As well as arranging transport needs for larger groups.

2 Ferris Rd, Melton www.tabcorppark.com.au P: 03 8746 0604 or 03 8746 0640

167


The Meadows Conference centre When you arrive at The Meadows, you will be delighted by the outstanding facility with its contemporary design and superb city views. The venue provides a great place to escape the gridlock of your office and concentrate on your business goals. With little effort you can be located within pleasant surroundings - away from the hustle and bustle of your office yet with everything at your fingertips. The Meadows is the ultimate user friendly, purpose designed location for your conference, banquet, business breakfast, meeting, product launch or special event. Our versatility enables us to stage events all year round using flexible first rate facilities. Staff with years of experience in the hospitality industry, ensure that the needs of guests are always met with the highest standards. Conferences will be :- professional, accessible, accommodating and affordable. Our Chef will provide many delicious and affordable menu options for your conference or function however, if you would like something a little different he is happy to attend to your needs on a one on one basis to design a menu to suit your requirements. Looking for Something Totally Different for your Staff or Social Club.... Looking for an extraordinary event for your Team Building Function – you can do this in one afternoon by blending racing with your function. The function centre overlooks the race track and the views are sensational. The Meadows hosts greyhound racing every Saturday night and every Wednesday afternoon. We offer you the opportunity to get involved in the fastest growing sport at a spectacular venue via race naming. All races are broadcast on Radio Sport National and telecast on the vast Sky Channel network throughout Australia. Patrons booking a function can at no cost, enjoy the benefit of race naming through media coverage in the Herald/Sun and massive coverage through Radio Sport National & Sky Channel. • Great exposure for your Company Name • Reward employees by naming a race after them or • Promote your product names The Meadows is the ideal venue to host your next gathering, be it business or pleasure.

The Meadows 80 Northcorp Blvd Broadmeadows. Vic. 3047 ‘Just off the Western Ring Road’ Inquiries: Phone: 03 9355 5222 Fax:

03 9355 5255

Or visit www.themeadows.org.au

168


Very Competitive Rates 

Professional Service 

Flexible room options including multi‐ ple break out areas and room set ups  

Twin Level Exhibition space 

State of the art technical equipment  

Many varied and affordable menu   options  

Capacity for 10 – 600 seated guests 

FREE ON SITE PARKING UP TO 750 cars

Easy acces s to Western Ring  Road & Melbourne Airport 

  80 Northcorp Blvd,   Broadmeadows 3047.  Phone : 03 9355 5222  www.themeadows.org.au  Information & enquires to:  meadows@grv.org.au 


Event and training centre with personality opens at IVC, Adelaide A new, high-tech training, meetings and function centre housed at the International Visualization Centre (the IVC) in the heart of Adelaide’s media precinct, brings together the latest in presentation technology within a historic space on Young Street.

A 19th century church discovered beneath the aging plaster of the premises has become a focal point for the extensive training facilities. Exposed stonework combines with state-of-the-art audiovisual equipment to present Adelaide’s most innovative training and function centre. The result is a space that gives people “room to think”, says designer Michael Kerylidis. “We have been able to maintain the history of the architecture but incorporate contemporary technology in our function rooms and computer training centre.”  Training and 3D animation training leader, the MAD Academy, and several corporate and government customers use the facility, which can be configured for a variety of needs as Seminar Rooms, Training Facilities, Function Rooms and Computer Training Rooms.  “This is a unique venue with a great atmosphere in a creative thinking space. Whether you are looking at a fully-catered event, a product launch, business coaching, or a team building session, you’ll find the right space here at very competitive rates,” Mr Kerylidis said. “The sole purpose of the project was to present a multi-purpose centre and facility-hire rooms that encompasses the latest in today’s technologies, creative design space and purpose-built new media technology facilities. Our facilities mix “old style character” with “modern style” European design and thinking.” The way it is set up is virtually “plug and play”, with everything you could possibly need for your presentations. The centre boasts close to 1000 square metres of creative and aweinspiring spaces of various sizes, accommodating four to 100 people. Function room and café bar facilities are available for product launches and events all in unique 19th Century-restored church walls. The centre has a very clever design and layout, adaptable and professional seminar and meeting rooms with fully configured and

170

functional PC computer-based suites with high bandwidth internet connectivity and Cat 6 cabling throughout the building. Not only that, but The IVC centre is available to you 24/7! As a locally-run venture, International Visualization Centre, offers a centrally-located venue with eight car parks within 4-400 metres. IVC intends to go carbon neutral in the near future, and is very mindful of the environment, offering ample naturally-lit rooms and energy efficient heating and cooling. Government discounts Government readers of Australian GovLink will receive a 10 per cent discount by mentioning this article.

If you are looking for an Adelaide venue to host a meeting, seminar, conference event, a computer based training session with internet connectivity, or even specialty events or other social functions, you should really take a look at The IVC. The International Visualisation Center (The IVC) Location: 19 Young Street (CBD) Adelaide South Australia 5000 Telephone: 1300 555 345 Email: info@theivc.com.au Website: www.theivc.com.au


Conference, Seminar & Meeting Rooms Computer Training Rooms Product Launch & Functions Venue

The International Visualisation Centre

Telephone 1300 555 345, info@theivc.com.au

www.theivc.com.au

19 Young Street (CBD), Adelaide SA 5000

I

VC

facilities hire Training, seminars and meetings have never been simpler. Here is a place where imaginations take flight, the ideal backdrop for you to communicate your ideas in the most efficient and effective way possible and above all stress free. From the technology, to the room setup, to the catering and printing requirements, we have it covered. Our custom designed centre has been designed from the ground up to make it easy to “plug and play” your presentations in the format of your choice, all in a harmonious atmosphere conducive to productivity and learning. Come see for yourself and experience the difference – call 1300 555 345 to arrange a tour.


APRS subscriptions: Subscribe now – free digital eBooks Subscribe Now – Free Digital eBooks Australian GovLink magazine is a bi-annual publication produced in A4 full colour high gloss. It contains over 120 pages of cutting edge editorial that highlights a wide range of government and private sector activities, initiatives, standards and projects. Australian GovLink is also produced as a digital eBook that can easily be passed on via email, newsletter, blog, or web link. To view the eBook please visit: www.aprs.com.au/govlink-ebook. ___________________________________________________________________ ISSUE 1 2011 A u s t r a l i a ’s c o n n e c t i o n b e t w e e n p u b l i c a n d p r i v a t e s e c t o r s

While you are on our website, why not also visit the “Voice for the Water Industry” news portal to find the latest Australian water management news:

www.aprs.com.au/water-news The Australian Water Management Review is an independent voice for the Australian water industry and a well-established member of the APRS resource publications. With regular editorial contributions from leading water industry associations, the Australian Water Management Review is an indispensible tool for any company looking to reach the industry’s key Australian Water Management Review 2011

decision makers or for individuals to keep abreast of the latest trends and projects within the Australian water industry. If you would like to subscribe to the free digital eBook of the Australian Water Management Review, please visit our website and click the Australian Water Management Review

2011

Subscribe Now button:

www.aprs.com.au/water-ebookok

Announcing new environment magazine The environment sector in Australia is growing at an unprecedented rate. Uniquely placed to take advantage of renewable energy, Australia is poised for billions of dollars in investment and the creation of tens of thousands of new green jobs. Australian Publishing Resource Service (APRS) is therefore pleased to announce The Australian Environmental Review 2011. To find out more information about this new magazine, please visit:

www.aprs.com.au/enviro-media-kit


DISCOVER THE ART OF DOING BUSINESS IN BROOME Overlooking one of the world’s great beaches, Cable Beach Club Resort & Spa, Broome has the capacity to co-ordinate and accommodate conference and incentive groups from 10 to 200 in our purpose-built conference facility. The Sam Male Conference Room features an abundance of natural light and French doors opening on to a sweeping, colonial-style verandah. Temperature controlled, the room can be divided into three separate spaces to offer flexibility in program design and facilitation. Conference & incentive groups are offered a specially negotiated run of house rate on a mix of our recently refurbished Studio Rooms. For delegates with families, the resort offers “classic Broome” self-contained Bungalows, or to reward best performers why not look at our range of decadent Villas or flagship Suites. In addition to four on-site dining options, the experienced team based at the Resort can coordinate a range of events at some amazing and unique venues in and around Broome. For more information please contact conference@cablebeachclub.com or visit www.cablebeachclub.com


Telecommunications

Government Contact Centres

lead charge

for innovation and excellence in the Australian Contact Centre industry Scheme

174


At a recent industry presentation Dr Catriona Wallace from ACA Research revealed that customers actually place a higher level of expectation on waiting time for government centres then they do for private sector centres.

Answer Phone

About the Author Michael Meredith is the CEO of the ATA, the peak industry body for contact centres and contact centre professionals in Australia.

For many years now the delivery of services to the public by government contact centres has matched, and in many instances surpassed, those of the private sector in key benchmarks such as efficiency, value, technology and customer satisfaction. The integration of good governance with customer service, as well as increasing transparency and accountability, is of paramount importance to centre management as government contact centres evolve to become the primary interface for interactions between government agencies, businesses and the general public. According to callcentres.net 2009 Australian Contact Centre Industry Benchmarking Report almost a third of contact centres in Australia are government operated and therefore it is not surprising that a lot of the innovation and demand for progressive approaches is coming from the rich source of talent and resources within the government sector. Michael Meredith, CEO of the ATA, Australia’s peak body for the Contact Centre Industry believes government contact centres play a critical role in the continued evolution of the contact centre profession and industry in Australia, and in fact often act as leaders and early adopters that pave the way for ongoing growth, competition and improvements. “We have seen the growing focus from our government members to drive the professional evolution that is taking place within our industry. The increasing sophistication in technology, multichannel customer management, training, development and people management is happening at a rapid rate, but what is interesting is that often the early adopters of new approaches and technologies are from within the government sector. This is not just because they may have the bigger numbers and budgets, but it is also driven by their need to demonstrate operational efficiency, ROI and agreed levels of customer service as part of their commitment to their core stakeholder group, the Australian public, ” said Mr Meredith.

Government

Private Sector

77 seconds

82 seconds

Reply Web Chat

65 seconds

72 seconds

Email Response

8 hours

9 hours

The effects of the GFC throughout 2009 and into 2010 in many ways leveled the playing field between government and private sector operators. Whilst there was tightening of belts all round, many contact centre operators took the opportunity to review operations and service delivery frameworks in order to maximize efficiencies and streamline processes. As a result, the contact centre industry was one industry that not only weathered the GFC well, but continued to grow and flourish. This time of self-review revealed to many organizations and agencies the value of the contact centre to the business as a critical communication channel between the organisation and its customers. In Australia the entire contact centre industry is responsible for approximately 77% of all customer interactions, meaning contact centres are almost solely responsible for communication between a company and its customers. This is no different in government, in fact it is perhaps even more pronounced. As well as being responsible for upholding and enhancing the reputation of a government agency, the contact centre has also become a vast repository of business intelligence, which is fed back through the organisation in real time. Some government agencies are taking customer relationship management to new levels of intimacy and sophistication, utilising newly emerging technologies such as biometric identification and even entering the pervasive new online channels of social media such as Facebook and Twitter. A clear demonstration of the emerging dominance of government contact centres in regards to innovation and leadership is reflected in the success of government contact centres in the ATA National Awards of Excellence that recognize and celebrate the highest achievers and innovators in the contact centre industry. “In our National and State Awards for example, the proportion of government centres is always very high and particularly in the last couple of years, the number of government sector State and National winners has been disproportionately high. Almost half our winners this year came from the Government sector, which is pretty impressive,” said Mr Meredith. Another area of Government leadership in the Contact Centre space is through the adoption of the Contact Centre Standards and Accreditation (CCSA) Program. The Contact Centre Standards and Accreditation programme (CCSA) is a comprehensive programme developed by the ATA with industry consultation. It provides public and industry recognition that a contact centre has met all industry approved standards and guidelines and operates at a high level of competency. The Fair Work Infoline run by the Federal government agency, Fair Work Ombudsman was the first Government Contact Centre to be awarded accreditation achieved by the ATA’s Contact Centre Standards and Accreditation Programme (CCSA).

175


Telecommunications

the region as a customer service hub and address lingering negative perceptions about contact centre careers. The Hunter region has a significant professional community of contact centres with more than 35 centres ranging in size from 6 to 260 seats. These centres are a mix of private and public sector organisations and industry sectors covering financial services, insurance, government services, health, tourism and hospitality, and consumer sales and services. The collaboration had already established an industry networking community that facilitated regular manager forums bringing local professionals together to workshop issues and share knowledge and ideas. A continual challenge identified in the forum gatherings was recruitment and the image of the industry. Suzette Gaff, Industry & Investment NSW, Business Development Manager for the Hunter region said one of the goals of the project was to overcome negative perceptions about call centre careers.

At the time of accreditation, the Fair Work Ombudsman used the assessment process as an essential benchmark to build and improve processes for the newly formed Fair Work Infoline, which had come together from a number of predecessor organizations. Consistently high customer service was also a focus for the Infoline, which provides advice and assistance about workplace relations issues ranging from wages to anti-discrimination. It operates nationally from 8am to 6pm on 13 13 94 and fields about 4500 calls a day and it is expected to respond to up to 1.6 million calls this financial year. “As a new organisation it was a perfect opportunity to use the Standards program to figure out what we were starting with and evaluate what we needed to work towards. The Bronze level gave us a confidence that we were starting with a solid business model and approach, and it also provided us with a set of start-up operational benchmarks. “The submission process was thorough and rigorous, and where it revealed some gaps and holes in our model, we were able to use it as an opportunity to improve and fine tune, particularly in the areas of our business continuity plan and quality programs,” said Mr Michael Clark. “For us, the Bronze accreditation was a good starting point and we can definitely see the value of moving up to Silver Level accreditation as one of our business moving forward. It is important to us, as a government organisation that we operate to a standard and continue to perform at a high level and look to ongoing improvements. The Standards programme provides this at a national industry level,” said Mr Clark. “The Australian contact centre industry has worked hard over the past 21 years to position itself as the regional leader, with centres demonstrating higher skills levels, adaptability, and customer service levels second to none” said Mr. Meredith.

“Many people still believed it is simply invasive telemarketing, whereas that is not the case. We needed to communicate the broad skills and career opportunities that are available in the contact centre industry – from customer service and HR, to IT and management.” With support from Industry & Investment NSW, the centres and the ATA developed a targeted PR and communications project resulting in a careers brochure showcasing the opportunities and diversity of employment within the contact centre industry. Employees from participating centres were interviewed and profiled and their testimonials were included in the brochure. These were distributed to all schools and careers advisors and placed in local Centrelink and job centres. The centres also used the materials to participate in new job forum expos. One year on, the Hunter continues to thrive as a contact centre hub. Similar partnerships are being considered for other metropolitan and regional areas in NSW.

Hunter Contact Centres For a varied career path and great opportunities, a contact centre most certainly fits the bill; including, in many cases, on the job training.

SPONSORS Principal Sponsor

The Hunter Region has a significant professional community of contact centres with more than 35 centres ranging in size from 6 to 260 seats. These centres are a mix of private and public sector organisations and industry sectors covering financial services, insurance, government services, health, tourism / hospitality, consumer sales and services. The contact centres in the Hunter support outbound and inbound calling from both local and national callers, although centres servicing local clients tend to be smaller.

Gold Sponsors

In the majority of cases, these centres employ predominantly fulltime staff, with short-term or part-time staff employed for particular contracts and campaigns. Source: Industry and Investment NSW; Survey March – May 2009.

The Benefits of Working in a Contact Centre: • Flexibility to maximise work/life balance. • Appeal to large range of workers including disabled, people returning to the workforce after a break etc. • Flexible working arrangements often available. • Promote skills development which may assist progress within the industry. • Multi level entry points. • On the job training often provided which may lead to externally recognised qualifications and transferable skills. • Qualifications achieved through on the job training may assist career progression.

Make ContaCt

Current Career Opportunities:

“The ATA’s Contact Centre Standards and Accreditation program is recognised as perhaps the best quality contact centre Standard in the industry and already there is widespread interest in adopting it throughout the Asia Pacific region and beyond. For both government and private sector contact centre operators, the adoption and successful implementation of the Standards will ensure the continued innovation and professional evolution of our industry and ensure we not only deliver the best in customer experiences but continue to create a valuable and competitive industry.” CASE STUDY 1. Creating jobs: A collaboration with Industry and Investment NSW, the ATA and Contact Centres from the Hunter Region In 2010 the ATA collaborated with Industry & Investment NSW and a diverse community contact centre in the NSW Hunter area to promote

176

• • • • •

Customer service People management Training OH & S Administration

• Sales and marketing • Business management • HR management • IT

Bronze Sponsor

and get connected to your career!

Vacancies in contact centres are advertised in print media such as newspapers, on job websites such as www.seek.com.au and through employment agencies.

The Benefits of Working in a Contact Centre: • Flexibility to maximise work/life balance. • Appeal to large range of workers including disabled, people returning to the workforce after a break etc. • Flexible working arrangements often available. • Promote skills development which may assist progress within the industry. • Multi level entry points.


• On the job training often provided which may lead to externally recognised qualifications and transferable skills. • Qualifications achieved through on the job training may assist career progression. Current Career Opportunities: • Customer service

• Sales and marketing

• People management

• Business management

• Training

• HR management

• OH & S

• IT

• Administration CASE STUDY 2 Dillwynia provides critical skills training for women offenders Many may not be aware that from inside Dillwynia, a women’s prison at Windsor, NSW, a thriving telemarketing call centre is being operated by Corrective Services Industries (CSI). Employment is a critical part in helping offenders reintegrate into the community. It helps to break the insidious cycle of re-offending. The Dillwynia call centre has 25 offenders who are trained up to Certificate II level and who have practical skills gained in a realistic and commercial environment. Regular employment expos are held resulting in positive outcomes for future employment. Women working at Dillwynia are committed employees in the State’s thriving Teleservices industry.

These women are work-ready and have employability skills. There are many benefits to business in employing these women either while they are still in custody, via a work release program, or when they are released. The women are assessed in terms of their work readiness and employability skills; they receive accredited vocational education and training; they are often highly motivated and loyal; and resumes and other assessments are often completed which can reduce recruitment costs. Crime costs the community billions of dollars. By forging strong links between employers and CSI which employs offenders in a wide range of work in custody, offenders can be supported to secure and maintain employment after release. The Teleservices industry is particularly relevant because it generally offers flexible working hours, excellent training and support and can be an introduction to other jobs in the organisation. CSI runs a number of other business units including making workstations and furniture and ergonomic chairs suited to the Telemarketing industry. CSI focuses on employability skills, education and reducing re-offending. CASE STUDY - Elizabeth had never worked in her life. She had been in and out of gaol a few times. On her last sentence she undertook the Cert II and began working in the Telemarketing business at Dillwynia. She loved the work and got a job with a call centre company as part of a work release program (this is where she went to work each day and came back to gaol each evening). When she was released the call centre employed her full time. Four years later she is in a management role for the same company. She is an inspiring and confident woman. She is a parent to her children and she contributes to society. This would not have been possible without the industry inside the prison and the investment her employer made.

177


Do you talk the talk? In Unison – The power of Language and Technology Australia is truly multicultural. Communicating effectively with a population that is diversifying rapidly is pivotal to achieving stable and cohesive communities across the nation. The need to provide responsive and appropriate services to Australia’s Culturally and Linguistically Diverse Communities has risen over the past several decades due to the growth of our population. This is compounded by the current humanitarian crisis which confronts Australia. How we, as a business community and as service providers, respond to these needs, will shape Australia’s community now and into the future.

The system is supported by an extensive database that maintains all call information. This provides clients with accurate reports, designed to monitor the success rate of the service, marketing and public relations campaign.

Technology plays a fundamental role in meeting this agenda. To prosper in today’s digital age, organizations must look at ways at integrating technological solutions for improved service delivery function. VITS’ technology does just that. It can empower communities effectively whilst providing organizations with value for money.

An automated national telephone interpreting service which can:

Is your organisation doing enough for your community? With over 30 years experience, VITS can help. VITS LanguageLink strongly believes in the need for quality interpreting and translating services. Australia’s migration statistics indicate that the need to utilize language services is more prevalent now than ever before. A snapshot: • Over 30% of the Australian population is from a non-English speaking background. • Over 200 languages are spoken in the Australian community. • Almost 50% of migrant settlers that arrived in 2009/2010 are from countries with little or no English proficiency. • Over 70% of humanitarian settlers (arrived 2009/2010) are from countries with little or no English proficiency. VITS has a long history of providing services to culturally and linguistically diverse communities through its Government and Private sector market clients. Our standard services include OnSite Interpreting, Translations and Telephone Interpreting with more specialized services including Content Focus Testing, Desktop Publishing and Training. Technology can lead to greater social inclusion. VITS LanguageLink leads the language services market using innovative telecommunications technology offering Recorded Information Services and automated Telephone Interpreting. Utilizing our highly sophisticated telecommunications platform, VITS can offer: Multilingual Recorded Information – Exclusive to VITS A national service which allows non-English speaking consumers to have direct access to pre-recorded information in their own language with the option of speaking to a customer service agent (in your organisation) with the assistance of an interpreter. This service is available in over 100 languages.

178

(See opposite page for more information). LanguageLink – Telephone Interpreting

• Respond to real time interpreter requests within minutes • Connect clients to accredited and experienced interpreters via a range of telecommunications devices (desktop phones, mobile phones, etc). • Operate 24-hours, 7 days a week; • Service more than 100 languages with over 1200 trained and accredited interpreters. • Provide connection to an interpreter within 180 seconds (in 90% of all cases). But are language services important? Absolutely. It is about managing risk while providing consumers with appropriate resources that facilitate access to services. Think about the risks organizations face when consumers are left to deal with life changing decisions and cannot communicate proficiently in English. Or, they are trying to settle into their local community but find the process daunting and exhausting – information is scarce and often difficult to source, further complicated because of low literacy levels and language barriers. Can you imagine the level of disengagement experienced by new communities attempting to settle with little or no appropriate assistance or information? The use of interpreting and translating services has been widely accepted and practised for some time. Acknowledging the need for an interpreter or translator should be no longer the minimum requirement in order to provide a culturally appropriate service to Australians from diverse backgrounds. In 2011, Government and Business communities need to translate this understanding into a broader commitment for the betterment of Australia’s multicultural community.


Do you speak your customers’ language? We do.

Reach over 100 non-English speaking communities with Recorded Information Services only available at VITS. Your benefits: ACCESSABILITY: Your organisation becomes more accessible by providing information about services and initiatives.

MASS COMMUNICATION: Target over 100 language groups with dedicated language information lines. SCALABILITY: Scale the service size based on how much information needs communicating. PRODUCTIVITY: Reduce in-bound calls into your customer service/call centers. Our guarantee: SUPPORT: Real time interpreter assistance for your non-English speaking customers. TECHNOLOGY: Sophisticated, fully automated platform using the latest in telecommunications technology.

Other services @ VITS:

> Telephone interpreting > Written translations > On-Site interpreting > Training

RELIABILITY: Guaranteed service availability with service agreements available. SERVICE: Fully managed solution which includes implementation and service management.

Call to discuss your needs with VITS today – 03 9280 1941

Providing quality interpreting and translating services for over 30 years

www.vits.com.au Level 1, 371 Spencer Street, West Melbourne VIC 3003


Any Smartphone in the hands of a Government representative should be certified and secure. BlackBerry, the smartphone of choice for the Australian government, introduced a new operating system in 2010 (BlackBerry 6) which has successfully completed a Common Criteria maintenance assurance process to ensure it is secure in the hands of Australian government staff and representatives. As a result, BlackBerry smartphones with the new Operating System 6 have successfully maintained Common Criteria Evaluation Assurance Level 4 (EAL4+) certification. With industry leading security and encryption technology, configured in accordance with the Defence Signal’s Directorate (DSD) hardening and consumer guides, these handsets are approved for Australian Government business use, for networks classified up to and including IN-CONFIDENCE (excludes CABINET-IN-CONFIDENCE). The BlackBerry Torch and the newest BlackBerry Bold 9780 come equipped with the certified Operating System 6 and devices upgradeable to OS6 are the 3G Pearl, the 3G Curve and the Bold 9700. BlackBerry is Serious about Security The security offered by the BlackBerry Enterprise Solution meets strict confidentiality and security requirements for remote data access, so you can feel confident about sending and receiving sensitive information while on the go. Thanks to advanced encryption standards, email and other data remain encrypted at all points between your BlackBerry smartphone and your department’s BlackBerry Enterprise Server. Data is protected along the complete path between the sender and the recipient and whilst on the BlackBerry smartphone. Guidance for Government IT Departments Through consultation between RIM and DSD, the BlackBerry Hardening Guide was updated as of 13th December 2010 to bring the guide in line with the capabilities of BlackBerry Enterprise Server version 5, and modifying some restrictions and controls for the transmission of classified government information. This guide can be found on the DSD website here: http://www.dsd.gov.au/library/pdfdocs/HG_BES_v5.pdf These changes mean increased functionality for government users of BlackBerry. You can now access and use BlackBerry Messenger to communicate with colleagues. The changes now allow for you to deploy and use a range of applications on your BlackBerry as well as the SD cards for media content. Access to social networking applications on your device is now possible, depending on the decision of individual agencies. In short, the changes will enable government employees to enjoy the full BlackBerry experience The BlackBerry Experience You can find out about all the devices available in Australia at au.blackberry.com as well as tips and tricks, features information and videos. Operating System 6 features better, faster internet browsing and even tabbed browsing so you can easily have multiple pages open at once.

180

And the internet looks like the internet, whilst still running with the unique data compression provided by BlackBerry. To get the most out of your BlackBerry device you simply must check out: BlackBerry App World either on your device or online at au.blackberry. com/AppWorld. There are some applications that are designed in conjunction with BlackBerry, such as the official BlackBerry app for Twitter. But most applications are designed by people with cool ideas for using the functionality and connectivity of the BlackBerry device, and are then submitted to BlackBerry App World either for sale or for free download. Did you know there are thousands of applications for BlackBerry and that number is growing all the time? They range from apps you’d find useful during the work day, like mileage and expense trackers, to business and financial news apps, contact management and document tools,and more. Offering everything from health and wellness and education apps, to social media apps like Foursquare, FaceBook and Twitter, to maps and navigation tools through to games and even meditation aids, BlackBerry App World is there for you to explore! BlackBerry Messenger is an absolute must. It’s an instant messenger app just for BlackBerry devices with a chat style layout, unlimited characters, the ability to set up chat groups and even send pictures, videos and files. Best of all you can use BBM as much as you want, wherever you are, chatting to other BlackBerry users around the world at no extra cost – it’s included in your data plan when on your home network. Music and Media apps and options abound, though you may not have thought of your BlackBerry that way. From digital radio apps, to the ability to transfer your music collection to your smartphone so you can listen while you run, to podcasts you can catch up on during your daily commute, it’s easy to make your BlackBerry an entertainment device as well as a work tool and a phone. Don’t forget the still camera and the video camera, and make sure you upload your best snaps to Twitter or Facebook or email them to friends and contacts right from the camera tool.


Introducing BlackBerry 6.

The certified mobility solution for Australian Government. • BlackBerry® smartphones with the BlackBerry® 6 Operating System have achieved Common Criteria Evaluation Assurance Level 4 (EAL4+) certification. • With industry leading security and encryption technology, BlackBerry 6 is the only certified mobility solution for Australian Government*. • Upgrade to BlackBerry 6 and enjoy the great new enhancements including fast, rich web browsing, social feeds and views, and universal search. Find out more at au.blackberry.com

Apps designed for you to do more. www.blackberry.com/au/appworld

Connect in real-time, anytime on BlackBerry® Messenger

©2011 Research In Motion Ltd. All rights reserved. BlackBerry®, RIM®, Research In Motion® and related trademarks, names and logos are the property of Research In Motion Limited and are registered and/or used in the US and countries around the world. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Screen image simulated. *The only certified mobility solution in Australian Government for networks classified up to and including RESTRICTED/ PROTECTED. BLB0001


Waste Management

Established in 1991, the Waste Management Association of Australia (WMAA) is Australia’s peak Association for waste management and resource recovery professionals. WMAA’s more than 1,000 multistakeholder membership includes individuals as well as Corporations, academics, Local and State Governments. Members come from many disciplines – physical and social sciences, engineering, law, government, management, consulting, OH&S and waste and recycling practitioners. WMAA has a network of State Branches, National Divisions and Special Interest Groups that provide the opportunity for networking, communication and involvement in projects aimed to encourage sustainable waste management. Some of these special interest areas include landfill, organics recycling, energy from waste, construction and demolition waste, industrial waste streams and sustainability education.

The Future of waste and resource management 182

With a growing set of environmental and market demands emerging from a global need for improvements in the efficiency of operations, the economics of wealth creation activities, the utilisation of resources and the management of the environment, a cultural and structural change is necessary if the waste industry is to respond and survive into the next decade. The WMAA acknowledges that to be effective in this challenge, the waste management industry must become pro-active in developing solutions within the operations of its customers. It is no longer enough to collect wastes and emissions at the end of the proverbial pipe. The challenge for WMAA members is to create value-added goods out of the by-products of the waste generators and deliver multiple economic and environmental benefits in the process. Unfortunately, waste generation has continued to grow, and increased efforts at recycling and reuse are not keeping up. The nature of waste has also changed, where more complex goods are now forming a significant component of landfill. As a result, on 5 July 2010, the Environment Protection and Heritage Council (EPHC) endorsed the first National Waste Policy Implementation Plan. Until then, the various Australian State Governments were responsible for waste management within each State. This plan, however, is an effort at a more coordinated national policy framework. The policy sets the direction for Australia over the next ten years to produce less waste for disposal and manage waste as a resource to deliver economic, environmental and social benefits. In July 2010, as part of the Enviro 2010 Conference and Exhibition, WMAA facilitated a National Policy Workshop. The workshop’s aims


were to canvas the waste and resource recovery industry’s response to the National Waste Policy and develop a list of actions that the industry believed it could quickly act on once the National Policy legislative framework was enacted in each State. Ten priority actions were submitted to the Department of Sustainability, Environment, Water, Population and Communities (DSEWPC) for its consideration: • Develop a consistent definition for all wastes • Willingly share industry and government data across jurisdictional boundaries in a consistent form • Assist in the creation of a single point of reference for solutions for regional/remote Australia • Develop an affordable life cycle analysis assessment tool that can be used by local government officers for procurement • Develop scientific evidence based material characteristic data • Develop a method to prioritise products/materials against an agreed set of criteria for product stewardship legislation • Foster recycling of new material through a producer responsibility organisation (PRO) • Adopt a national definition for clinical wastes • Develop a nationally consistent economic rationale for landfill levies to assist in establishing appropriate landfill pricing signals to drive resource recovery • Establish working links between the waste and resource recovery industry to brand owners with access to distribution channels for commodities including energy, glass, plastics and e‐waste Thus far, three Australian States – Queensland, New South Wales and South Australia – have released their respective waste strategies for public comment. These documents set out to outline a new direction for waste and resource management in hope that the reforms will encourage the behavioural change needed to avoid waste, and reuse and recycle precious raw materials. When finalised, the strategies will be the primary documents guiding State and Local Government agencies, business, the waste and resource recovery industry and the community. Currently, as part of the National Waste Policy, the government is preparing to draft regulations that will underpin industry arrangements for collecting and recycling televisions and computers. Known as

the National Television and Computer Product Stewardship Scheme, the regulations aim at establishing a national framework to support voluntary, co-regulatory and regulatory product stewardship and extended producer responsibility schemes to provide for the impacts of a product being responsibly managed during and at end of life. Product stewardship has been adopted in Australia and internationally as an approach to managing impacts of different products and materials. Key drivers include hazards in products, costs imposed on local municipalities, lack of capacity to manage safely specific forms of waste, international agreements, increasing prices for raw materials, the scarcity of resources, changing community values and limited space for landfill. On 25 March 2011, the Federal Government tabled legislation that will support the introduction of the Carbon Farming Initiative (CFI) – a market system that will allow abatement activities from the land sector to generate carbon credits that can be used in the international and domestic compliance and voluntary carbon markets. With the inclusion of “legacy waste” deposited in landfill facilities as well as Alternative Waste Treatment (AWT) activities, the CFI potentially has the biggest impact on Compost, Landfill and AWT industries within the waste sector. In January 2011, Compost Australia (CA) – a Division of the WMAA comprising of members representing the organics processing and recycling industry – submitted comments to the Federal Government on the consultation paper outlining the proposed design of the CFI. Three of the amendments between the exposure draft version of the legislation and the tabled Bill, directly addressed concerns raised by the CA in the written feedback to the Department of Climate Change and Energy Efficiency (DCCEE). They include: • A modified test for additionality of projects, where projects will be deemed to be additional if they are specified in regulations and are not required to be undertaken due to any Commonwealth, State or Territory Law – referred to as a “positive list”. Previously, an alternative test of additionality for projects not on the “positive list” was to be used, which required the case-by-case application of the common practice test and the financial viability test. • The first crediting period being increased from three years to seven years for offset projects. • The definition of “legacy waste” being amended such that the cut-off date for legacy waste will be determined later, possibly matching the start date of the proposed carbon pricing mechanism. A further meeting between CA and the DCCEE – with the aim of getting

183


Waste Management

a Carbon Offset accounting methodology, which includes the carbon benefits of compost use recognised by government – took place in late March 2011. During the meeting, CA proposed the development of a CFI offset methodology for compost applied to agricultural land. Initially, the methodology would be designed only to cover the recalcitrant carbon contained in compost – this is the fraction likely to persist 100 years, or more, in any agricultural situation. Based on current understanding, this would be equivalent to approximately 10% of the dry matter in compost. This translates to about 20m3 of commercial compost for every 1 tonne CO2 eq. sequestered. CA believes that this approach would initially bypass the complexities involved in measuring and modelling the interactions between applied compost and the soil / climate / land use. Instead, methods for measuring the recalcitrant carbon in compost could potentially be refined, with the possibility of correlating those measurement techniques with existing measures of compost maturity. Once this offset methodology is in place, CA hopes to include compost in a soil carbon offset methodology that considers the effects of agricultural land use and other factors affecting how long composted carbon persists in the soil. Even though the WMAA National Landfill Division (NLD) did not present to the Federal Government an official submission on the CFI, it did welcome the initiative, as it believed this approach would increase GHG abatement. The NLD has formed this view, because the CFI will create a significant improvement in environmental performance across the industry by generating financial benefits for methane gas capture and minimise the industry’s environmental footprint. With the Bill’s stipulation that emissions from landfill facilities could be avoided by capturing and destroying emissions at the landfill facility or via diversion of waste to prevent it from reaching the landfill, it is intended that waste diversion and AWT activities – together with abatement activities at the landfill facility – be eligible for crediting under the scheme. This addition to the Bill opens up real opportunities for innovative companies and allows the resource recovery sector, which to date has been at a disadvantage by not being able to receive any tangible fiscal benefit from its activities, to be able to access the international carbon market. In this climate of change, the WMAA continues to provide a forum for debate amongst its diverse membership. It also creates multiple opportunities for networking and information exchange; advocacy;

184

professional development; representation of waste industry interests to government; and affiliation with other local and international organisations such as the International Solid Waste Association (ISWA).

For more information about joining the Association, please visit www.wmaa.asn.au


Accuweigh Accuweigh is Australia’s largest and most experienced industrial weighing company with over 150 staff located in eight branches providing local state based sales and service support across mainland states. We are also Australia’s largest supplier of weighbridges with two dedicated manufacturing facilities based in Brisbane and Melbourne. Our weighbridges are fully Australian made using locally sourced BHP steel and we cater for all weighbridge requirements. Our product range is comprehensive and caters for all council needs in : • Weighbridges • In-Motion Axle Weighbridges (Trade Approved) • Weighbridge Software, Traffic Lights, Boom Gates, RFID • Driver Control Stations For Unattended Weighbridges • OnBoard Vehicle Weighing Systems • Truck Wheel & Underbody Wash Systems We can provide standard and custom engineered software solutions to client requirements and also offer full turnkey control of large projects that require both hardware and software integration to existing host systems.

Accuweigh is the exclusive distributor of the highly regarded PM Onboard range of onboard vehicle weighing systems manufactured in the UK which has been readily accepted by many large Australian companies, including Veolia, JJ Richards, Superior Pak, SITA and Papas Waste. Accuweigh has partenered with Black Box Systems to link with GPS based navigation and truck monitoring systems. Accuweigh also supplies a range of high quality truck wheel washing systems ranging from basic wheel wash baths manufactured in Brisbane up to fully automatic and self cleaning wheel and underbody truck wash systems that are very cost competitive and ideally suited for Landfill operations. No other Australian company has the capabilities, experience or resources to better cater for council needs for all weighing requiremants and truck wheel wash equipment.

185


Toro Waste equipment TORO Waste Equipment prides itself on the design and manufacture of innovative, high-quality equipment for the waste, recycling, construction and demolition industries. Its range of containers is proving to be the perfect partner for hook lift and skip loader operators. With more than 10 years of experience in the industry Michael Leong, Managing Director of Toro Waste Equipment has built a reputation for manufacturing outstanding high quality containers. In particular their range of hook lift and roll on roll off bins are in demand. What are the key benefits of the hook lift system? “The efficiency and versatility of the hook lift system makes it a great tool for transporting waste, recyclables, plant and equipment. Unlike tipper trucks and tilt trays, the hook lift system enables the driver to quickly detach the container from the truck, freeing the truck up to service other containers. In this day and age you cannot afford to have a truck and driver idle waiting to be loaded,” says Michael. We have recently completed a series of specialised hook lift skids for AGL Energy – Upstream Gas Operations. The hook lift system has enable AGL to efficiently transport a complete operational pump including diesel engine, transmission, pump, fuel, hydraulics and controls as a single operational unit. Other extraordinary hook lift attachments we’ve produced include, hook lift crane bins with SWL in excess of 20t, de-watering tanks, refrigerated containers, site offices and flat top trays. We have also worked on improving transport efficiency by developing a range of stackable and nest able hook lift containers”

Tony Tartak, Managing Director of Bingo Waste Bins is a big fan of Toro Waste Equipment. “My company owns and services 1,250 skip bins and 200 hook lift bins throughout Sydney. We specialise in the transport and recycling of construction waste. The last thing I want to be doing is repairing bins. When I chose Toro Waste Equipment as our bin manufacturer, it was their tough designs, consistent high quality and capacity to manufacture large quantities that impressed us,” says Tony. Toro Waste Equipment range includes Hook lift bins, Skip and Marrell bins, Front and Rear lift Bins, Tippler Bins and Crane Certified bins. Delivering throughout Australia For further information call 1300 55 65 70 or go to www.johntoro.com.au Contact Toro Waste Equipment 9 Long St, Smithfield, NSW Ph: 1300 55 65 70 Fax: (02) 9475 0257 Web: www.johntoro.com.au Email: sales@tweq.com.au

How do you continuously improve your designs? “We have embraced 3D design software with finite element analysis capabilities, to maximise the strength and performance of our containers as well as increase their longevity in what is a brutal work environment,” explains Michael. “Experience is equally important when it comes to container design. Over the years manufacturers have come and gone, each with their own design variation. Its when these bins come in for repair 5-10 years later that you get a good understanding of what does and does not work. We observe the common failure points, isolate the failure and focus on engineering out the weakness.” We find that our rolled side Hooklift bins out perform the traditional square sided design in terms of longevity and useability. Having fewer welded joins where rust and corrosion form, we find that the contents of rolled sided bins discharges freely, leaving minimal residual material which typically builds up in the corners of the traditional square sided design. Do you use specialised materials in your designs? “We see great benefits in using high performance steel in our designs. The right choice of steel enables us to significantly reduce container weights and extend product life. The additional up front investment quickly pays for itself through lower maintenance cost, higher payloads and reduced transport costs.” Along with utilising high performance steel, Toro Waste Equipment employs specialised epoxy coatings to inhibit corrosion in difficult environments, particularly with food, pulp and sludge type waste.

186

“When i chose Toro Waste Equipment as our bin manufacturer, it was their tough designs, consistent high quality and capacity to manufacture large quantities that impressed us.”


Weighbridge Software From the industry professionals AASoftware supplies Weighbridge Software for all weighbridge applications, including landfills, waste transfer stations, quarries, transport and logistics. AASoftware has a large assortment of standard, off-the-shelf Weighbridge Software packages to suit most weighbridge applications, but also has the ability to write custom Weighbridge Software packages to client specifications. With offices located in Adelaide and Brisbane, Advanced Australasian Software (AASoftware) has competent and highly-skilled staff with extensive experience in providing software to the weighing industry. AASoftware is the software division of Accuweigh (Australia’s largest weighing company) and also supplies Data Acquisition and Automation Solutions for all types of industries. We provide a complete hardware/software automation solution for all council weighbridge requirements; from simple stand-alone PC systems up to numerous networked PC’s with office licenses for multiple login points. Total integration with existing host systems is also available with external login access to assist with operator training, faultfinding and system upgrades to eliminate the need to visit site in most cases. AASoftware also provides Australia’s leading range of Driver Control Stations (DCS) as used mainly for unattended weighbridge installations.

188

The quality of these Australian Made DCS units is astounding with fastidious care and attention paid to every single component: • Full Colour Active Touch Screen • Fully Sealed Industrial Grade PC with integral heat sink – no fans or cooling vents • Professionally wired with all cables and components identified on full schematics • Heavy gauge stainless steel housings available for aggressive environments • Standalone DCS, Master/Slave Combinations and full integration with host system AASoftware also specialises in supplying RFID Systems which are both very effective and generally an inexpensive means of automatically identifying personnel and vehicles to a software package. AASoftware has developed a proud history of software engineering success with many high profile Australian companies and we would be only too happy to provide you with a list of our client base.


Over 150 Years In Weighbridges Experience weighs heavily when choosing a reputable weighbridge supplier and no other company in Australia has as much experience with weighbridges and weighbridge software as Ultrahawke. Hawke & Co started operation in 1867 at Kapunda in South Australia where they forged a fine reputation as Australia’s premier weighbridge manufacturer. Hawke was purchased by Ultra Scales in 1983 and the businesses merged to form the company as its known today – Ultrahawke Pty Ltd. Ultrahawke was the first Australian weighbridge manufacturer to introduce electronic weighing components into weighbridge designs and this entrepreneurial spirit still lives on in our current staff. In 2007, the company moved into a larger, dedicated weighbridge manufacturing facility based in Campbellfield in Melbourne’s North. Todays market is led by the demands for improving efficiency, product tracking and increased weighing accuracy due to QA requirements and Ultrahawke is still at the forefront of meeting customers’ needs. Emerging growth industries, such as: waste management, recycling, and the ever increasing requirement for detecting overload vehicles for all the various Main Roads Authorities throughout Australia are all relying

heavily on Ultra’s ability to supply a quality product, customised to suit their exacting requirements. Ultrahawke is continually developing new technology for the Australian market with the DCS (Driver Control Station for un-manned weighbridge sites) being widely recognised as the best available on the local market. Ultra’s Software Engineers are at the forefront of software development in the weighing industry and are continually striving to cope with the ever increasing demands for custom engineered product. The staff at Ultrahawke are extremely dedicated, hardworking and strongly believe in themselves and their firm’s capability to succeed to such an extent, that most view their positions as careers – not simply jobs. Many staff have spent most of their working lives with this one company. Ultrahawke is your complete weighbridge supplier and our 150 years of weighbridge experience is your guarantee of satisfaction.

189


LAST UP TO

* TIMES LONGER

Solutions, not just sales!

Premium Quality

LONGER LASTING Construction Tyres

* Based on customer product feedback, proven field testing & collective research data, Solideal Lifemaster SKZ skidsteer tyres can last up to 7 times longer than budget priced R4 pattern tyres. Solideal Hauler SKS skidsteer tyres can last up to 4 times longer than other equivalent competitor tyres.

Better for the Environment & your pocket! TYRES WHEELS & RUBBER TRACKS designed to meet your requirements & perform to exceed your expectations in any environment. Construction Sites  Green Waste Recycling  Transfer Stations  New Road Construction 

Snow Covered Mountains  Outback Landscapes  Groomed Turf  Muddy Sports Fields 

No More Flat Tyres with ARNCO Flatproofing Solutions

we've got it covered...

GRASS

SAND

Exclusive Australian Distributor

MUD

ROCK

METAL A member of the SOLIDEAL® group

Australia’s Largest Distributor of Premium Quality Industrial & Construction Tyres, Wheels & Rubber Tracks. Sydney (02) 9688 8888 Melbourne (03) 9931 0237 Brisbane (07) 3375 6808 Adelaide (08) 8262 8699 Perth (08) 9353 5788 sales@bearcat.com.au www.bearcat.com.au


Records and Information Management

Information management Managing information is a complex and ongoing issue—and it’s vital to your business. Not only do you need to make sure that data is available to the right people at the right time, competitive pressures demand that data be leveraged to help you identify trends, respond more quickly to customers and to optimise day-to-day operations wherever information is used within your business.

• word processing documents

Customer expectations are very high and grow higher with each interaction, so you must continue to improve the customer experience by making historical and transactional information readily accessible to your sales, service and marketing teams. Critical business information is needed at the CEO’s fingertips at all times to help make more informed business decisions.

• text messaging

Beyond day-to-day operations, today’s business environment is one of increasing regulations as well as more stringent internal corporate governance. Under these regulations and policies, information must be accessible and secure, and stored for long periods of time—for decades in some cases.

• personal hard drives

It is becoming increasingly important to capitalise on business information—transforming data into relevant, accessible information that creates business value. You must also find ways to sustain compliance and support governance mandates while controlling costs. Why Records Management is Important Documents are the by-product of captured business transactions and describe how organisations process and record their daily activities. Records are the official version of those business documents and become corporate assets used to document actions, decisions, and outcomes. Official document versions are records that must meet legal and regulatory laws as well as corporate operational obligations. Today’s businesses are creating and receiving records at an astonishing rate. The volume of records is not only staggering but the records also come in a variety of formats such as:

• emails • faxes • instant messaging

• digital images – scanned paper documents • new media types such as blogs and wikis • and these documents may reside on a variety of media:

• network drives • backup tapes • CDs and DVDs • flash drives ...and some documents may also be created and reside temporarily on remotely attached devices like personal digital assistants (PDAs) or memory sticks. Given the volumes of documents, combined with the diverse number of formats, companies are finding it nearly impossible to effectively manage their documents and records without an electronic records management system. Storage Data growth continues to accelerate beyond levels that can be easily managed – indeed, the overall quantity of data stored in electronic format is estimated to be doubling at a rate of less than every six months. A large proportion of this is driven by consumer storage of 191


Records and Information Management

digital pictures, music and videos; but organisations are also seeing rapid growth in volumes of commercial data. This corporate data growth, often complicated by the need for internal and legal compliance, remains a major concern and has driven organisations to consider information storage and lifecycle management from a business point of view, rather than from a purely technical one. For small to mid-sized organisations, this growth in data and information volumes runs the risk of being uncontrolled – not only will there be corporate information that needs managing, but also a mix of personal data, such as letters, photos and mp3s that may be being saved to central shared drives by end users. This blurring between the personal and the business is something that is difficult for a small to mid-sized organisation to effectively manage – a highly proscriptive approach can rapidly lead to employee demoralisation and to ineffective and inefficient work processes. Many small to mid-sized organisations are simply drowning in data. While up to 80% of stored information may have little to no direct business value, it has proven difficult to identify which 80% this applies to. Data and information is stored on a “just in case” basis – to show compliance, good governance or the capability to trend information. Large organisations will often filter data as it is being stored and will utilise advanced search and retrieval tools to facilitate better information identification. For the small to mid-sized organisation, many of these tools are perceived to be out of reach from both a financial and complexity perspective – and yet the problems are just as acute for them as they are for larger organisations. At a basic level, all information needs to be stored in a secure and resilient manner. However, these days this is not enough, and organisations have to ensure that information is easily available to meet the needs of individual applications, composite applications based around web services, reporting and business information tools and the

192

needs of individuals within the organisation. The need for a “360 degree” view in many cases requires a means of bringing data together to ensure that decisions are built upon a contextual view of all the information available to an organisation – and not just on the data belonging directly to an application at any one point in time. The main problems that small to mid-sized organisations find include: that they have had to overprovision their individual technical environments to meet expected peak loads, that multiple instances of applications have been introduced to meet specific needs, that information is being stored in multiple islands and silos and that far too much human resource is being utilised to manage and maintain the environment. The first step for many small to mid-sized organisations is to look at how existing storage needs can be rationalised and consolidated. Through consolidation, the over-provisioning of the past can be brought under control – but only if the consolidation is carried out in a fully planned manner. Here, rationalisation to a minimum set of storage assets and to a common set of storage and information management tools will ensure a fully optimised solution. What’s changed? Practically everything! To further complicate matters, everything keeps changing until, pretty soon, no one knows what has changed. They’re frustrated. They’re confused. Worse still, by this point, they no longer seem to care. But ignorance and apathy are not excuses. You might be thinking of it this way: Your old records management program is like a steam engine—slower than the latest bullet train, maybe lacking all the bells and whistles, but it moves forward. It does the job. WRONG! Until you get on board with the new reality of records management, your old program is only going to derail you.


TECHNOLOGY: Take a memo? No thanks. We’ve come a long way from the days of carbon copies and central filing systems. Today’s business communication walks on the wild side thanks to innovations like the Internet, email, instant messaging, and PDAs. BUSINESS PROCESSES: Doing business is like catching a plane. You don’t buy a ticket for Perth if you’re headed for Sydney. You don’t board before you get to the airport. In other words, things have to happen in a certain order. And as business goals and circumstances evolve, you adapt your processes to keep pace. REGULATIONS: The law won. With the post-boom bust in consumer confidence came a drastic drop in profits and a lot of financial faux pas. The end result: Government stepped in and reviewed the set of laws to teach businesses how to play by the rules. PUNISHMENTS: As regulations grow in number and complexity, the consequences for non-compliance grow more severe. Do your job wrong, go to jail. Just because there are new laws for records management doesn’t mean that people abide by them. But it’s true— whether you’re a clerk or a CEO, you now face the threat of big fines and prison time. COSTS: Money, money, money. Yesterday’s records management programs which haven’t delivered what they promised for whatever reason. You’re the one paying the price. The deeper you dig yourself into non-compliance, the more expensive it becomes to get out of the hole

References: Technology as a tool: Where is records and document management heading? – Frank McKenna – infoRMAA Quarterly November 2007 Vol:23 Issue 4 Building the intellectual architecture for records management – Conni Christensen – infoRMAA Quarterly, November 2007 Vol 23, Issue: 4 Gartner Surveys –accessed through www.gartner.com Fogarty, Kevin. “Electronic Records: Courting Disaster?” Baseline 33 (August 2004): 70. Flood, Gary. “Don’t Let the Fear Factor Blind You,” Information World Review, December 2004, Issue 208, retrieved through Business Source Premier, April 17, 2005. Manion, Kevin. “Integrating Archives, Records, and Research,” Information Management Journal 39 (January/February 2005): 50-52, 54-55. Myburgh, Sue. The New Information Professional: How To Thrive in the Information Age Doing What You Love (Oxford, England: Chandos Publishing, 2005). Jeanne Young, “Electronic Records Management on a Shoestring: Three Case Studies,” Information Management Journal 39 (January/February 2005): 60. ‘ODF Gains Standard Status’, The Information Management Journal, September/ October 2006, p17. No author cited. ANSI/AIIM/ARMA TR 48-2004 - Technical Report for Information and Image Management - Framework for Integration of Electronic Document Management Systems and Electronic Records Management Systems ISO 15489 - Information and documentation — Records management - Part 1: General and Part 2: Guidelines (Technical Report)

Future Trends It is safe to say that the volume of documents and records within a company will continue to grow because electronic technologies make it exceedingly fast and easy to create new documents. New technologies also help companies retain their competitive edge and are quickly adopted by records and information management workers, even while corporate IT lags behind. Blogs, text-messaging, and instant messaging (IM) are good examples of technologies that have not been fully accepted into the IT architecture but are increasingly used by records and information management workers. Also on the horizon, and being recognised by records and information managers, are the application service providers (ASPs) that will “rent” you applications and storage via the Web. Serious questions exist as to the ownership and liability of these files when stored on a third-party site, or created using applications that cannot guarantee fidelity of structure, fixed date-stamping, or other critical RM ‘keys.” Formats for documents are also changing as Adobe’s PDF is evolving into PDF/A, or PDF Archive, for long-term archiving and future readability. This seemingly endless advance of technology will all need to be managed and controlled by a records and information management professional through a “system”. New document types, as well as formats, will need to be captured, classified, declared, and stored according to a records retention schedule. Electronic records management systems will become even more important to a company’s overall document management strategy and be more tightly integrated with the tools and systems used by knowledge workers.

Contact the author, Kate Walker FRIM MAICD AMIM, MBA, BSC (BAdm), AdvDipBus (Rkg), DipBus (Adm), Chief Executive Officer, Records and Information Management Professionals Australasia T: 0409 250 795 E: kate.walker@rimpa.com.au W: www.rimpa.com.au

Along with the growth of technology, document types, and formats, will come new rules and regulations that evolve in an effort to control technology itself. Existing legislation will most certainly change over time and records management systems must be able to quickly adapt to new rules as they appear. A key criteria for any records management system will be flexibility, adaptability, and extensibility (to new data types). In terms of compliance with legislation, records management systems are not passive keepers of archived documents but are actively involved in helping companies manage their compliance needs.

193


CSM/Inservis

benefit from the huge savings in both space and time. This is achieved because of the lateral filing, providing more levels of storage within the CSM units. It saves valuable floor space, whilst at the same time, colour coding makes files easily identifiable.

Providing Innovative Records Management Solutions How important is the storage and filing of records in your organisation? In most offices, records management and filing are by far one of the most important aspects. CSM/Inservis have identified the importance of records management, and offer a total solution(s) strategy that will suit any large or small organisation. CSM’s vast product range, combined with our experienced marketing and design team, has resulted in CSM/Inservis being awarded NSW State Government Contract 1006. The Accufile Colour Coded Filing System, as supplied by CSM, is a sleek, stylish, efficient and easy way to manage and maintain physical records. Accufile Software allows users to create labels for Side Tab, Top Tab, Lever Arch Files, Front Page Covers and more as desired, using their own choice of characters and colours. When combining the Accufile Colour Coded Filing System with the CSM-designed Tambour Retractable Door Cabinets, Open Bookcases, Static Shelving or Rolling Storage units, your work environment will

Those who prefer the hanging style of filing system can utilise CSM’s Lateral Drawer cabinets. Alternately, Suspension Filing frames can be fitted to most of the CSM range of cabinets, allowing a combination of shelves and filing frames which should satisfy any end users’ requirements. There is a solution for every office, and CSM can also provide experienced consultants to assess and report on potential improvements to organisations’ information management systems. Larger storage requirements are perfectly suited by Static Shelving and Rolling Storage units as they utilise minimal space whilst providing a greater number of Lineal Metres of shelving. A range of Industrial Storage solutions are also available. These focus on workshop and warehouse needs, such as Workbenches, Heavy Duty Storage Cabinets and Mobile Storage Racks. CSM’s range of Cabinets, Shelving and Rolling Storage units are all highly safe and secure. Retractable and Hinge Door Cabinets, as well as Rolling Storage units, can be made for high class security utilising class C & B SCEC approved locking mechanisms. The move towards Green Records Management is also supported by CSM, a range of Storage Cabinets, Static Shelving and Rolling Storage units can all be Good Environmental Choice Australia (GECA) and Green Building Council green star certified. Speak with one of our experienced and professional consultants today to see how CSM can customise a Records Management solution to suit your organisation.

tambour cabinets retractable cabinets open bookcases static shelving lockers rolling storage units heavY dutY Workshop benches records management sYstems CsM Inservis is an Approved Supplier SCCB Contract No. 1006

p (02) 9540 2111 e sales@csm-office.com.au w www.csm-office.com.au

INNOVATIVE records management sOluTIONs csm records mgmnt ad 190x132.indd 1

194

28/4/11 3:55:35 PM


Disaster Recovery This is not a test It’s one thing to promise your clients how well you’ll perform in a crisis. It’s quite another to have to deliver on that promise. DataBank is a national provider of offsite data tape storage, offsite document storage, and information management services. DataBank’s promise to clients is that we will provide them with secure, reliable recovery services in the event of disaster. Unfortunately, disaster came to Brisbane recently in the form of widespread flooding. As never before, this event required us to put our experience, processes and Disaster Recovery (DR) plans to the ultimate test.

assets to the United Kingdom, with our staff escorting media items on international flights. The flood reinforced for us the importance of location in DR planning. That both our facility and our access to it were entirely unaffected by the massive flood reassured us that we had chosen its location well. During those harrowing days, good communication between DataBank and our clients was crucial, as was our reliability. Given our commitment to our role in the event of disaster, we provided our clients with the peace of mind that we would continue performing our core tasks of delivering and collecting their data and documents under particularly adverse conditions. DataBank as a business—particularly DataBank Queensland—gained valuable experience from the recent Brisbane flooding. We are proud of the efforts of our staff throughout the terrible disaster that befell Queenslanders. Most of all, we are proud that when our clients needed us most we came through for them, just as we promised we would.

Most daunting was that we had to provide DR services not just to one or two clients, but to a large number of clients simultaneously. We were immediately confronted with significant challenges. These included providing urgent deliveries to multiple DR sites, whilst maintaining our strict security protocols as we delivered backup tapes to alternate locations.

Photo courtesy of Martin Scholtz

agement . an I M

SO 90 0 1

Qualit y

Logistics was the key service management issue. We were required to not only collect and deliver tapes from sites in and around Brisbane, but also interstate and overseas. This included the urgent delivery of media

Global-Mark.com.au®

195


INTEGRATED INNOVATIVE

thiess.com.au


OuR cApAbIlITIEs plAcE yOuR NEEDs fIRsT You seek sustainable water solutions to meet community demands and population growth. We deliver the technical knowledge and skills to ensure the preservation of this vital natural resource for future generations. The Metropolitan Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP) Upgrade Alliance Program (pictured) is working to deliver one of Western Australia’s most substantial WWTP upgrade programs. The project includes conceptual design, engineering, procurement, construction and commissioning services for capacity upgrades at the Water Corporation’s Beenyup and Woodman Point WWTPs. Our water infrastructure and services specialists are delivering major projects across Australia and New Zealand. We bring a range of multidisciplinary engineering skills, including civil, mechanical, hydraulic, tunnelling and processing capabilities, to this important sector. Through our integrated capabilities, we also provide network maintenance and asset delivery solutions through our Thiess Services subsidiary.

Recent pRojects

ouR capabilities

»

Victorian Desalination

»

»

Bundamba Advanced

» » » » » » »

Project, Vic Water Treatment Plant, Qld Goodna Water Reclamation Plant, Qld Wurdee Boluc Water Treatment Plant, Vic ‘us’ – Utility Services Alliance, Vic Waikato Water Project, NZ Hinze Dam Stage 3 Alliance, Qld

» » » » » » » »

Dams, weirs and catchment works Desalination Plants Bulk irrigation schemes Major pipelines Plant operations and asset management Sewage treatment Transfer and network distribution Water recycling plants Water treatment

Swan Water, WA Metrowater, NZ

contact National

New South Wales and ACT

Rob Evans – Manager – Water

Phillip Charley – Water and

07 3121 8500

Wastewater Manager

Victoria, South Australia

02 9332 9444

and Tasmania

Western Australia

Bob Brownlee – General

Jim Aquino – Business

Manager Utilities - Services

Development Manager

03 8892 5900

08 9214 4200


1

Infrastructure specialists 2

3

LUCAS EXPERTISE IN ACTION Trenchless sewer for Hunter Water. Lucas installed this 1,350 m long, 900 mm HDPE pipe using our award-winning HDD technology, avoiding trenching in this sensitive environment. Lucas has done nine HDD sewers over 1,000 m. More than anyone else in the world.

2

WA’s second desalination plant. Lucas, in alliance with Técnicas Reunidas, Valoriza Agua and WorleyParsons, began construction in July 2009 of WA’s second seawater desalination plant near Binningup. By enabling construction without disturbing the fragile littoral landscape, Lucas trenchless technology has been critical to this project.

3

Queensland’s Western Corridor recycled water project. Lucas delivered pipelines, pumping stations, horizontal directional drilling and microtunnelling on the Eastern Pipeline.

110401

1

PIPELINES • TRENCHLESS • WATER TREATMENT & RECYCLING • COAL SEAM GAS

AJ Lucas Group Limited www.lucas.com.au Sydney (02) 9490 4000 Perth (08) 6216 9800 Melbourne (03) 8615 7800 Brisbane (07) 3235 8100

Sustainable Infrastructure Company of the Year

WINNER Australian Pipeline Industry Association Safety Award

SUSTAINING AUSTRALIA


The Australian Govlink June 2011